C7H 18 12 11

Driver's Manual of SITRAK-C7H Series Vehicles
4th Edition
Foreword
This manual describes SITRAK-C7H series vehicles with respect to operation method, routine maintenance and maintenance
information, as well as the relevant safety regulations that should be followed when driving the vehicle.
Be sure to read this manual carefully before you start your vehicle for the first time.
For details on assemblies, modifications or attachments not manufactured by SINOTRUK, please refer to the documents provided by
their manufacturers.
Due to the large number of models, the pictures in this manual may not exactly match the model you purchase; the illustrations are
merely representative examples. SINOTRUK reserves the right to modify the shape, configuration and technical performance of the
vehicle at any time. Therefore, we will not accept any claims that may have been made against the data, illustrations or text
descriptions in this manual.
The vehicle configuration is subject to the order, and the driver's manual will be updated from time to time.
The driver's manual and warranty manual are part of the vehicle, please keep them in your vehicle and available for use.
Warning symbols used in this manual are as follows:
CAUTION: These safety instructions warn against possible injury（risk of serious or fatal injury）.
WARNING: These safety anstructions warn against possible damage to property.
Note: These notes provide additional information which may prove invaluable.
This manual is prepared by Technology Development Center of SINOTRUK.
Wish you a safe, comfortable and happy driving journey!
China National Heavy Duty Truck Group Co., Ltd.
2018.02
This manual may not be reproduced, copied, translated or excerpted without the written consent of SINOTRUK. This manual is
strictly protected by copyright law and all copyrights are reserved by SINOTRUK.
I
WARNING
WARNING
- Engine must use the dedicated oil, oil filter and fuel filter of MC/MT engine, otherwise it may cause early wear of the
engine. SINOTRUK only provides the paid service against any damage therefrom!
- Transmission must use the dedicated gear oil of SINOTRUK transmission, otherwise it may cause damage to the
transmission. SINOTRUK only provides the paid service against any damage therefrom!
- Drive axle must use the dedicated gear oil of SINOTRUK drive axle, otherwise it may cause damage to the drive axle.
SINOTRUK only provides the paid service against any damage therefrom!
- Air filter elements must be replaced with the original parts of SINOTRUK. If you use an inferior filter, the engine may be
damaged due to dust in the air inlet. SINOTRUK only provides the paid service against any damage therefrom!
- Engine must use the dedicated coolant of SINOTRUK, otherwise it may cause damage to the engine. SINOTRUK only
provides the paid service against any damage therefrom!
- For the first maintenance and the scheduled maintenance, vehicle oil and filter element must be replaced at the
SINOTRUK authorized service station, otherwise it may cause damage to the vehicle. SINOTRUK only provide the paid
service against any damage therefrom.
II
Vehicle nameplate
Vehicle nameplate
The nameplate of the vehicle is located at the door frame on the co-driver's
side（visible after opening the door）. The nameplate is marked with the
vehicle model, main quality parameters, engine model and other
information.
VIN is printed on the outside of the web of right rail of the frame at the
centerline of front axle and on the nameplate of the vehicle.
Please carefully check whether VIN is consistent with the certificate.
III
Vehicle nameplate
Vehicle nameplate
MC11/13 and MT13 engine nameplate ① is installed on the cylinder, and

is located on the intake side of the engine, the rear end of the generator and
the top of the high-pressure pump;
1 The engine nameplate information includes: engine model, rated

power/speed, manufacture serial number, order number, emission standard,
net weight and so on.
IV
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Vehicle Operation ···························································································································································1
Door operation/central door lock ················································································································································2
Rearview mirror adjustment（manual） ····································································································································9
Heating of front windshield ······················································································································································10
Storage box ··············································································································································································11
Toolbox····················································································································································································12
Dashboard ················································································································································································13
Deflector adjustment ································································································································································14
Sunshade adjustment ································································································································································16
Manual sunroof ········································································································································································19
Seat adjustment ········································································································································································21
Sleeper ·····················································································································································································29
Steering wheel adjustment························································································································································32
Seat belt ···················································································································································································33
Cab interior overview·······························································································································································37
Instrument panel ······································································································································································38
Rocker switches and buttons ····················································································································································45
Detection lights and warning lights ··········································································································································51
Driver‟s screen and detection light panel ··································································································································54
Information display on the driver‟s screen and detection light panel ·························································································67
V
Combination switch ·································································································································································75
Steering wheel buttons ·····························································································································································78
Electric horn/air horn ·······························································································································································85
24V cigar lighter/power socket ·················································································································································86
Lighting ···················································································································································································87
Telematics ················································································································································································92
Intelligent auxiliary system（optional） ··································································································································93
MP5 player ············································································································································································105
Braking system ······································································································································································117
Air conditioning system ·························································································································································132
Independent heating system ···················································································································································140
Cab tilting mechanism ···························································································································································144
Chapter 2 Driving preparation ·····················································································································································148
Overview of inspection and maintenance ·······························································································································149
Inspection and maintenance before starting the engine ···········································································································151
Inspection after starting the engine ·········································································································································165
Chapter 3 Driving the vehicle ······················································································································································169
Driving/running-in ·································································································································································170
Use the vehicle economically ·················································································································································171
Tachograph ············································································································································································173
Vehicle load ···········································································································································································176
Use the vehicle in winter ························································································································································177
VI
Start the engine ······································································································································································179
Stop the engine ······································································································································································182
Clutch ····················································································································································································183
ZF transmission ·····································································································································································184
SmartShift® AMT ··································································································································································198
Retarder ·················································································································································································214
Differential lock ·····································································································································································219
Air suspension ·······································································································································································223
Fifth-wheel ············································································································································································237
Semi-trailer operation ····························································································································································240
Chapter 4 Practical advices ························································································································································244
Replace the tire ······································································································································································245
Towing and towing start ·························································································································································249
Jump Start/Auxiliary Start ······················································································································································253
Spring-loaded brake chamber - Emergency release·················································································································254
Belt ························································································································································································257
Fuel system ············································································································································································258
Vehicle LNG supply system ···················································································································································262
Vehicle CNG supply system ···················································································································································267
Air filter ·················································································································································································272
Electrical system ····································································································································································280
Lighting ·················································································································································································282
VII
Vehicle cleaning and maintenance ··········································································································································284
Chapter 5 Vehicle maintenance ··················································································································································288
Steering system ······································································································································································289
Diesel engine ·········································································································································································291
Natural gas engine ·································································································································································353
Clutch ····················································································································································································366
ZF transmission ·····································································································································································370
SmartShift® AMT ··································································································································································379
Retarder ·················································································································································································381
Front axle···············································································································································································395
Rear lift axle ··········································································································································································401
Drive axle ··············································································································································································402
Suspension ·············································································································································································416
Drive shaft ·············································································································································································419
Vehicle maintenance ······························································································································································425
Chapter 6 Safety and Environmental Protection ·······················································································································432
Safety notes ···········································································································································································433
Environmental protection ·······················································································································································443
Chapter 7 Technical parameters ·················································································································································444
Technical parameters······························································································································································445
VIII
Chapter 1 Vehicle Operation
1
Door operation/central door lock
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle until the door is closed properly.
1 Door operation/central door lock（outside）

2 Open the door
•Method 1: Insert the key ① into the keyhole, turn the key anticlockwise
（clockwise on the co-driver‟s side）to open the door lock, pull the handle
② and open the door.
•Method 2: Press the unlock button on the remote-control key to open all the
door locks, pull the handle ② and open the door.
Lock the door
•Method 1: Close the door properly, insert the key ① into the keyhole, and
turn the key clockwise（anticlockwise on the co-driver‟s side）to lock the
door.
•Method 2: Close the door properly, and press the lock button on the
remote-control key to lock all the doors.
2
Door operation/central door lock（inside）

B
Open the door 1
Method 1: When the door is closed and locked, press "A" on the right side
of the rocker switch ① and pull the handle ② to open the door; in the
2
unlocked state, pull the handle ② and open the door.
•Method 2: When the door is closed and locked, press the unlock button on
A
the remote-control key to open all the door locks, pull the handle ② and
open the door.
Lock the door
•Method 1: Close the door properly, press "B" on the left of the rocker
switch ① to lock all the doors.
•Method 2: Close the door properly, and press the lock button on the
remote-control key to lock all the doors.
Key bar code
According to different configurations, the key can be divided into remote
control key and ordinary key. There is an ID code necessary to make a new
key on the key's plastic pendant, which can be used to make the key at the
distributor.
Please keep the ID code properly.
3
Electric window
Note
1 C
2
○
i The window rocker switch on the co-driver's side is located
on the door operation panel.
This switch has the function same as the window rocker switch on the
door operation panel on the driver's side.
Open the window partially or fully
 Open the ignition switch and set it at ON.
 Press "C" at the end of the rocker switch ①（driver‟s side）or ②
（co-driver‟s side）.
 When pressed for 2 s, the window will automatically open and move
always. After released, the window will stop moving.
 When pressed for more than 2 s, the window will automatically drop to the
bottom. During the movement of the window, pressing or lifting "C" at the
end of the rocker switch ① or ② again will stop the window.
4
Close the window partially or fully
WARNING
-Be careful of the risk of injury. 2

1 C
-Make sure that there is no pinch when closing the window.
-To prevent over-heating of door window and door lock

motors due to frequent switching actions, the control system
provides them with overheat protection.
 Lift "C" at the end of the rocker switch ①（driver‟s side）or ②（co-driver‟s
side）.
 When lifted for less than 2 s, the window will start to rise and will stop
moving after the switch is released.
 When lifted for more than 2 s, the window will automatically rise to the
top. During the movement of the window, lifting or pressing "C" at the end
of the rocker switch ① or ② again will stop the window.
5
Rearview mirror adjustment

3 4
Note
D
E
○
i - The mirror can be adjusted only when the ignition switch is
ON.
A
2 - Make sure the driver's seat is in a comfortable driving
position.
1 B
- To prevent the motor from overheating due to frequent
switching, the control system overheats the motor! After the
C mirror motor starts and stops continuously for 10 times
within 5 s, the mirror will not respond to any operation
command within 3 min.
- Do not adjust the mirror while driving.
 Check the mirror settings and adjust when necessary.
 Clean the mirror when necessary.
 Select the type of mirror to be adjusted via the rocker switch ②（rearview
mirror and wide-angle mirror）.
 Select the right and left mirrors via the rocker switch ④.
 The mirror control ③ can achieve the fore/aft and right/left adjustment.
6
Functions of the mirror adjusting switch

3 4
 The adjustment of the corresponding mirror can be realized by pressing
E
the arrow in the four directions in the adjustment switch ③:
D
Rotate the mirror left and right A
2
Rotate the mirror up and down
1 B
 After the adjusting switch is released, it will automatically return to its
C
original position.
 The mirror will stop in case of any of the following conditions:
The mirror selector switch and the left/right selector switch are in neutral;
The ignition switch is not in ON position.
7
Note
3 4
○
i -The mirror heating device will function only when the
ignition switch is on.
E
-When the mirror is icy or frosty, please switch on the mirror
D heating device.
A -When the voltage is lower than 23V, the mirror heating
2 device will fail; after the voltage returns to normal, the
mirror heating device will not be switched on automatically.
1 B After the ignition switch is turned to ON position again and
the voltage returns to normal, the mirror heating device will
C work normally.
Switch on the mirror heating device
 Turn on the ignition switch.
 Press "C" at the end of the rocker switch ①, switch on the mirror heating
device, and then the heating indicator located on the rocker switch will
come on.
Switch off the mirror heating device
 When the mirror defroster is working, press "C" at the end of the rocker
switch ①.
 The heating device will be switched off automatically 15 min after the
mirror defrost function is started.
 The ignition switch is not ON.
8
Rearview mirror adjustment（manual）

 Manual mirror adjustment should be performed in the parked state.
 Confirm that the doors are locked before adjustment.
 Lower the door window and find the proper angle by pressing the
perimeter of the left/right mirror lens.
 Left and right rearview mirrors may need to be adjusted for several times
before finding a proper angle.
9
Heating of front windshield
Heating of front windshield

1
 ① refers to the defrost air outlet.
 For front windshield heating control, see "Air conditioning air outlet
mode". Press the "MODE" button to select the defrost MODE, and then
press the defrost button to enter the heating state of the front windscreen.
Press the defrost button again to exit.
10
Storage box
Storage box
The upper storage box can store living items such as clothing, without heavy items.
The position of an opened storage box is shown in the figure.
11
Toolbox
Toolbox
A toolbox is provided respectively on the right and left sides of the cab.
1
Open the toolbox cover
•The toolbox open handle ① is located behind the seat, and pulling the
handle can unlock the toolbox.
•Push up the snap switch ② with your finger and open the tool box cover ③.
3 When turning about 20 degrees, the cover can stay in any position with the
support of air spring.
Close the toolbox cover
4 2 Pull down the pulling strip ④, close the tool cover ③ and carefully Press
the button to lock the toolbox.
12
Dashboard
Dashboard
Driver's side: Vehicle control and information display.
Central and co-driver‟s side: items storage area.
13
Deflector adjustment
The deflector（optional）consists of a roof shroud, two side fenders and two
1 side baffles.
2 3
Correct installation of roof shrouds and side baffles can reduce fuel
consumption.
4 5 Height-adjustable roof shroud ② Left fender ③ Right fender
④ Left baffle ⑤ Right baffle
Be careful of accidents.
-When adjusting the roof shroud, be sure to stand on a

suitable platform with sufficient adhesion.
-The height of the roof shroud after adjustment must not

exceed the height permitted by the regulations.
-For low-floor flatbed or rail vehicle, the height of the roof

shroud must not exceed the height permitted by the
regulations.
-When operating on international routes, laws and regulations

of the country must be observed, and when necessary, the
deflector should be readjusted.
-Make sure the deflector height is the same on both sides.
14
 According to the height of the vehicle body, use the rear adjustable
bracket to adjust the roof shroud ①.
2 1 3
4 5
 Loosen the star-shaped handle ⑥ on any adjustment bracket until the

clamping block is free from the star-shaped handle.
 Hold the roof shroud securely and loosen the star-shaped handle on the
second bracket.
6
 Once the roof shroud reaches the desired position, tighten the two
clamping blocks on the back in sequence and secure them with the
star-shaped handle.
15
Sunshade adjustment
Sunshade adjustment
Front sunshade
There is a sunshade on the left and right sides of the windshield in the front
of the cab（the same method of unfolding and folding）.
 The position after front sunshade is folded.
1  The driver can pull the pull ring ① to place front sunshade ② in the
desired position.
 The position after front sunshade is pulled down.
 The driver can pull the pulling strip ③ as needed to fold front sunshade
②.
2
16
Sunshade adjustment
Side sunshade
There is a sunshade on the left and right door windows of the cab（the same
method of unfolding and folding）.
 The position after side sunshade is folded.
 The driver can pull the pull ring ① to place front sunshade ② in the 1
desired position.
 The position after side sunshade is unfolded.
 The driver can push the sunshade ② upward as needed.
17
Sunshade adjustment
Surrounding curtain
The surrounding curtain can be used when the driver wants to have a rest.
 The figure shows a folded curtain.
 After folded, the curtain is bundled and fixed on both sides.
 Unfold the curtain slowly along the rail.
 The figure shows the unfolded surrounding curtain.
18
Manual sunroof
Manual sunroof
1
WARNING
The sunroof should be closed when there is nobody in the cab A
to ensure theft prevention and to prevent rain and dust from
entering the cab.
B
 The position when the sunroof ① is closed.
 Maximum opening angle of the sunroof ①.

1
 The sunroof can be opened at three positions.
19
Manual sunroof
• Opening at maximum angle position（fully open position）:

Rotate the handle ② in the direction A to the end, and then push the handle
② upward to the limit position.
• Closing at maximum angle position（fully open position）:
Pull the handle ② downward to the bottom and then rotate the handle ② in
the direction B to the locked position.
• Opening at neutral position（2nd position）:
Rotate the handle ② in the direction A to the end, and then push the handle
② upward to the neutral position and finally rotate the handle in the
direction B ② to the locked position.
• Closing at neutral position（2nd position）:
Rotate the handle ② in the direction A to the end, then pull the handle ②
downward to the bottom, and finally rotate the handle in the direction B ②
to the locked position.
• Opening at minimum position（upwrap position）:
Rotate the handle ② in the direction A to the end, then push the handle ②
upward to the minimum position, and finally rotate the handle ② in direction
B to the locked position.
• Closing at minimum position（upwrap position）:
Rotate the handle ② in the direction A to the end, then pull the handle ②
downward to the bottom, and finally rotate the handle in the direction B ②
to the locked position.
20
Seat adjustment
Seat adjustment
Driver’s seat and co-driver’s seat（double lock/comfort）
WARNING
-Never adjust the seat while driving, and adjust the seat only
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
5
-Make sure you hear the click sound of the seat locking
device.
-It is unsuitable to fix the child seat on the driver’s and

co-driver's seats. 1
-Fasten the seat belt before driving, see "Seat belt".
4
① Seat angle adjustment
3 2
② Seat fore/aft adjustment
③ Seat height adjustment
④ Seatback angle adjustment
⑤ Armrest angle adjustment（optional）
21
Seat adjustment
Seat angle adjustment

 Pull up the handle ① and adjust the cushion angle as needed.
 Release the handle.
Seat fore/aft adjustment
 Pull up the handle ②and slide the seat forward/backward.
5  Push the seat forward or backward until you hear a sound that the seat
locks in place.
Seat height adjustment
 Pull up the handle ③ and adjust the seat to the proper height by sitting in
or out of the seat.
1
Seatback angle adjustment
4
 Lean back and push the seatback to unlock it.
3 2  Pull up the handle ④.
 Adjust the seatback to the desired position.
Armrest angle adjustment
 Rotate the handle ⑤ and adjust the armrest to the desired angle.
22
Seat adjustment
Driver’s seat and co-driver’s seat（double lock/luxury）
WARNING
-Never adjust the seat while driving, adjust the seat only when
the vehicle is at a standstill; Adjust the luxury seat only when 1
it is under load and the pressure is not less than 8bar.
-Make sure you hear the click sound of the seat locking device. 8
-In the event of a damaged airbag, a brand-new seat should be
7
installed.

co-driver's seats. 6
① Seat angle adjustment ② Seat fore/aft adjustment

2 3 4 5
③ Seat quick lowering
④ Shock absorber damping adjustment
⑤ Height adjustment（pneumatic）
⑥ Seatback angle adjustment
⑦ Adjustment of waist support and lateral support devices（pneumatic）
⑧ Armrest angle adjustment（optional）
23
Seat adjustment
Seat angle adjustment
 Pull up the handle ① and adjust the seat cushion angle as needed.

1
Seat fore/aft adjustment
 Pull up the handle ②and slide the seat forward/backward.

8
7
 Push the seat forward or backward until you hear a sound that the seat
locks in place.
6
Seat quick lowering（easy to get on and off）
 After getting on the vehicle, press the button ③（pop up the button）, and
2 3 4 5 the seat is raised to the driving position.
 Before getting off the vehicle, press the button ③（press the button）, and
the seat is lowered to the get-off position.
Shock absorber damping adjustment
 Set the seat to the desired flexibility（hard and soft）with the handle ④.
24
Seat adjustment
Seat height adjustment
 Pull up the handle ⑤: The seat is raised.
 Push down the handle ⑤: The seat is lowered.

1
 Release the handle when the seat reaches a suitable height.

8
 Lean back and gently push the seatback.
7
 Pull up the handle⑥ to unlock the seatback.
 Release the handle to unlock the seatback.

6
Adjustment of waist support and lateral support devices
 Press the button ⑦ to control air bag inflation and deflation.
2 3 4 5
"+": air bag inflated.
"-": air bag deflated.
Armrest angle adjustment
 Rotate the handle ⑧ and adjust the armrest to the desired angle.
25
Seat adjustment
Driver’s seat and co-driver’s seat（double locking/lightweight sliding）
WARNING
-Never adjust the seat while driving, and adjust the seat only
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
-Make sure you hear the click sound of the seat locking
device.

co-driver's seats.
2
1
① Seatback angle adjustment
② Seat folding adjustment

3 ③ Seat fore/aft adjustment
26
Seat adjustment

 Lean back and gently push the seatback.
 Pull up the handle ① to unlock the seatback.
 Adjust the seatback to the desired position. 2
Seat folding adjustment
 Pull up the seat cushion ②, and the seat cushion will be folded
when you hear the sound that the seat cushion locks.
 Push the seat cushion ② in the direction shown in the figure,
turn down the seat cushion when you hear the sound that the seat
cushion unlocks, and restore the seat cushion to the service
position.
Seat fore/aft adjustment 1
 Pull up the handle ③and slide the seat cushion forward/backward. 3
 Gently push the cushion forward or backward until you hear the
sound that the seat cushion locks in place.
27
Seat adjustment
Seat fore/aft position adjustment and seatback angle state
 Seat fore/aft position adjustment can be performed according to the human
body（fore/aft adjustment is unavailable for the seat cushion）.
 The seatback angle state refers to when there is a 12-degree angle between
the seatback and the vertical direction.
Seatback angle adjustment range
 The adjustment range when there is a 12-degree angle between the

seatback and the vertical direction: forward adjustable 63 degrees, backward
adjustable 32 degrees.
28
Sleeper
Sleeper
2
The safety guard for the lower sleeper
WARNING
-The lower sleeper must be folded During driving.

-During driving, no items are allowed on the sleeper. 1
-When using the sleeper, the safety guard should be enabled
and locked.
3
Disable the safety guard
 In the enabled state, press and hold the button ① and hold the handrail ②,
rotate the safety guard anticlockwise around the column ③ to fold it.
A
 A is the disabled safety guard.
Enable the safety guard
 In the disabled state, press and hold the button ① and hold and lift the
handrail ②, rotate the safety guard clockwise around the column ③ to the
vertical position.
 B is the enabled safety guard.
B
29
Sleeper
Upper sleeper
1
WARNING
When using the sleeper, the safety guard should be enabled

2 and locked.
3
Tilt down the upper sleeper

4
 When necessary, push the driver‟s seat/co-driver‟s seat forward or adjust
the seatback forward, see "Seat adjustment".
6  Open the seat belt locking device ②, hold the outer edge of the upper
5
sleeper ① and rotate it downward until the detents ③ on both ends are
snapped into the slot ④.
7  Pull both ends of the seat belt ⑤ properly, adjust the protective net ⑥ in
place, and lock the safety buckle ⑦ to ensure your safety.
30
Sleeper
Tilt up the upper sleeper

5 6
WARNING
Make sure the seat belts on both ends are locked when the
upper sleeper is folded. 7
 Loosen the safety buckle ⑦, and put down the protective net ⑥.
 Hold the outer edge of the upper sleeper ①, and rotate the upper sleeper
1
① upward to the appropriate location.
 Lock the seat belts ② on both ends of the upper sleeper properly.
2
3
31
Steering wheel adjustment
Steering wheel adjustment

When adjusting the steering wheel, the compressed air system should have a
sufficient air pressure.
First adjust the driver's seat, and then adjust the steering wheel to the
appropriate position.
1  Depress the button ① on the lower boss of the driver's seat with your
heel.
 Adjust the steering wheel height and angle to the appropriate position.
 Remove your heel from the button ① and the steering wheel will be
locked.
Description:
Move the steering wheel forward, which helps you get on and off the
vehicle and move to the co-driver‟s side.
CAUTION
It is strictly forbidden to adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is running. The steering wheel should be adjusted
when the vehicle is at a standstill and the parking brake is
applied.
32
Seat belt
Seat belt
WARNING
-Fasten the seat belt each time you drive the vehicle, which will save your life.
-One person should wear one seat belt.
-It is forbidden to wind up the seat belt. Ensure that the seat belt fits your body.
-The seat belt will provide the best protection for you only when the seatback is almost in the vertical position, see
"Seat adjustment".
-Lean your back against the seatback, and the seat belt should be fitted at the area between your neck and shoulder.
-The seat belt should be in the middle of your shoulder, not on your throat.
-The seat belt should be of proper tension in the thigh area, and should pass through the underbelly as far as
possible, not passing through the stomach.
-Do not adjust the seat to the position where it fails to fit your body.
-During driving, the seat belt tension should often be adjusted by pulling your shoulder belt.
-Do not let the seat belt to pass over the pockets with hard or fragile items（such as pens, glasses, etc.）.
-Make sure the seat belt is clean and dry.
-The installation of a new seat belt, the replacement of the seat belt that has been damaged or severely deformed
seriously in the accident and the inspection of the seat belt fixing point should be conducted at SINOTRUK service
station.
-Do not modify the seat belt.
33
Seat belt
Fasten the seat belt

Before fastening the seat belt, adjust the driver's seat and co-driver's seat
according to the bodies, see "Driver‟s seat and co-driver‟s seat".
 Adjust the seat belt leveling device ① up/down. The seat belt should pass
through the middle of your shoulder. Do not let the seat belt to pass through
your throat area.
 Hold the belt buckle and pull the seat belt over your shoulder and thigh.
1  Insert the seat belt buckle into the clip until you hear the sound that the
buckle clicks.
 The seat belt in the upper body and thigh should be of proper tension.
WARNING
After fastening the seat belt, often check the condition and
performance of the seat belt while driving and tighten it
again when necessary.
Check seat belt lock（daily）

 The seat belt reel should, when pulled fiercely, be locked.
Release
 Press the red button on the seat belt buckle in the direction of the arrow.
 Hold the seat belt buckle until the seat belt is retracted automatically.
34
Seat belt
Inertial retractor
The retractor ② should lock the seat belt to prevent the seat belt from
being pulled out under the following conditions.
 The vehicle suddenly decelerates in any direction.

2
 When the seat belt is pulled out quickly
Pulling out the seat belt quickly can inspect the locking function of the
inertia retractor.
Inertial retractor（double lock seat）
35
Seat belt
Fasten the seat belt（double lock seat）

Before fastening the seat belt, adjust the driver‟s seat and co-driver‟s seat
according to the body, see "Driver seat and co-driver‟s seat".
 Hold the seat belt buckle, pull the webbing in the direction of the arrow,
and the seat belt should pass through the middle of your shoulder, not
passing through your throat.
 Pull the seat belt over your shoulder and thigh.
 Insert the seat belt buckle into the clip until you hear the sound that the
buckle clicks.
 The seat belt in the upper body and thigh should be of proper tension.
WARNING
After fastening the seat belt, often check the condition and
performance of the seat belt while driving and tighten it again
when necessary.
Check seat belt lock（daily）

 The seat belt reel should, when pulled violently, be locked.
Release
 Press the red button on the seat belt buckle in the direction of the arrow.
 Hold the seat belt buckle until the seat belt is retracted automatically.
36
Cab interior overview
Cab interior overview
1.Vent 2.Left combination switch 3.Left buttons on the steering wheel 4.Instrument panel 5.Right buttons on the steering wheel
6.Rocker switches 7.MP5 player / Telematics 8.Air conditioning control panel 9.24V socket 10.Cigar lighter 11.Storage box
12.Transmission control lever 13.Right combination switch 14.Steering wheel 15.Door handle 16.Door control panel
37
Instrument panel
Instrument panel
Instrument panel（diesel）
1.Engine tachometer 2.Detection light and light 3.Speedometer 4.Voltmeter 5.Fuel gauge 6.Button 1
7.Driver’s screen 8.Button 2 9.Barometer 10.Water temperature gauge
38
Instrument panel
Instrument panel（LNG）
1.Engine tachometer 2.Detection light and light 3.Speedometer 4.Voltmeter 5.LNG gauge 6.Button 1
7.Driver‟s screen 8.Button 2 9.Barometer 10.Water temperature gauge
39
Instrument panel
Instrument panel（CNG）
1.Engine tachometer 2.Detection light and light 3.Speedometer 4.Voltmeter 5.CNG gauge 6.Button 1
7.Driver‟s screen 8.Button 2 9.Barometer 10.Water temperature gauge
40
Instrument panel
Speedometer
It is used to display the vehicle speed, and indicate the range of 0~125km/h,
5km/h per small scale, 20km/h per large scale.
When the speed is high, the overspeed indicator ① will come on.
1
Engine tachometer
It is used to display the engine speed, indicate the range of 0~3200r/min,
100km/h per small scale, 500km/h per large scale.
The green area represents the economic speed, and when the engine speed is
high, the high-speed indicator ② will come on.
41
Instrument panel
Voltmeter
It is used to display the battery voltage, and indicate the range of 16~32V,
2V per small scale.
When the battery voltage is lower than 20V or higher than 32V, the voltage
low（high）warning indicator ③ will come on.
Fuel gauge
It is used to display the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Each
small scale represents the 1/8 amount of fuel.
When the remaining fuel in the fuel tank is less than 1/8, the low fuel level
indicator ④ will come on.
4
42
Instrument panel
Barometer
It is used to display the pressure of brake circuit 1 or 2, and indicate the

range of 0~12×0.1MPa, 0.1MPa per small scale. When the pointer is in the
red alarm zone, the air pressure will be lower than 5.5×0.1MPa, and the
relevant fault information will be displayed on the detection light panel.
The barometer defaults to display the pressure of the brake circuit with a
lower pressure, while the indicator ⑤ or ⑥ will come on; the pressure the
brake circuit with a higher pressure will be displayed on the driver‟s screen. 5 6
Coolant temperature gauge
It is used to display the engine coolant temperature, and indicate the range
of 40～120°C, 10°C per small scale.
When the pointer is in the red area, it indicates that the engine coolant
temperature is high, and the coolant temperature high indicator ⑦ will
come on.
43
Instrument panel
LNG gauge
It is used to display the remaining LNG volume, and each scale represents
the 1/8 amount of fuel.
When the remaining amount of LNG is less than 1/8, the low fuel level
indicator ⑧ will come on.
CNG gauge
It is used to display the remaining CNG, and each scale represents the 1/8
amount of fuel.
When the remaining CNG is less than 1/8, the low fuel level indicator ⑨
will come on.
44
Rocker switches and buttons

1.Hazard alarm switch
2.Auxiliary high beam switch 1 2 3

3.Horn switch
4.Work light switch
5.Engine PTO switch

4 5 6
6.Engine diagnostic switch
7.ABS detection switch
8.ASR switch
7 8 9
9.Cab tilt switch
10.Exhaust brake switch
11.Intelligent brake request switch
12.Headlight beam adjustment knob 10 11 12
45
13.Fuel-saving switch
14.Engine speed mode knob
13 14 15 15.Inter-wheel differential switch
16.Inter-axle differential switch
17.Fuel heating switch

16 17
18.SOS switch
18
17
46
finding the fault flash code list.

1.Hazard alarm switch: After pressing the switch, all the turn
lights will flash, and the turn indicator on the Instrument panel 7.ABS detection switch: After the engine is started, the ABS
will flash. light on the combination instrument will stay on（also displayed
2.Auxiliary high beam switch: When the high beam is on, on the LCD screen）, indicating that the system is faulty.
pressing the switch can turn on the auxiliary high beam. Pressing the ABS detection switch can read the ABS indicator
flash code on the combination instrument, and you can
3.Horn switch: When the switch does not work, electric horn
determine the type of fault through checking the flash code list
will sound after pressing the horn button on the steering wheel;
of the ABS system.
after pressing the switch and the horn button on the steering
wheel, air horn will sound. 8.ASR switch: The function of the ASR switch is to activate the
TPM（Tire Pressure Monitoring）function of the ABS system.
4.Work light switch: Pressing the switch can turn on the work
When the vehicle is at a standstill, press and hold the ASR reset
light behind the cab.
switch, turn on the ignition switch, wait for 3s（until the ABS
5.Engine PTO switch: Pressing the switch can adjust the engine
warning light goes out）, release the ASR reset switch and wait
speed via PTO knob. At this time, the accelerator pedal will not
for the confirmation message of TPM function initialization
function.
（ASR indicator flashes for three times）, indicating TPM
6.Engine diagnosis switch: pressing the switch can read the function initialization is completed.
engine fault indicator flashing code on the instrument, and then
9.Cab tilt switch: Press the switch, place the lift pump in the
you can know the current fault of the engine system through
47
lifted or lowered state and press the lift button outside the cab configuration, and the engine will run gentler, making the
to electrically lift or lower the cab. vehicle run in economic conditions to the maximum extent.
10.Exhaust brake switch: Pressing the switch can activate the 14.Engine speed mode knob: Pressing the switch can adjust the
exhaust brake function. engine speed within a certain range.
11.ntelligent brake request switch: the intelligent brake is 15.Inter-wheel differential switch: After pressing the switch, the
activated by default and the work indicator on the switch is on. inter-wheel differential lock will be combined.
At this point, the driver steps on the brake pedal, if the exhaust
16.Inter-axle differential switch: After pressing the switch, the
brake condition is satisfied, the exhaust brake will work
inter-axle differential lock will be combined.
simultaneously with the vehicle brake. Press the intelligent
brake switch and turn off the intelligent brake function. The 17.Fuel heating switch: Pressing the switch will activate the
working indicator on the switch goes out. fuel strainer‟s heating function.
12.Headlight beam adjustment knob: Turn on the position light 18.SOS switch function: When the vehicle encounters a fault or
and low beam light, and then adjust the beam of the low beam accident, the wireless intelligent terminal can be triggered by
light via this knob. the switch to seek for help from the connectivity background.
（SINOTRUK Telematics or 3G intelligent terminal with SIM
13.Fuel-saving switch: Pressing the switch can automatically
card and GPS function should be installed）
determine the maximum speed according to vehicle
48
The dangerous goods transport vehicle models should be installed with

electromagnetic master power switch. And that is, the cab has a power
switch ①（rocker switch）and the battery box has an electromagnetic master
power switch ②, achieving power on/off via the power switch in the
operating room.
1
49
Connect the SINOTRUK dedicated diagnostic tools at the dashboard

diagnostic interface, enter the diagnostic interface, enter the engine
diagnostic interface, click the parameter configuration, and read all to find
the frame number.
50
Detection lights and warning lights
51

No. Description Symbol Color No Description Symbol Color
Main vehicle left turn Red,

1 Green 11 Air suspension
indicator yellow
Red,
2 Trailer left turn Green 12 Retarder alarm
yellow
3 Trailer right turn Green 13 Low beam Green
Main vehicle right turn

4 Green 14 Low coolant level Red
indicator
Red,
5 Oil pressure alarm 15 Daytime running light Green
yellow
Red,
6 Fault warning symbol 16 The cab is locked Red
yellow
Engine fault warning Red, Red,
7 17 PTO 1
light yellow yellow
Red,
8 Emergency stop Red 18 PTO 2
yellow
9 Parking brake Red 19 Low urea level Yellow
10 Braking system fault Red 20 ASR work indicator Yellow
52
No. Description Symbol Color No. Description Symbol Color
21 Lift axle Green 31 Seat belt fault Red
22 Front fog light Green 32 Vehicle overspeed Yellow
23 Cruise control Green 33 Low gear Green
Coolant temperature is
24 High beam Blue 34 Red
high
25 Main vehicle ABS alarm Yellow 35 Pressure indicator 1 Green
26 Trailer ABS alarm Yellow 36 Pressure indicator 2 Green
27 Rear fog light Yellow Low fuel level Yellow
28 Small light Green 37 Low CNG level Yellow
Out-of-limit emission
29 Yellow Low LNG level Yellow
alarm
Low （ high ） voltage
30 Engine overspeed Red 38 Red
alarm
53
Driver‟s screen and detection light panel
Driver’s screen and detection light panel
The driver‟s screen ① and the detection light panel ② are used to
indicate the vehicle condition for the driver, which is a supplementary to the
2 information provided by the respective instruments on the Instrument panel.
When the alarm condition is satisfied, the alarm symbol will be displayed on
the screen.
1
54
Driver’s screen
Button 1: Flip the screen when it is pressed briefly (<3s), and clear the trip
when it is pressed and held (≥ 3s).
Button 2: The backlight brightness will be adjusted when it is pressed and

held.
2 1
When the ignition key is ON, pressing key 1 and key 2 simultaneously for
10s will enter the diagnosis mode, and pressing and holding key 1 will exit
the diagnosis mode. And also, the diagnosis mode will be exited when the
engine speed ≥300rpm or the vehicle speed ≥5km/.
The driver‟s screen is divided into 6 sections by their functions.
55
Driver‟s screen section 1
When the ignition switch is ON, SINOTRUK logo will be displayed.
The instrument self-inspection will be performed, and the driving screen will
be displayed about 3s later.
56
Right-clicking the MCS knob

or pressing the right button of
the instrument will the
following interface will be
displayed:
Right-clicking the MCS knob

or pressing the right button of
the instrument will the
displayed:
57
Right-clicking the MCS

knob or pressing the right
button of the instrument
will the following
interface will be
displayed:
When the vehicle is equipped

with AMT, AMT needs
self-learning to the following
interface will be displayed:
58

with AMT, AMT needs
self-learning to the following
interface will be displayed:
When AMT is equipped with a

PTO, the following interface
will be displayed:
59

will be displayed:

will be displayed:
60

will be displayed:
The alarm display page is also

in the driver‟s screen section 1:
with mechanical transmission
with PTO, if the PTO solenoid
valve is open or short, the
displayed:
61
When the ignition key is ON, speed is zero and the parking brake is not
released, the following interface will be displayed:
Driver’s screen section 2
Section 2 displays the urea level; for a NA engine, no display in section 2.
62
When the vehicle is equipped with AMT, if the transmission is in crawl

position, the following interface will be displayed in section 2:
63
Signal light on the driver’s screen
No. Description Symbol Color No. Description Symbol Color
1 Air filter is blocked White 11 ESC is off Yellow
2 Exhaust brake White 12 Adaptive headlight Yellow
3 Intake air preheating White 13 Adaptive cruise system fault Red
Collision emergency warning

4 Water in fuel White 14 Red
state is activated
5 Retarder work White 15 Fuel filter is blocked Red
6 Adaptive cruise White 16 DPF carbon deposit indicator Yellow
7 Maintenance tips Yellow 17 DPF active regeneration indicator Yellow
8 ESC is valid Yellow 18 Front axle brake wear alarm Yellow
9 Slope Yellow 19 Rear axle brake wear alarm Yellow
10 Tire pressure alarm Yellow
64

Display the total mileage and trip

The alarm symbols of brake circuit 3 and brake circuit 4 are displayed, as
shown in the figure for brake circuit 3 fault. If both circuit 3 and circuit 4 are
faulty, they will be displayed at the interval of 3s.
65
Driver‟s screen sections 6 & 7

7
Display the yellow and red warning lights respectively, see the table "Signal
lights on the driver‟s screen" for specific symbols and descriptions; if there
is one or more warning light, they will be displayed at the interval of 3s;
6
7 At the absence of a warning signal light, this section will display the
transmission position information. For AMT, it is only displayed in section 7,
and for mechanical transmission or automatic transmission, it is displayed in
6
sections 6 and 7.
66
Information display on the driver‟s screen and detection light panel
Information display on the driver’s screen and detection light panel

Information Sound
Detection light panel Meaning Comments/further action
description Signal
Main vehicle left Message - Main vehicle left turn

Green Yes
turn indicator indicator
Trailer left turn

Green Yes Message - Trailer left turn indicator
indicator
Trailer right turn

Green Yes Message - Trailer right turn indicator
indicator
Main vehicle
Message - Main vehicle right turn
right turn Green Yes
indicator
indicator
Check the engine oil level,

fill or drain part of the oil
Oil pressure Safety - Engine oil pressure when necessary or
Red Yes
alarm Engine oil pressure is low or high. immediately request the help
from SINOTRUK service
station.
67
Information Sound
description Signal
•Stop the vehicle
Warning symbol immediately and pay
Safety - Together with the light up of
for vehicle stop in attention to traffic conditions!
Red Yes other fault lights, or together with the
the case of a •Request the help from
instrument sensor abnormalities
serious fault SINOTRUK service station
immediately.
•Please be careful of driving
and drive slowly.
Warning symbol Message - Together with the light up
Yellow No •Request the help from
for general faults of other fault lights
SINOTRUK service station
immediately.
Request the help from
Severe engine
Red Yes Message - The engine system fault SINOTRUK service station
fault alarm
immediately.
and drive slowly.
General engine
Yellow Yes Message - The engine system fault •Request the help from
fault alarm
immediately.
•Stop the vehicle
immediately and pay
Safety - Together with the light up of attention to traffic conditions!
Emergency stop STOP Red Yes
other fault lights. •Request the help from
immediately.
68
Information Sound
description Signal
Message - The parking brake is
applied, and if the parking brake is
Parking brake Red Yes
not released when the vehicle speed>
10km/h, there will be a sound alarm
The vehicle is not ready for
driving!
•Stop the vehicle
immediately and pay
attention to traffic conditions!
•Idle the engine at a high
Braking system Safety - The pressure in one of the speed until the pressure
Red Yes
fault four brake circuits is low. reaches the rated value（the
message will disappear）.
•If the brake circuit pressure
fails to reach the rated value:
Do not move the vehicle and
request the help from
SINOTRUK service station.
Service station - Electrically
controlled air suspension
Electrically Controlled Air •Please be careful of driving
Suspension（ECAS） and drive slowly.
Air suspension
Red No If the frame is lowered: The braking •Request the help from
alarm
effect will be reduced. SINOTRUK service station
If the frame is raised above the immediately.
driving position: there is a risk of
damaging the shock absorber.
69
Information Sound
description Signal
Severe retarder
Red No Message - Severe retarder fault SINOTRUK service station
fault
immediately.
and drive slowly.
General retarder
Yellow No Message - Retarder fault •Request the help from
fault
immediately.
Low beam Green No Message - Low beam is on
Low coolant level Red Yes Message - Engine coolant level is low Please fill the coolant in time.
Daytime running Message - Daytime running light is

Green No
light on
Safety - Cab is locked
The cab not The cab is not fully locked. At least
Red Yes Lock the cab properly.
locked one of the contact sensors in the cab
lock system is open.
Message - The yellow signal light
PTO 1 Yellow/red Yes will come on when PTO is working.
At this time, if the vehicle speed is
Reduce the vehicle speed and
greater than 30km/h and the engine
the engine speed.
speed is greater than 1900r/min, the
PTO 2 Yellow/red Yes red signal light will flash with a
sound alarm
70
Information Sound
description Signal
Low urea level Yellow No Message - Urea level is below 10% Fill the urea.
•Please start the vehicle

carefully.
ASR work
Yellow No Message - ASR •Request the help from
indicator
immediately.
Lift shaft Green No Message - Lift shaft is raised
Front fog light Green No Message - Front fog light is on
Message - The vehicle is in the cruise

Cruise control Green No
control state
High beam Blue No Message - High beam is on
Rear fog light Yellow No Message - Rear fog light is on
Small light Green No Message - Position light is on
71
Information Sound
description Signal
Please drive the vehicle
slowly and carefully!
•There is an increasing trend
Main vehicle of wheel lock. Please be
Yellow No Message - ABS system fault
ABS alarm careful of braking.
•Request the help from
immediately.
Please drive the vehicle
slowly and carefully!
•There is an increasing trend
of wheel lock. Please be
careful of braking.
•Check the connection
between the tractor and
trailer; when necessary, clean
Trailer ABS Message -ABS has
Yellow No the plug to ensure reliable
alarm partial function only
connection.
•Check the connection cables
between the tractor and
trailer, and when necessary,
replace them with new ones.
•Request the help from
immediately.
72
Information Sound
description Signal
Out-of-limit
Yellow No Message -Emission is out of limit SINOTRUK service station
emission alarm
immediately.
Function - Engine
Shift to high gear, or reduce
Engine overspeed Red Yes The engine speed exceeds the set
the driving speed!
value.
Function - Seat belt control The driver must fasten the

Seat belt fault Red No
The driver fails to fasten the seat belt. seat belt.
Function - The vehicle speed exceeds

Vehicle overspeed Yellow No Reduce the driving speed!
the set value.
Message -Transmission is in low

Low gear Green No
range
•Shift to low gear to improve
Coolant engine cooling.
Service station - Engine coolant
temperature is Red No •Check coolant level, and
temperature is high
high when necessary, fill the
coolant.
Pressure indicator Safety
Green No
1 Brake circuit 1 pressure indicator
73
Information Sound
description Signal
Pressure indicator Safety
Green No
2 Brake circuit 2 pressure indicator
Low fuel level Yellow No Message - Low fuel level Refuel.
Low CNG level Yellow No Message - CNG is low Fill CNG.
Low LNG level Yellow No Message - LNG is low Fill LNG.

Low（high）
Red Yes Service station - Charging control SINOTRUK service station
voltage alarm immediately.
74
Combination switch
Combination switch
1
Left combination switch
The left combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.
① Right turn ② Left turn 0
Right turn/Left turn
Turn the left combination switch to position ②/① and the right/left turn 2
indicator / on the Instrument panel will blink. If a trailer is
attached, the trailer indicator / on the same side will also blink.
When the steering wheel returns to its straight position, the left 4
combination switch will automatically return to position 0.
Windshield wiper
When the switch handle arrow ③ are in the positions shown in the figure,
"windshield wiper off", followed by "intermittent wiping", "normal
wiping" and "quick wiping."
3
75
Combination switch
Windshield washing system

4  When pressing the button ④ to the bottom（no more than 1s）, the
windshield washing system will spray the washing fluid and wipe the
windshield for one cycle.
 When pressing the button ④ to the bottom
（more than 1s）, the windshield
washing system will spray the washing fluid and wipe the windshield for
three cycles.
When pressing and holding the button ④ to the bottom, the windshield
3
washing system will spray the washing fluid and wipe the windshield
continuously.
Right combination switch（optional）
The right combination switch is the control handle of the retarder. See
chapter 3 "Retarder" for operation instructions.
76
Combination switch
Ignition switch
Ignition switch ① is located on the right side of the steering column.
 When the key is set at "0" position, the vehicle will be powered off, and
the key can be removed.
 When the key is set at "I" position, the consumers used for vehicle parking
will be powered on.
 When the key is set at "II" position, the driving position.
 When the key is set at "III" position, start the engine.
WARNING 1
-When starting the vehicle, make sure to turn the key to "III"
position. After releasing the key, it will return to "II" position
automatically.
-If you want to start the engine again by turning the key to
"III" position, the key must be turned to "0" position and
then to "III" position.
-Do not turn the ignition switch to "0" while driving,
otherwise the ignition switch will lock the steering wheel and
the vehicle will not be able to turn.
-When you leave the vehicle, remove the key from the ignition
switch, even for a short period of time. Otherwise, children or
unauthorized personnel may start the engine and may move
the vehicle.
77
Steering wheel buttons

Steering wheel button a（left）
The left button on the steering wheel is the MP5 adjustment button:
Button ①: Once pressed, the menu will page up.
Button ②: Once pressed, the menu will page down.
Button ③: Once pressed, the volume will decrease.

a b Button ④: Once pressed, the volume will increase.
1 2
3
4
78
Steering wheel button b（right）
Press ⑤: Set+ button 5

6
Press ⑥: Set–button
Button ⑦: Memory and recovery button（MEM）
Button ⑧: OFF button
7 8
Engine speed mode knob
Many engineering vehicles require the engine should run at a particular

speed. When the vehicle is at a standstill, the driver can adjust the engine
speed within a certain range via the engine speed mode knob ⑨.
The engine speed mode knob ⑨ has 4 positions, 0 position is used to
adjust the idling speed, 1 position is used to set the engine speed limit, 2
position is used to adjust the engine speed, and 3 position is used to adjust 9
the outdoor hand throttle speed.
79
The engine speed adjustment should satisfy the following conditions:

-The engine is running;
-The parking brake is applied
-Neutral
-The engine is not under the control of other external electronic control
units;
-The vehicle is at a standstill;
-The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
9 If the above conditions are satisfied, the driver can enter the engine speed
adjustment mode via the speed mode knob and Set+/- button.
1.Adjustment of engine idle speed
In idle state, the engine speed will automatically increase by 100rpm when
the air conditioning is on. When the speed mode knob ⑨ is in 0 position,
6 the engine speed can be increased or decreased via Set+/- button. In 0
5
position, the maximum engine speed will be 800rpm. Pressing the MEM
button can keep memory of the currently requested engine speed limit and
recover the requested engine speed limit saved last time.
2.Setting of engine speed limit
To ensure that the engine speed falls within the controllable range, the
engine speed should be limited, and the default limit is 1800 rpm. When the
speed mode knob ⑨ is in 1 position, the engine speed limit can be
increased or decreased via Set+/- button. Pressing the MEM button can keep
7 8 memory of the current engine speed limit and recover the engine speed limit
saved last time.
80
The engine speed limit setting process can be displayed on the instrument:
When the conditions are satisfied and the speed mode knob ⑨ is set in 1
position, the instrument will flash to display "Engine speed limit setting
XXrpm", which means it is ready to enter the speed limit setting mode. In
this case, the driver can enter the speed adjustment mode and adjust via
Set+/- button. At the same time, the instrument will display "Engine speed
limit setting XXrpm". XX is the set target speed limit.
3.Adjustment of engine speed 9

When the speed mode knob ⑨ is in 2 position, the engine speed can be
increased or decreased via Set+/- button on the multi-function switch.
Pressing the MEM button can keep memory of the currently requested
engine speed and recover the requested engine speed saved last time. The
5 6
engine speed adjustment is restricted by the speed limit set in 1 position.
Engine speed adjustment process can be displayed on the instrument: When
the conditions are satisfied, and the speed mode knob is set in 2 position, the
instrument will flash to display "Engine speed adjustment XXrpm", which
means it is ready to enter the speed adjustment mode. In this case, the driver
can enter the speed adjustment mode and adjust via Set+/- button. At the
same time, the instrument will display "Engine speed adjustment XXrpm".
7 8
XX is the adjusted target speed.
81
Speed adjustment can be achieved via Set+/- switch jogging and

pressing/holding: when jogging Set+/- switch, the requested target speed
will increase or decrease by 10rpm; when pressing and holding Set+/-
switch, the target speed will increase or decrease by 100rpm/s.
Speed memory and recovery functions: When the driver adjusts the speed to
a certain value and presses the MEM key for more than 2.5s, the current
engine speed will be automatically saved; after entering the engine speed
adjustment mode, the driver can just press the MEM key to recover the last
9 saved speed. Speed limit memory method is same as the recovery.
When the driver presses the OFF key, the engine speed（limit）adjustment
mode will be exited.
4.Engine speed adjustment by hand throttle
When the speed mode knob ⑨ is in 3 position and the following conditions
5 6
are satisfied, the driver can adjust the engine speed by adjusting the outdoor
hand throttle opening.
-Neutral
-The vehicle is at a standstill;
-The engine is running;
-The initial value of the hand throttle opening is less than 30%.
The engine speed adjustment by the hand throttle is also restricted by the
7 8 speed limit set in 1 position.
82
Cruise control
Cruise control function allows the vehicle to run at a constant speed without
5 6
the driver stepping on the accelerator pedal. When the following conditions
are satisfied, the vehicle can enter the cruise control function:
-The speed is more than 30km/h;
-The engine is not in external torque control mode;
-Not in neutral
-The clutch is not depressed;
-The brake pedal is not depressed.
7
When the vehicle speed exceeds 30km/h, the driver can set the cruise speed 8
by pressing Set+/- button, thus allowing the vehicle to enter the cruise
control mode. Then the driver can release the accelerator pedal, and the
vehicle will follow the set cruise speed. During cruise operation, the driver
can change the cruise target speed via Set+/-. When any of the conditions
are not satisfied or the driver presses the OFF button, the cruise mode will
be exited automatically. When the conditions are satisfied again, the driver
can enter the cruise mode again by pressing the MEM button, and the cruise
target speed will be the last cruise target speed.
83
The driver can operate the throttle in cruise mode. In cruise mode, if the
torque after the driver depresses the accelerator pedal is less than that
5
6 required for the current cruise, the vehicle will still run at the set cruise
speed; if the torque after the driver depresses the accelerator pedal is greater
than that required for the current cruise, the vehicle will respond to the
throttle opening and accelerate; when the driver releases the accelerator
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previous cruise target speed.
In cruise mode, when the driver jogs Set+/-, the cruise target speed will
7 8 increase or decrease by 1km/h; when the driver presses and holds Set+, the
cruise target speed will increase by 4km/h/s; when the driver presses and
holds Set-, the cruise target speed will decrease by 2km/h/s. The set cruise
speed will be displayed on the instrument.
84
Electric horn/air horn
Electric horn/air horn

Electric horn
Press the horn button ① on the combination switch on the left of the
steering wheel to turn on the horn.
Air horn
Press the horn rocker switch ② on the Instrument panel, and press the horn
button ① to turn on the air horn.
85
24V cigar lighter/power socket
24V cigar lighter/power socket

24V cigar lighter
 Ignition key in "Ⅰ" or "Ⅱ" position.
 Push the cigar lighter ① inward until you hear the sound that the cigar
lighter locks. After the resistance wire at head of the cigar lighter becomes
red hot, the cigar lighter will pop up automatically.
1 2 WARNING!
- The cigar lighter socket can only supply power to the
devices with maximum power of 240W（24V/10A）!
- A heated cigar lighter may cause burns and it is only
allowed to hold the cigar lighter handle.
- When a child is in the vehicle, the cigar lighter should be
removed from the cigar lighter holder to avoid burn or fire.
- The driver should always be careful of road vehicles and
traffic conditions, and the cigar lighter can be used only
when the traffic is in good condition.
24V power socket
The power socket ② can be used to supply power to 24V equipment with a
rated load of 300W.
86
Lighting
Lighting
Rotary light switch（light switch）
Turn off the headlight

The outline marker light ON 1
The low beam ON
Front fog indicator（green）
Rear fog indicator（yellow）
The outline marker light ON
Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to the outline marker light
ON position ②, and the outline marker light and the side marker light will
be turned on.
The front fog light ON
Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to the outline marker light
3
ON position ② or the low beam turn-on position ③, press the rotary light 2
switch once, the front fog light will be turned on and the front fog indicator
will come on; press the rotary light switch again, the front fog light
will be turned off and the front fog indicator will go out.
87
Lighting
The rear fog light ON
Turn the rotary light switch from position ① to the outline marker light ON
position ② or the low beam ON position ③, pull the rotary light switch
1
2 3 once, the rear fog light will be turned on and the rear fog indicator
will come on; then pull the rotary light switch again, the rear fog light will
be turned off, and the rear fog indicator will go out.
Headlight control
5
Combination switch
④Headlight high beam position
⑤Headlight flashing position

0
88
Lighting
Headlight low beam ON

 With ignition key in "Ⅱ" position.
 Turn the rotary light switch from the position ① to the low beam ON
position ③, the combination switch is in 0 position, and the low beam will 1
2 3
be turned on.
Turn on the high beam
 With ignition key in "Ⅱ" position.
Turn the rotary light switch from the position ① to the low beam position
③, push the combination switch to the high beam position ④, and the high
beam will be turned on.

5
 High beam indicator on the Instrument panel will come on.
Headlight flashing
 Push the combination switch to the headlight flashing position ⑤, and the
0
headlight will flash.
 Release the combination switch, and the combination switch will
automatically return to 0 position. 4
89
Lighting
Instrument backlight and switch position indicator

Turn the rotary light switch from the position ① to the outline marker light
ON position ② or the low beam ON position ③, and the instrument
backlight and the switch position indicator will come on.
1
2 3
Indoor light
When the switch ⑥ is in the position 0, the indoor light will go out.
When the switch ⑥ is in the position I, the indoor light will come on.
When the switch ⑦ is in the position O, the indoor light will go out.
When the switch ⑦ is in the position Ⅰ, the indoor light and courtesy
light will come on and go out simultaneously.
When the switch ⑦ is in the position II, the indoor light will come on.
6
90
Lighting
Sleeper light
When the switch ⑧ is in the position 0, the sleeper light will go out.
When the switch ⑧ is in the position I, the sleeper light will come on.
Hazard alarm switch
Press the hazard alarm switch ⑨, and all turn signal lights and turn
indicators will flash.
91
Telematics
Telematics
Sinotruk Telematics has functions such as driving recorder, radio receiver,
fleet management, vehicle monitoring, driving behavior analysis and fuel
consumption management（specific functions may vary due to different
orders）.
Please refer to the supplier manual for operation instructions.
92
Intelligent auxiliary system（optional）

Electronic brake system（EBS）/ Electronic stability control system
（ESC）
brake system is an active brake control system, which can improve the
braking performance of the vehicle significantly. The electronic stability
control system, including anti-roll control and direction control, can
1
improve the direction control stability of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is powered on, the Anti-spin regulator（ASR）and the
electronic stability control system（ESC）are turned on by default. When the
vehicle is stuck in the mud or sand, and the vehicle cannot get out of the trap
normally, the driver can turn off the ASR/ESC function by turning off the
ASR/ESC rocker switch; The ASR and ESC functions must not be turned
off at will for the safety of driving! When the driver has special driving
needs and is aware of the possibility of danger, if the ASR/ESC function is
temporarily closed according to his/her driving habits, the driver shall be
solely responsible for the safety accident. When the EBS is not operational,
the instrument will have the corresponding check lamp, ande the driver
should contact the SINOTRUK service station for processing.
WARNING
When washing the vehicle, it is strictly prohibited to flush the
radar system with the high-pressure water gun, otherwise the
radar may be damaged!
93
Hill Start Assist system（HSA）

The Hill Start Assist System can generate braking pressure before the
vehicle starts, and brake the wheels to prevent the vehicle from rolling when
hill-starting.
The driver can activate the Hill Start Assist System by the following steps:
2
-Confirm that the following conditions are met:
the ignition is switched on / there is no air pressure alarm on the meter / the
vehicle is stationary / the parking brake is released;
-Press the brake pedal;
-Press the Hill start enable switch ②, the Hill Start Assist function is
activated, and the indicator light ③ comes on;
-When the brake pedal is released, the Hill Start Assist System automatically
maintains the brake pressure at the pressure value when the driver steps on
the brake pedal, and the vehicle remains stationary;
-Press the accelerator pedal and the vehicle starts smoothly.
The brake pressure is maintained for a maximum of 2.2s after the brake
3 pedal is released when the Hill Start Assist System is activated . After which
the brake air pressure will gradually release.
94
again for activation next time. The Hill Start Assist symbol on
The Hill Start Assist System is deactivated when any of the
the meter will flash until the brake pressure is gradually
following occurs:
released.
-The ignition is turned off;
WARNING
-The vehicle is powered off;
-It is strictly forbidden to use the Hill Start Assist
-There is a pressure alarm on the meter; System on snow and ice roads, otherwise the
-The vehicle is not in a stationary state; vehicle may slip.
-Parking brake（handbrake）is applied; -The Hill Start Assist System is only a driver
assistance system. Before the vehicle starts, the
-The Hill-start enable switch is powered off;
driver should fully understand the situation
-After the driver releases the brake pedal, the start time is too around the vehicle and take full responsibility for
long. the safety of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is powered on, the Hill Start Assist System is
turned off by default, and the function can be activated by Possible reasons for system inactivation or failure after the
operating the rocker switch. When the operation is completed, Hill-start enable switch is pressed: air pressure alarm, vehicle
it will be turned off automatically. You need to press the switch not in a static state or parking brake not removed, etc.
95
Lane Departure Warning System（LDWS）

When the driver unconsciously deviates the vehicle from the current driving
lane, the lane departure warning system can automatically alarm to remind
the driver to concentrate and keep driving in the current lane to ensure
driving safety.
Under the premise that the vehicle speed is greater than 60km/h and the
driver fails to turn on the turn signal switch, if the vehicle is about to deviate
from the lane, the lane departure warning system will automatically sound
4
and light alarm to remind the driver to pay attention to driving safety.
When the vehicle is powered on, the lane departure warning system is
switched on by default. During this driving cycle, the driver can operate the
rocker switch ⑤ to turn off the system function, and the indicator light ④
on the instrument displays for 3 seconds; When the driver wants to resume
the warning function, it is only necessary to operate the rocker switch ⑤
again.
The lane departure warning system does not provide warnings even if the
vehicle deviates from the driving lane, when the turn indicators are switched on.
5 The lane departure warning system may not work under the following
conditions:
-Poor visibility, such as dark light or heavy rain, snow and fog;
-Strong light exposure, such as the reflection of a facing light, direct sunlight
or wet road surface;
96
-If there is dirt build-up, fog, damage or shielding on the

windscreen in the area of the video camera; WARNING
-When the lane line is missing or blurred, such as near the -This function should be used on a highway and
construction area; the lane markings need to be present and clearly
visible.
-The lane line is covered by rain, snow, mud, etc.;
-The lane departure warning system warns the
-The distance from the front vehicle is too close, causing the
driver if the vehicle crosses the lane markings
lane line to be blocked;
inadvertently. It does not keep the vehicle within
-The lane line changes rapidly, such as lane line branching, the lane. Therefore, the driver is responsible for
crossing or converging; keeping the vehicle in lane.
-The lane line is a non-standard lane line; When the driver does not actively turn off the lane departure
-The road turning radius is too small or the lane line winding warning system and the warning light is always on, the system
changes; has failed. Contact a SINOTRUK service station for

processing.
-The shadows on the road change drastically.
97
Automatic emergency braking system
The automatic emergency braking system can detect the distance of the
vehicle ahead. When there is a risk of rear-end collision, the system avoids
or mitigates collisions through automatic warning, partial braking or even
full braking, improving driving safety and reducing the incidence of traffic
6
accidents and casualties.
When the vehicle is powered on, the automatic emergency brake system is
switched on by default. The automatic emergency braking system can only
be activated when the vehicle speed is not less than 15km/h. During this
driving cycle, the driver can operate the rocker switch ⑥ to turn off the
system function, and the icon ⑦ will flash on the display; This function
can be turned back on by operating the rocker switch again.
When the automatic emergency braking system detects a risk of collision

with the vehicle in front, an audible and visual alarm is first given to the
driver. If the driver does not take any braking action, the system
7 automatically performs partial braking to remind the driver again. If the

driver still does not brake, the system will automatically implement full
braking to avoid collisions.
98
-When the vehicle in front turns away;

The driver can suppress the function of the automatic
emergency braking system by: -When the vehicle overtaking;
-Turning on the turn signal switch; -When the road winding stretches;
-Quickly pressing the accelerator pedal; -When there is an obstacle or stationary vehicle in front of the
vehicle after it moves away;
-Turning off the system enable rocker switch.
-When there are stationary objects.
The automatic emergency braking system may experience
unexpected braking or non-response when there are, but are not
limited to, the following driving scenarios. Please pay attention WARNING
to driving safety at all times:
The automatic emergency braking system only
-At corners; responds to vehicles in front moving in the same
direction, and responds poorly or unresponsive to
-When the vehicle in front is driving on the shoulder or driving
targets such as people and animals, narrow
into the ramp;
vehicles such as motorcycles and bicycles, and
-When there is a vehicle crossing the intersection in front;
vehicles traveling in opposite directions.
-When other vehicles change lanes;
99
When the driver does not actively turn off the automatic emergency braking
system and the icon ⑦ is always on, the system has failed. Contact a
SINOTRUK service station for processing.
Note
○
i When the automatic emergency braking system of the vehicle
is automatically activated for 3 times, the system will be shut
down. At this time, the vehicle should go to a SINOTRUK
7 service station for inspection and reset, and the system can be
restarted.
WARNING
-It is forbidden to disassemble the radar controller privately. Do not spray or install any appendages in front of the
radar sensor, such as bumper beams, as this may affect the performance of the radar and cause system malfunction.
-The automatic emergency braking system is an important driver assistance system. Please do not turn it off or
suppress it at will!
-The automatic emergency braking system cannot understand the current traffic and weather conditions, so the
driver is fully responsible for the driving safety of the vehicle. It is completely wrong to rely solely on the automatic
emergency braking system to ensure safe driving!
100
Adaptive cruise control（ACC）

ACC stands for Adaptive Cruise Control and refers to controlling the
vehicle speed according to the distance from the vehicle in front, enabling 8
automatic braking and acceleration control without driver intervention,
thereby improving driving comfort, fuel economy and driving safety.
The driver can operate distance mode switch ⑨ to select different
following distance mode. The system defaults to "moderate distance mode",
press the decrease button, and then switch to "closer mode" and "nearest 9
distance mode" in turn. Press the increase button and switch to "distant
mode" and "farthest mode" in turn. There is corresponding information ⑩
on the instrument display.
The driver can activate ACC by the following steps:
-Confirm that the vehicle speed is greater than 30km/h and less than
120km/h;
-Confirm that the adaptive cruise control system is on;
-According to the actual situation, choose different following distance mode;
-Press the Set+/- buttons on the steering wheel to set the cruising speed and
the adaptive cruise control system is activated.
10
101
When there is no vehicle in front, ACC cruises at the set cruising speed;
When the vehicle in front decelerates, ACC automatically controls the
vehicle to decelerate to maintain the safe distance; When the vehicle in front
accelerates, ACC automatically controls the vehicle to accelerate; When the
vehicle in front leaves, ACC accelerates to the set desired speed and keeps
the vehicle at this speed.
ACC automatically exits when:
-The vehicle speed is less than 30km/h;
-The driver steps on the brake pedal;
-The driver operates the exhaust brake switch or the retarder operating
handle;
-The driver presses the OFF button on the steering wheel;
-The system is faulty.
After operating the ACC rocker switch to turn off the ACC system, the
driver can press the Set+/- button on the steering wheel to enter the cruise
control system.
The driver can suppress ACC by quickly stepping on the accelerator pedal.
102
ACC only responds to vehicles in front moving in the same system will send an alarm message and the driver should
direction or gradually stopped and does not respond to actively step on the brake pedal to avoid collision.
targets of static or relative motion. The system may not
respond to the following targets: WARNING
-Pedestrians and animals; -It is forbidden to disassemble the radar privately.
-Obstacle that is still on the road; Do not spray or install any appendages in front of
the radome, as this may affect the performance of
-Vehicles that move in opposite directions or cross each other.
the radar and cause system malfunction.
-Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles and bicycles.
-Do not use ACC on mountain roads, traffic jams
Please be alert to the above targets and be ready to step on the
or slippery roads.
brake pedal.
-ACC is a driver assistance system designed to
When ACC is working, if the front vehicle leaves, the
improve driving comfort. Due to weather or road
system will automatically increase the vehicle speed to the
conditions, the system does not guarantee a safe
previously set speed. When crossing an intersection or
distance from the vehicle in all conditions. The
slippery road, the driver should pay special attention to the
driver is fully responsible for maintaining a safe
risk caused by this situation and drive the vehicle carefully.
distance from the vehicle in front and the traffic
When the distance to the front vehicle is too close, ACC will conditions that may occur at any time.
automatically request the brake system to work. If the brake
deceleration is not enough to maintain the safe distance, the
103
When the driver does not actively turn off ACC and the icon ⑪ is on, the
system has failed. Contact a SINOTRUK service station for processing.
ACC may experience unexpected braking, rapid acceleration or
non-response when there are, but are not limited to, the following driving
scenarios. Please pay attention to driving safety at all times:
11
-At corners;
-When the vehicle in front is driving on the shoulder or driving into the
ramp;
-When the vehicle in front disappears quickly in the radar field due to
turning;
-When there is a vehicle crossing the intersection in front;
-When other vehicles change lanes;
-When the vehicle in front turns away;
-When the vehicle overtaking;
-When the road winding stretches;
-When there is an obstacle or stationary vehicle in front of the vehicle after it
moves away;
-When there are stationary objects.
WARNING
The setting of the intelligent auxiliary system depends on the original vehicle configuration, including but not
limited to the engine, gearbox, retarder, brake system, electrical system and other major assemblies.
104
MP5 player
MP5 player
6.2-inch TFT LCD screen with a resolution of 800×480.
Pre-stored with vehicle maintenance guide.
Support video playback in the formats such as RM, RMVB, AVI, TS, VOB,
MKV.
Support the audio formats such as MP3, WMA, APE, FLAC.
Support picture browsing in the formats such as BMP, PNG, GIF, TIF.
Support e-books in TXT format.
Support FLASH file play in SWF format.
Automatic station search for AM, FM radio.
SD card can be connected.
External USB can be connected.
105
MP5 player
Button description
Button name State Operation Functional description
Power off Inactive.
FM/AM radio Press（less than 2 s） Mute; press the button again to unmute.
MUTE MP3/MP5 Mute pause; press the button again to release mute pause.
Power off Press and hold Inactive.
Radio/MP3/MP5 （more than 2 s） Inactive.
Power off Inactive.
Switch between FM87.5~108MHz（100KHz/Step）in the band
FM radio
Press FM1-FM2-FM3
AM radio Switch to FM radio.
FM
MP3/MP5 Switch to FM radio.
Power off Inactive.
Pressing and
holding In the radio mode, ST/MONO will function and MP3/MP5 will not
Radio/MP3/MP5
function.
Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to AM radio.
Press Switch between AM531~1629KHz （ 9KHz/Step ） in the band
AM radio
AM1-AM2
AM
MP3/MP5 Switch to AM radio.
Power off Inactive.
Pressing and
holding In FM radio mode, LOC will function and MP3/MP5 will not
Radio/MP3/MP5
function.
106
MP5 player

Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to MP3 music play（built-in card by default）.
AM radio Press Switch to MP3 music play（built-in card by default）.
AUDIO MP3 USB-SD card - Built-in card video switch.
MP5 Switch to MP3 music play（built-in card by default）.
Power off Pressing and Inactive.
Radio/MP3/MP5 holding Inactive.
Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to MP5 video play（built-in card by default）.
AM radio Press Switch to MP5 video play（built-in card by default）.
VIDEO MP3 Switch to MP5 video play（built-in card by default）.
MP5 USB-SD card - Built-in card video switch.
Radio/MP3/MP5 holding Inactive.
Power off Power on to start work.
FM radio Enter the SETUP menu.
AM radio Press Enter the SETUP menu.
POWER MP3 Enter the SETUP menu.
MP5 Enter the SETUP menu.
Power off Pressing and Power on to start work.
Radio/MP3/MP5 holding Power off.
107
MP5 player

Power off Inactive
1.In the power-on state. Rotate rightward to increase the sound
level; rotate leftward to decrease the sound level. Volume: 0
- Volume+ Radio/MP3/MP5 Rotate （MUTE）~40（The default start volume is 19）.
2.Select the adjustment such as BAS/TRE/BAL/FAD/Brightness
/Color/Contrast etc.（ascent and decrement values）.
MUTE Rotate leftward or rightward to unmute.
Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to the first station of current FM memory band.
AM radio Press Switch to the first station of current AM memory band.
MP3/MP5/pictur
Press the button to pause the play.
PLAY/PAUSE es and texts
Power off Inactive.
Pressing and Set the storage frequency point of the preset station 1 of the current
FM/AM radio
holding band.
MP3/MP5 Inactive.
Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to the second station of current FM memory band.
AM radio Switch to the second station of current AM memory band.
Press
MP3 Press the button to adjust the sound effect.
MP5 Press the button to switch the caption.
Sound effect
Pictures and texts Open and close the background music.
Power off Inactive.
FM/AM radio
holding band.
MP3/MP5 Inactive.
108
MP5 player

Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to the third station of current FM memory band.
AM radio Switch to the third station of current AM memory band.
Pictures Press the button to ZOOM IN/OUT,（enlarge the picture）.
Press
Texts Press the button to set the text font size.
RPT Press the button once to replay the current program; press the
MP3/MP5 button again to replay all programs（Note: After the system is
started, the default is to replay all programs）.
Power off Inactive.
FM/AM radio
holding band.
MP3/MP5 Inactive.
Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to the fourth station of current FM memory band.
AM radio Switch to the fourth station of current AM memory band.
Press Press the button to activate the shuffle function; press the button
MP3/MP5
again to deactivate the shuffle function.
RDM Pictures Press the button to rotate the picture.
Texts Press the button to change the file font and background color.
Power off Inactive.
FM/AM radio
holding band.
MP3/MP5 Inactive.
P-DN Power off Press Inactive.
109
MP5 player

FM radio Switch to the fifth station of current FM memory band.
AM radio Switch to the fifth station of current AM memory band.
When the contents page down, the system will skip from the current
MP3/MP5 page to the first program on the next page;（you can quickly play
down）.
Set
Page down to enter the next function menu.
menu/contents
Power off Inactive.
FM/AM radio
holding band.
MP3/MP5 Inactive.
Power off Inactive.
FM radio Switch to the sixth station of current FM memory band.
AM radio Switch to the sixth station of current AM memory band.
When the contents page up, the system will skip from the current
Press
MP3/MP5 page to the first program on the previous page;（you can quickly
P-UP play down）.
Set
Page up to enter the previous function menu.
menu/contents
Power off Inactive.
FM/AM radio
holding band.
MP3/MP5 Inactive.
TUN Power off Rotate Inactive.
110
MP5 player

When rotating FM clockwise, the current band will go forward to
manually search for the station in 50K step; when rotating FM
FM radio
anticlockwise, the current band will go backward to manually
search for the station in 100K step.
When rotating AM clockwise, the current band will go forward to
TUN manually search for the station in 9K step; when rotating FM
AM radio
anticlockwise, the current band will go backward to manually
search for the station in 9K step.
MP3/MP5 Inactive.
Rotating clockwise can go forward to select the menu; Rotating
Setting menu
anticlockwise can go backward to select the menu.
Power off Inactive.
Radio/MP3/MP5 Press Call out OSD function menu.
Setting menu Confirm the function.
ENTER Power off Inactive.
Pressing and Quick switching between EQ settings in
Radio/MP3/MP5
holding FLAT-POP-CLASS-ROCK-JAZZ.
Setting menu Inactive.
Power off Inactive.
Preview play of the preset stations（10s preview per frequency
FM/AM radio Press
point）.
MP3/MP5 Go back to the current directory list.
AMS
Power off Inactive.
Pressing and Auto store the stations （ sorted by signal strength ） and then
Radio
holding automatically play the first stored station.
MP3/MP5 Go back to the root directory.
111
MP5 player

Power off Inactive.
Press
Radio/MP3/MP5 Go back to the previous directory or menu.
MENU
Radio/MP3/MP5 holding Go back to the main menu.
Power off Inactive.
Auto scan backward the previous active station and store and play
FM/AM radio Press
the station.
MP3/MP5 Backward and play the next track.
Power off Inactive.
Pressing and
FM/AM radio Inactive.
holding
MP3/MP5 Backward fast, and normal play after releasing the button.
Power off Inactive.
Auto scan forward the next active station and store and play the
FM/AM radio Press
station.
MP3/MP5 Forward and play the next track.
Power off Inactive.
Pressing and
FM/AM radio Inactive.
holding
MP3/MP5 Forward fast, and normal play after releasing the button.
Power off Inactive.
Press
Radio/MP3/MP5 TFT backlight brightness setting（adjustable at 1-5 levels）.
DIM Power off Inactive.
Pressing and
Pressing and holding the button in the power-on state can turn off
Radio/MP3/MP5 holding
the TFT screen backlight.
112
MP5 player
Basic operation •Mute
•Power switch Pressing the button can turn off the sound output,
When the host power supply is normal, pressing the and pressing the button again or turning the
VOL-/VIL+ knob can resume the sound output.

left knob can start the system. Pressing and holding •FM radio
the left knob will power off the system.
When pressing the button, the system will switch to
Note: The system will automatically enter the FM radio mode
FM mode directly.
by default.
•FM band switching
•Volume adjustment
Under the normal working conditions, turning the volume In FM mode, when pressing the button, the system
control button （VOL-/VOL+）can adjust the current will switch between FM1-FM2-FM3 band modes.
•FM stereo switch
volume.
•Call out the setup menu In FM mode, when pressing and holding the button,
the system will switch to single track mode; when pressing and
In the power-on state, pressing the button can open
holding the button again, the system will switch to
the setting interface（see the operation instruction of setting the stereo mode.
menu for details）and set the interface, and when pressing the
Note: This function is used when listening to a weak-signal
button again, the main display will switch to the current playing
station so as to improve the listening effect. The default is the
state.
113
MP5 player
stereo mode. USB.

•Short-range and remote mode switch Note: It will function only when both USB and SD are
connected.
In FM mode, when pressing and holding the button,
•Movie player
the system will switch to the short-range mode; when pressing
and holding the button again, the system will switch to remote When pressing the button, the system will switch
mode. to VIDEO mode directly and begin to play video files in the
Note: This function is used when listening to a super-signal built-in card. After pressing the button at this time, the system
station and attention should be paid to the failure to receive the will switch and play between the built-in card, SD card and
super-signal station. The default is the short-range mode. USB.
•AM radio Note: It will function only when both USB and SD are
connected.
When pressing the button, the system will switch to
•Main menu interface
AM mode directly.
When pressing the button, the system will go back
•AM band switching
to the previous directory menu, and pressing and holding the
In AM mode, after pressing the button, the system will switch
between AM1 and AM2 band modes. button will enter the system's main menu directly.
•Music player •Auto scanning and saving of stations
When pressing the button, the system will switch In the radio mode, pressing the button can browse
to AUDIO mode directly and begin to play video files in the and play the stored stations in the current wave band; when
built-in card. After pressing the button at this time, the system pressing and holding the button, the system will scan
will switch and play between the built-in card, SD card and
114
MP5 player
and store the stations in the current wave band. The system can independently adjust the brightness of the TFT
Note: When the system re-scans the stations, the previous radio screen. Pressing the button in the power-on state can
frequency memory will be cleared. adjust the backlight brightness of the TFT screen between 40%
•Search for radio stations and 100%. Pressing and holding the button can turn
In the radio mode, pressing can automatically search off the TFT display, and pressing any button can resume the
display
up for a station; pressing again can automatically （except MUTE and VOL±）.
search down for a station. Note: When the small light is turned on, the system will
•Fine tuning of radio frequency automatically adjust the TFT backlight to 0, so as to prevent the
dazzling display light from affecting normal driving.
In the radio mode, when turning the right knob •Play/pause
clockwise the radio will automatically forward a step（FM In the music and movie play mode, pressing the
100K, AM 9K）, and when turning anticlockwise, the radio will button can set pause and play.
automatically reverse a step. •Sound mode
•Play up and down
After pressing the button in the music play mode,
In the audio and video mode, pressing can select to the system will switch between the user, normal, jazz, class,
rock and sound mode.
play the previous track; pressing again can select to
•All replay and single play mode
play the next track.
The default setting is to replay all music. When you want to
•Backlight brightness adjustment
115
MP5 player
switch to other states, please press the in the music

•USB plug
and movie play mode.
Use your finger to gently pull down the panel
•Shuffle play mode
The default setting is to play the music in a normal sequence. cover, and expose the SD card slot, MINI
When you want to switch to the shuffle play mode, please press
USB interface and reset button position. Plug the original USB
in the music and movie play mode. cable into the MINI USB interface and then connect the USB
device to the standard USB interface on the other end. After the
•SD card plug USB device is plugged in, the system will automatically detect
Use your finger to gently pull down the panel the USB device and search for the file to enter the music play
mode. To unplug the USB, first switch the system to radio
cover, expose the SD card slot and MINI mode, and then gently pull out the USB device.
USB interface and reset button position, insert the SD card into Note: Before unplugging the USB device, please switch to
the slot with the finger sign upward, release your hand when radio mode, otherwise the system may have an error.
you hear the "click" sound. After inserting the SD card, the
•Reset button（RST）
system will automatically detect the SD card device and search
for the file to enter the music play mode. To eject the SD card, Use your finger to gently pull down the panel
please switch the system to radio mode, then press the SD card
cover, expose the SD card slot, MINI USB
gently, and the device will be ejected automatically.
Note: Before exiting the SD card device, please switch to radio interface and the reset button position, gently press the RST
mode, otherwise the system may have an error. Please do not button with a small object such as a toothpick, and the system
exert too much force when exiting the SD card, otherwise the SD will restart and reset.
card will fly out.
Note: The function will not clear the customer memory settings.
116
Braking system
to stop reliably on the slope even without the driver. The

Braking system
emergency brake should be used together with the parking
Braking system function brake control device, and if any part of the service brake fails,
the performance requirements of emergency braking can still be
Service brake
fulfilled.
Parking brake and emergency brake
WARNING
Auxiliary brake（engine exhaust brake, etc.）
The braking system cannot override its physical
Trailer brake（for tractor） limit. Keep this in mind especially when driving
on roads that are slippery or bad. You should
The service brake is a double-circuit pneumatic brake, and is
constantly adjust the driving to adapt to the
independent of the parking brake device. The parking brake
different road conditions and traffic conditions.
locks the brake with a fully mechanical device, which allows
the vehicle to lock the brake with a fully mechanical device and
117
Braking system
Braking system function inspection
 When the ignition switch is on, the various functions of the braking system
will be activated automatically.
1
Braking system fault display
 When the braking system is faulty, the detection panel will display the
"The braking system is faulty" symbol ①.
WARNING
-When the braking system is found to be faulty, you should

stop the vehicle via the service brake or emergency brake, and
request the help from SINOTRUK service station and
eliminate the fault before driving.
-When ABS is faulty, the wheels may be locked when braking.

In this case, go to the nearest SINOTRUK service Station for
troubleshooting.
118
Braking system
Service brake
 The brake pedal acts on all the wheels of the vehicle via two separate
circuits.
 The rated working pressure is 1MPa. The first circuit acts on the wheels of
rear axle（or double rear axles）, and the second circuit acts on the wheels of
front axle. Once the pressure in one of the two circuits drops below
0.55MPa, the braking system fault indicator will come on. At this time, the
vehicle should be immediately stopped for inspection to ensure the traffic
safety.
 Full braking for several times in a short time may also cause the pressure
to drop below 0.55MPa.
 When depressing the brake pedal without pressing the exhaust brake
linkage switch, the exhaust brake will function automatically.
In the event of rainy/snowy days and slippery roads, the Intelligent

brake request switch ① should be pressed to cut off the exhaust brake
linkage function. 1
119
Braking system
Pressure display
Under normal circumstances, the barometer displays the pressure of the
circuit with a lower pressure. The pressure of another circuit with a higher
pressure can be displayed via the switch at the bottom of the Instrument
panel. After 10 s, the pressure of the circuit with a lower pressure will be
3 4 displayed automatically.
on the barometer indicates the pressure of rear axle and brake circuit I;
1 2 on the barometer indicates the pressure of front axle and brake circuit II.
The barometer pointer is in the red area ③: pressure is low, and the
pressure warning indicator will come on.
The barometer pointer is in the white area ④: normal pressure.
WARNING
-If the pressure is low（less than 0.55MPa）, the warning light
will come on. Wait until the warning light goes out, The
vehicle can be started only when the warning message
disappears.
-After starting the vehicle, test the braking function as soon
as possible on a dry road in good conditions（service brake
and parking brake）!
-Ensure there is no foreign object in the pedal area.
120
Braking system
Parking brake
 The parking brake can also serve as an emergency brake. Make the
Spring-loaded brake chamber function by manipulating the parking brake
valve handle ①, thus applying the parking brake. When the service braking
system has leakage or other faults, the parking brake can be used to achieve
an emergency braking.
1
 The parking brake valve is installed at the rear of the shift lever. The
parking brake can be released completely by manipulating the parking brake
valve only after the braking system pressure is higher than 0.55MPa and the
parking brake signal light goes out, and then the vehicle can be started.
WARNING
-Always apply the parking brake when parking! When
necessary, wheel pads can be used to prevent the vehicle from
rolling.
-Do not start the vehicle until the parking brake light goes
out!
-Before starting the engine, make sure to set the parking
brake valve handle in the parking position. Otherwise, after
the brake pressure rises, the original parking brake will be
released!
121
Braking system
Operation of the parking brake
•Pull the handle ① backward until it is locked, and the parking brake light
② will come on. The parking brake is fully locked at this time.
Partial braking
•Pull the handle backward and retain it at the desired position. Otherwise it
will automatically return to the released position. At this time, the parking
1 brake light ② on the Instrument panel will come on.
•If the handle is not pulled to the full braking position, it will automatically
return to the released position. In this case, the vehicle will not be braked
and may slide.
Release the parking brake handle
•Release the handle latch, the handle will automatically return to the
2
released position, and the parking brake light ② will go out.
•The pressure of the air reservoir should be 0.55MPa or above, so as to

ensure the parking brake is released completely. If it is lower than the
pressure value, the fault display light "STOP" on the Instrument panel will
come on.
122
Braking system
Parking brake test position

 The test position is used to detect whether it is possible to park the tractor
2
train on the slope only relying on the braking force of the spring-stored
energy brake chamber of the tractor.
Detection method is as follows
 Pull on the parking brake handle ①.
 Continue to pull the handle ① to the test position, push the trailer brake 1
handle ②, release the trailer brake, and the train brakes only relying on the
braking force of the spring-stored energy brake chamber. If the test shows
that the spring-stored energy brake chamber cannot brake the tractor train,
the wheels should be blocked with wedges.
WARNING
-The tractor train may slip during the test.
-Even without the above provisions, the wheels also should be
blocked with wedges according to the regulations.
-esting the braking performance of the spring-stored energy
brake chamber before blocking the wheels of the tractor train
reliably with wedges may have the risk of accidents!
123
Braking system
Auxiliary braking
Exhaust braking can make the vehicle slow down or stabilize the vehicle
speed. Exhaust braking can be used for early deceleration in the downhill
conditions, the vehicle crossing or passing through bad roads.
The driver presses the rocker switch ① and the vehicle will achieve the
engine exhaust braking when the following conditions are satisfied:
1 -The clutch is not depressed
-The accelerator pedal is released
-Not in neutral
-The engine speed is above 800rpm.
Some models are equipped with a retarder as an auxiliary brake. For the
operating instructions, see Chapter 3, “Retarders”.
WARNING
-On the wet, dirty or icy roads, the engine exhaust braking
should be used with ATTENTION, otherwise the vehicle has
the risk of slipping!
-On a long downhill, exhaust brake should be used on the
transmission gear, and the braking in neutral will not
function.
Exhaust brake is an auxiliary braking device but a vehicle
parking device and cannot replace the service braking system.
To stop the vehicle fully, it is required to use the service brake,
namely foot brake.
124
Braking system
Trailer brake（for tractor）

 Trailer brake is used to brake the trailer separately.
 Trailer brake joint（yellow）① and the trailer inflatable joint（red）② are
respectively connected to the corresponding joints of the trailer（red to red, 1 2
yellow to yellow）.
Connect the compressed air pipe
 Connect the brake control pipe fitting（yellow）.
 Connect the trailer energy supply pipe fitting（red）.
 When connecting the compressed air pipe and electrical wire, ensure that
they will not be pressured, twisted or rubbing each other when the vehicle
turns or bumps.
Disconnect the compressed air pipe
The trailer joints must be separated in the following sequence, otherwise the
trailer brake will be released, and the trailer may move.
 Pull up the parking brake handle and stop the tractor.
 Disconnect the inflation hose（red）and the trailer and semi-trailer brakes
will function automatically.
 Disconnect the brake control pipe fitting（yellow）.
Pulling the trailer brake handle backwards can implement the trailer brake.
When the handle is released, the handle will automatically spring back to the
initial position and the trailer brake will be released.
125
Braking system
Anti-lock braking system（ABS）

 ABS is the English abbreviation of "Antilock Braking System", and can
prevent the wheels from locking in the braking process.
 ABS can still retain the steering and directional stability of the vehicle
even in the emergency braking.
WARNING
-ABS will not function at a low speed.
-ABS cannot compensate for driving errors（eg, the safety
distance from the vehicle ahead is small, the vehicle speed is
1 2 high, or the vehicle does not slow down when turning, etc.）.
ABS function inspection
 ABS will be activated automatically when the ignition switch is on.

 When ABS detection indicator ① stays on, it indicates that the ABS has a
fault. For ABS inspection, repair and maintenance, please refer to the
attached technical documents of ABS supplier.
126
Braking system
When towing a semi-trailer with ABS

 ECU of the trailer ABS works independently, which requires the power
supply from main vehicle, and displays the trailer ABS fault state via the
instrument on main vehicle.
127
Braking system
Daily precautions for braking system
Inflatable connector
 The inflatable connector ① is located in the air dryer, and can be used to
connect an external test instrument to detect the brake pipe pressure.

1
 The inflatable hose is connected to the inflatable hose, can be used to
inflate tires, and also can be used to inflate the vehicle braking system from
the external air supply.
Auxiliary air module
 Auxiliary air module is installed on the frame, and air can be inflated
through unscrewing any plug and matching a quick connector.
WARNING
No ferrule-type pipe fitting is allowed here.
128
Braking system
Brake pipe protection measures
WARNING
The following requirements should be observed when welding,

cutting or drilling near the braking nylon hose:
-First release the pressure in the pipe.
-Cover the pipe to avoid any damage due to sparks, flames or

burning chips.
-Pressure-free pipe allows a maximum temperature of 130°C for

up to 1 hour.
Note
○
i -Regularly check the tightness of the compressed air braking
system and check for leakage in the pipe; replace the pipes when
they are bent, rubbed, pitted or damaged.
-Often check the compressed air pipes for corrosion.
129
Braking system
Make sure to drain the moisture in the air reservoir
 Stop the vehicle and apply the parking brake. Laterally pull the manual
drain valve pull ring ① at the lower part of air reservoir to drain the
moisture condensed in the reservoir.
 It is recommended to daily check the air reservoir furthest from the air
dryer. If the oil water mixture is drained at the drain valve, it indicates that
the air dryer is faulty, and the drying can at the upper part of the air dryer
1
should be replaced immediately.
 The drying can of the air dryer should replaced at least every two years.
Brake pedal travel inspection
 Gently depress the brake pedal and check the brake pedal free travel, with
the normal value of 10±2mm.
 There should be no clogging when the brake pedal is depressed

completely.
130
Braking system
Brake label
The brake label ② is located at the side door frame of the front passenger,
below the nameplate of the vehicle. The label says the rated working
pressure of the air reservoir and the braking response time A and B
（according to GB7258）.
131
Air conditioning system

WARNING
-Refrigerant R134a, filling amount of 610±20 g!
-When the system suffers the loss in lubricant, replenish the

lubricant specified by the compressor manufacturer!
-Maintenance of air conditioning system and filling of

refrigerant should be carried out by the qualified service
personnel!
-It is forbidden to flush the front wall of the air conditioning

system when it is in the state of external circulation!
-Air conditioning should be run for 1 to 2 times on a monthly

basis to ensure reliable seal and lubrication of the compressor!
132
Control panel composition
133
Panel operation description
No. Button Function Description
•In manual mode, pressing the button can switch between internal circulation and
external circulation.
•In AUTO mode, pressing the button can switch between internal circulation and
Switching between
external circulation without changing the auto function.
1 Internal/external internal circulation and
•In the event of internal circulation in AUTO mode, DEFROST mode and HI/LO
circulation external circulation
mode, switch to external circulation for 1 min after working for 15 min, and then
Button return to internal circulation. In the whole process, the sign will remain internal
circulation.
Pressing the button once

2 will increase the setting
Temperature temperature by 1℃
increase •Setting temperature range: LO, 18℃ -29℃, HI
Pressing the button in AUTO mode can change the set temperature, and the system will
not exit AUTO mode.
Press the button once
3 Temperature will decrease the set
decrease temperature by 1°C
•There are 5 air blowing modes, namely face blowing, face/foot blowing, foot blowing,
foot blowing/defrosting and defrosting（defrosting only refers to the direction of air,
4 Change air blow mode
not indicating whether the defrosting function is turned on or off）.
•Each pressing of the button will enable one switching between 5 modes.
134
•In manual mode, each pressing of the button will enable one switching
of the compressor state（on/off）.
•If the blower does not work after A/C is activated, the system will
Switch on/off air
automatically set the air volume in 2 positions.
5 conditioning
•In AUTO mode, pressing A/C button will exit AUTO mode. Except
compressor
A/C, other actuators will maintain their current working states.
•To protect the compressor, the compressor should be switched on at the
interval of more than 10s.
•In AUTO mode, mode, air volume, internal/external circulation, A/C
and water valve are controlled by automatic logic, and the current state
can manually have changed.
•Air volume+/- button: After exiting AUTO mode, other working states
will not change.
•Circulation button: After pressing the button, the circulation state will
be changed, and AUTO state will not be exited.
•MODE button: After pressing the button, the MODE state will be
changed, and AUTO state will not be exited.
Switch to AUTO
6 •ATUO button: The system maintains the AUTO working state and
mode
resets the working state after recalculation according to the automatic
control program.
•A/C button: After pressing the button, the current A/C state will be
changed, and AUTO state will be exited. Except A/C, other actuators
will maintain their current working states.
•Defrost button: enter DEFROST mode and work according to the
function description of Defrost button.
•OFF button: Switch off the system and work according to the function
description of OFF button.
135
•When the button is pressed in non-DEFROST mode, the air

conditioning will enter the DEFROST mode. When the defrost button is
pressed again, the DEFROST mode will be exited and the working state
will be defined according to the last memory.
•Defrosting will be performed in the default state. Pressing A/C button,
circulation button and air volume adjustment button will not exit the
DEFROST mode, and their defined functions will be performed.
Switch to forced •Pressing the AUTO button in the defrost state will exit the DEFROST
7
Defrost button defrosting mode and the system will work in the AUTO mode; pressing the MODE
button will exit the DEFROST mode and enter the manual mode, the
damper is adjusted to the face blowing position, while other functions
are the same as the current working state; pressing temperature+/-
button will not work; pressing the OFF button will perform its defined
functions.
•In the defrost state, the system will automatically cool or heat
according to the outdoor temperature.
•When the air conditioning is switched on, pressing the OFF button will
enter the OFF state, the display screen will be switched off, while all
actuators will stop working.
•With the air conditioning in the OFF state, pressing the AUTO button
Deactivate the will activate the system and enter the AUTO mode.
8
OFF 按键
system •With the air conditioning in the OFF state, pressing the defrost button
will activate the system and enter the DEFROST mode.
•With the air conditioning in the OFF state, pressing the temperature+/-
button, MODE button and circulation button will activate the system.
•With the air conditioning in the OFF state, pressing the air volume-
136
button and OFF button will not work.

•With the air conditioning in the OFF state, pressing the air volume+
button will activate the system.
•With the air conditioning in the OFF state, pressing the A/C button will
activate the system and enter the manual mode, A/C will work in the set
mode and also the interface will work; in the event of manual mode,
A/C and the air volume will not be recovered; in the event of AUTO
mode, the system will work in the AUTO mode.
•Each time the button is pressed, air volume will be decreased one
position until it stops at 0 position. When air volume is in 0 position, the
compressor will not work, air-conditioning sign will not be
Decrease the air displayed, and the set temperature, circulation and MODE state will
9
Air volume- volume remain unchanged; at this time, pressing air volume- button will not
Button work.
•Pressing the button in AUTO mode will exit AUTO mode and enter
manual mode, and the air volume will be decreased by 1 position over
the existing position.
•Each time the button is pressed, air volume will be increased by 1
position until it reaches 4 positions; then pressing the air volume- button
will not work.
10 Increase the air
•Pressing the button in AUTO mode will exit AUTO mode and enter
Air volume+ volume
manual mode, and the air volume will be increased by 1 position over
Button the existing position.
•Fan can be switched on only when the engine is running.
137
Self-inspection and error repair functions of air  Restart the vehicle or press the OFF switch.
conditioning control system  The working interface after exit: set the temperature at 25℃,
Self-inspection conditions: and work in AUTO mode.
Press MODE button and AUTO button simultaneously for 3 Definitions of fault codes:
times within 3s after the temperature is set to 28℃, and then
00 Normal
the control panel will enter the self-inspection program. Indoor temperature sensor error （ short, open
01
Fault code display mode: circuit）
Outdoor temperature sensor error （ short, open
 When the indoor and outdoor temperature sensors are faulty, 02
circuit）
the screen will flash the fault codes, reminding the driver of the 03 CAN communication error
sensor faults. The system can only work in HI or LO state.
04
 In the event of the faulty evaporator temperature sensor, if the
05 Mode motor 2 error（open circuit）
A/C is working, the fault code will flash for 30s at the interval
of 1.5 min to remind the driver of switching off the air 06 Hybrid motor error（open circuit）
conditioning and repair it at SINOTRUK service station, 07

Evaporator temperature sensor error（short, open
circuit）
preventing the evaporator from freezing.
08 Water valve motor error（open circuit）
Forced self-inspection automatic exit mode:
 Exit automatically at the end of display. 09 Mode motor 1 error（open circuit）
138
the refrigerant has been drained. Danger of explosion and

Air conditioning systems and refrigeration components
poisoning!
WARNING
-Do not clean the refrigeration system components with a steam
Refrigerant and its volatiles are harmful to human cleaner.
health.
-Inspect and repair the refrigeration system at SINOTRUK
-Avoid contact with refrigerant and its volatiles. service station.
-Wear gloves and goggles! In the event of accidental splashing -It is prohibited to use propane butane refrigerant on vehicles
of refrigerant onto the skin or eyes, seek medical attention manufactured by SINOTRUK.
immediately.
-The air-conditioning system should be filled with fluorine-free
-Do not drain the gaseous refrigerant in a enclosed room. There R134a refrigerant.
is the risk of suffocation!
-Never mix fluorine-free R134a with R12（fluorine-containing）
-Pump the refrigerant out with a special treatment system.
refrigerant in the refrigeration system.
-Do not perform welding operations on or near the refrigeration
-Never use R12 refrigerant in the refrigerant system with
system components. Such operation is not allowed even when
R134a refrigerant.
139
Independent heating system

1 2 •Buttons ① and ② are used to select menu items and make settings.
•Button ③ is used to deactivate the heater, exit the menu item and finish
the operation.
•Button ④ is used to activate the heater and confirm the operation.
4 •Pressing and holding button ④ for 2s or more will immediately activate
3
the heater and run it with the heating function.
•Pressing and holding button ③ for 2s or more will activate all heater
functions.
•Selecting the icon in the menu via the buttons ① and ②can activate
the heating function of the heater, and the set temperature and the heating
time can be adjusted via the buttons ① and ② and can be confirmed via
the button ④.
•Selecting the icon in the menu via the buttons ① and ②can activate
the venting function of the heater, and the venting time can be adjusted via
the buttons ① and ② and can be confirmed via the button ④.
•P program:
-Select the icon P in the menu via the buttons ① and ② and then confirm
it via the button ④; select the program memories P1, P2 and P3 via the
buttons ① and ② and then confirm it via the button ④.
-Enable the selected program memory
Select "On" via the buttons ① and ② and then confirm it via the button
④.
140
-Disenable the selected program memory confirm it via the button ④.

Select "Off" via the buttons ① and ② and then confirm it via -Set the operation time
the button ④. Set the operation time via the buttons ① and ② and then
-Edit the selected program memory confirm it via the button ④.
In the menu bar, select the icon via the buttons ① and •Setting
② and then confirm it via the button ④. In the menu bar, use the icon via the buttons ① and ②
-Select the week group/the day of week and then confirm it via the button ④.
Select the week group（Monday to Friday, Saturday to Sunday, -Set the clock time
Monday to Sunday）or the day of week（Monday, Tuesday,
Confirm the icon with button ④, set the hour via the
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday and Sunday）via the
buttons ① and ② and then confirm it via the button ④. Set
the minute via the buttons ① and ② and then confirm it via
-Set the stop/start time
the button ④.
Set the hour via the buttons ① and ② and then confirm it via
-Set the day of week
the button ④. Set the minute via the buttons ① and ② and
Select the icon via the buttons ① and ② and then
then confirm it via the button ④.
-Select the mode of operation confirm it via the button ④. Select the current week via the
Select the icon or the icon via the buttons ① and
-Set the time format
② and then confirm it via the button ④.
-Set the rated temperature Select the icon via the buttons ① and ② and then
Set the rated temperature via the buttons ① and ② and then confirm it via the button ④. Select the time format via the
141
Note CAUTION
○
i -When the heater is put into operation for the first time in
the heating operation mode, there may be a case where the
-There is a risk of fire, explosion, poisoning or injury!
-Do not use heaters in an enclosed room, such as garage.
heater outlet blows natural air rather than hot air, which is -Hot air ducts have high temperature in the heating process.
not a system malfunction but because the pump needs to Therefore, avoid any work in the area where the hot air duct is
bleed the air in the pipe before supplying oil the heater. At located in the whole heating process. Before any work, switch
this time, just wait until the heater automatically shuts down, off the heater and wait for all the parts to cool down
and start the heater again in the heating mode. According to completely. Wear the protective gloves when necessary.
different models and configurations, start the heater for -All parts of the exhaust system are very hot throughout the
several times according to the above method until the heater whole heating operation from start of the heating. Do not work
can work normally. in the area where the exhaust guide is located in the whole
-Odor may be released for a while when the heater is used heating process. Before any work on the exhaust device,
for the first time. It is normal for the first few min of switch off the heater and wait for all the parts to cool down
operation, and it does not indicate that the heater is faulty. completely. Wear the protective gloves when necessary.
-After the heater is switched off, the control light will go out -Before any work on the heater, switch off the heater and wait
and the fuel delivery function will stop, but the fan needs to for all the hot parts to cool down.
cool for about 4 min before it stops. -Do not breathe the exhaust gas.
-Since the air circulation is required for the heater operation, -Be careful when using the fuel.
other items cannot be stored around the heater, for fear of -Switch off the engine and heater before refueling and feeding
affecting the normal operation of the heater. the fuel.
-When you leave for a long time, press the button ③ to -Avoid open flame when using the fuel.
switch off the heater so as to avoid wasting the battery -Do not breathe the fuel vapor.
power. -For vehicles that transport dangerous goods（eg, fuel tanker）,
-If you need to turn off the main power of the vehicle when switch off the heater before entering the hazardous areas
using the heater, please switch off the heater and wait for （refinery, petrol station, etc.）.
the heater cooling fan to stop before turning off the main
power so as to avoid any damage to the heater.
142
Maintenance instructions
Fault/maintenance
 The heater should, during the out-of-service period, also be
 The heater is not started after power-on（not started for the
switched on for about 10 min every month.
first time）:
 The heater should, before putting into operation, be
Power off and then power on again.
commissioned. In the event of smoke, abnormal combustion
 If the heater still is not started, the followings should be sound or obvious smell of fuel or the overheating of
inspected: electrical/electronic components for a long time, switch off the
heater, remove the fuse, and contact the maintenance personnel
-Whether there is fuel in the tank.
of SINOTRUK service station for inspection.
-Whether the fuse works normally.
 If the heater is out of service for a long time, the heating air
-Whether the circuit, connection or connector is intact. duct, combustion air supply pipe and exhaust pipe opening
-Whether the heated air guide, combustion air guide or exhaust should be inspected to keep them clean.
device is clogged.
143
Cab tilting mechanism

① Hydraulic manual pump
② Reversing valve
3 ③ Oil plug
④ Cab lift rocker switch
Cab tilting
WARNING
1 -The reversing valve ② can be operated only when it is
2 4
necessary to tilt the cab, including driving, oiling, etc. In other
cases, the reversing valve must be retained in the " ↓"
position.
-To ensure safety, there should be nobody or obstacles in the
tilting area in front of the cab.
-None is allowed to enter the area between the cab and chassis
when the cab is tilted.
-No work is allowed before the cab is tilted to its limit
position.
144
Preparation before the cab tilting
 Park the vehicle on a flat surface without affecting the traffic of other
vehicles.
3
 Apply the parking brake.
 Set the shift lever in neutral.
 Stop the engine.

1
 Fix the loose objects in the cab. 2 4
 Make sure the storage box is empty.
 Open the front hood.
Cab tilting operation
 Press the rocker switch ④（only for electric lift）and close the door.
 Turn the reversing valve of the hydraulic hand pump to the cab tilting
5
position and shake the pump with a crowbar（or press the switch ⑤/only for
electric lift）.
145
Cab return
Turn the reversing valve of the hydraulic hand pump to the cab return
position and shake the pump with a crowbar（or press the switch ⑤ / for
electric lift only）.
3
WARNING
-No more than three consecutive operations are allowed for
electric pump（although the motor is provided with internal
protection circuits, excessive heat may sharply shorten the
1 motor life）!
2 4
-Since the cylinder will automatically fall at the end of its
return, the cab will fall automatically when the lock pin is
40~150mm away from the lock hook!
 After the cab falls, the rubber bellows connected to the upper air intake
should be in close contact with the lower air intake pipe so as to prevent the
entry of dust.
 Finally, check the lock signal light on the Instrument panel, and the lock
signal light will come on if the cab is unlocked. Close the rocker switch ④
（for electric lift only）in the cab.
 Close the cab front cover.
146
The use rules of cab tilting lift pump hydraulic oil are given in the table below:
Oil Oil
Quality grade and viscosity Change interval mileage
Assembly product product Remarks
grade or time
name volume
Lift
Normal inspection, fill
Cab tilting pump
10# aviation hydraulic oil 1. 8L when necessary, without
mechanism hydraulic
change.
oil
147
Chapter 2 Driving preparation
148
Overview of inspection and maintenance
axle, steering gear, heater, hydraulic tilting system

Before starting the engine, the following inspections should •Fuel coarse strainer: Drainage1）（See Chapter 4 for details）
be done: •Transmission: Oil level
Daily: Monthly:
•Engine: Oil level •Power steering system: Oil level
•Cooling system: Coolant level •Clutch oil tank: Oil level
•Visibility and signaling systems: Functions（see Chapter 1 for •V-belt and ribbed belt: State
details） Semiyearly:
•Seat belts: Condition and function（see Chapter 1 for details） •Cab tilting mechanism: Oil level（see Chapter 1 for details）
•Cab tilting system: Condition（see Chapter 1 for details） •Battery: Electrolyte level
Fue oil / fuel gas: Fuel level / fuel gas volume •Dump truck hydraulic system（or other hydraulic devices）:
Urea: urea margin（see Chapter 1 for details） Liquid level
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with special equipment, the
•Traction device and fifth-wheel: Function, connecting pipes
items to be inspected may not be listed in the table.
and cables（see Chapter 3 for details）
Note:
•Fire extinguishers, vehicle tools
1）: Dump truck hydraulic system（or other hydraulic devices）:
Weekly:
Liquid level
•Tires: Pressure and condition
2）:A new vehicle should be inspected daily.
•Wheel nuts: Fastened or not 1）2）
•Windshield washer: fluid level, winter adaptability, function
•Check for leakage: engine, transmission, transfer case, drive
149
Inspection after starting the engine

Daily:
•Engine: Oil pressure
•Braking system: Functional and effective
•Air suspension system: Whether the vehicle is tilted
•Turn: Whether the operation is normal
Weekly:
•Air suspension system: Check the compressed airbag
Monthly:
•Air dryer: Function1）
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with special equipment, the items to be inspected
may not be listed in the table.
Note:
1) : Dump truck hydraulic system（or other hydraulic devices）: Liquid level
150
Inspection and maintenance before starting the engine

Open the engine hood
Note
○
i Before opening the engine hood, the windshield wiper ⑥
1
should be in the return position.
 Pull the engine hood unlock device ①, and the engine hood spring will
release automatically.
6
 Push the hook ④ under the engine hood by hand.
151
Lift the engine hood ②.
 Two pneumatic springs ③ assist in opening the engine hood and secure
2 4
the engine hood in the final position.
5
3 Close the engine hood
 Use the pull ring ⑤ to pull down the engine hood ② and close it.
 Close the engine hood ② gently, so as to hear the hook ④ locking
sound.
Inspection and maintenance points:
After opening the engine hood, you will see the following inspection and
8 maintenance parts:
⑦ Coolant filler
7 ⑧ Clutch hydraulic tank

9
⑨ Windshield cleaning fluid filler
152

1
WARNING
Before any inspection and maintenance work, please clean up
the site thoroughly!
Before starting the engine, check the followings every day:
Engine oil
 Park the vehicle on a flat surface and check the oil level after stopping the
engine for 20 min.
 Open the engine hood, pull out the oil dipstick ①, wipe the dipstick with
a clean lint-free cloth, insert the oil dipstick back into the dipstick tube, pull
out the oil dipstick again, and the oil level should fall between MAX and
MIN scale on the dipstick, not below MIN scale. Fill the oil if the oil level is
found to be low after several inspections.
WARNING
Do not fill the oil over max. scale. The overfilled oil will
damage the diesel engine!
153
Fill the engine oil

 Turn off the ignition switch.
WARNING
-Be careful of any damage to the engine!

1
-Only use SINOTRUK approved engine oil.
-Do not overfill the oil!
 Tilt the cab, see "Cab tilting mechanism".
 Unscrew the oil filler cap ②.
 Fill the oil.
 Tighten the oil filler cap ②.
See the "Engine maintenance" for the filling amount of oil.
154
Cooling system（daily）
 Park the vehicle on a flat surface and open the engine hood.
 Observe the coolant level in the expansion tank. The coolant level should
fall between MAX and MIN scale on the side of the expansion tank.
Fill the coolant（when necessary） 2
1
①Coolant filler cap ② Pressure limit valve cover
 Slowly unscrew the filler cap anticlockwise to release the pressure in the
cooling system and remove the filler cap.
 Turn the heater temperature adjusting button to MAX.
 Fill the coolant（see “Engine maintenance” for the coolant type）to MAX.
 Close the fluid cap and tighten it.

 Start and idle the engine for 4 min.
 Check the coolant level and fill the coolant when necessary.
WARNING
Once the pressure limit valve cover and filler cap are damaged,
they should be replaced as soon as possible; the pressure limit
valve cover and filler cap should be replaced after the vehicle
runs for 500,000 km or 3 years（whichever comes first）.
155
The cooling system uses a closed forced water cooling system, and uses
all-weather long-term antifreeze as a coolant. Even if there is no antifreeze
requirements in the region where the vehicle is used（the temperature is
above the freezing point throughout the year）, it is not allowed to use water
instead of antifreeze.
WARNING
-Coolant is toxic and may not be inhaled when used, stored
and dispensed.
-Different types of coolant must not be mixed.
1 -It is not allowed to open the expansion tank cover
immediately after the engine stops, so as to avoid burn due to
high temperature pressure gas inside.
-If the coolant is drastically reduced during the vehicle
operation, the entire system will be overheated. Do not
immediately fill coolant at this time because the sudden drop
of the coolant temperature may damage the engine.
Drain the coolant
 When the coolant reaches the change cycle, it should timely be changed
with new coolant.
 When flocs appear in the coolant, change it with new coolant immediately.
 Unscrew the drain plug ① on the radiator draining chamber to drain all
coolant; for drainage of the engine coolant, see “Engine maintenance”.
156
Fuel（daily）
WARNING
-Fuel is very flammable, and be careful of fire and explosion.
-Refuel after stopping the engine and auxiliary heating
devices. 1
-Check the fuel amount on the fuel gauge. If not indicated
accurately, check the fuel gauge and the sensor.
Check the fuel level in the tank
 Check the amount of fuel displayed on the fuel gauge ① and refuel when
necessary.
WARNING
-Do not exceed 95% of fuel tank capacity.
-Do not run out of fuel in the tank. Otherwise, the fuel
system needs to be vented（see "Fuel system"）.
-Check the fuel frost resistance before winter.
157
Check fuel gas volume
 Turn on the ignition key switch.
 Check the CNG/LNG meter for gas volume; if necessary, fill with fuel gas.
Check the performance and condition of the lights and signal system
（daily）
 Check the surface of all lights.
 Check the bulb, switch and control light.
Fire extinguisher（optional）
Check the fire extinguisher and ensure that it functions properly when
necessary. After use, add the fire extinguishing agent or replace the fire
extinguisher with a new one.
Vehicle tools
Check whether the vehicle tools are complete. For example, jack, wrench,
tire inflation hose and so on.
158
WARNING
Before starting the engine, check the followings weekly:
-Vehicle speed, safety and maneuverability, as well
Tire pressure and condition
as the service life of the tire depend on whether the
Check（cold tire） air pressure of the tire meets the requirements.
 Check all tires, including spare wheel, and the inflation -Inadequate tire inflation pressure can reduce the
pressure should be normal. driving safety and speed up the tire scrap. If the
 Check the appearance of all tires, tire wear and pattern depth
tire pressure is always decreasing, check whether
the tire is embedded with foreign objects. At the
（according to the statutory conditions）.
same time, check the hub and valve for leakage.
 Check whether foreign objects are embedded in the tire
-If the tire becomes hot after the vehicle runs at a
pattern or between the double tires.
certain speed, the tire pressure will rise. In this
 Check the tire outside for damage. case, do not deflate the tire. The inflation pressure
Wheel nuts of the tire will vary with the air temperature by
about 0.2 bar per 10°C. Particular attention should
 Check the nut connection.
be paid when inspecting the tires indoors in winter.
 Tighten all wheel nuts to the specified torque again.
159
Windshield washing system/wiper system

The windshield should be checked weekly or more frequently, depending on
the climate, usage and driving conditions.
 Open the engine hood.
 Unscrew the cover ①.
 Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
 Please fill the washing fluid when necessary.
Note: Before winter, fill the frost-proof windshield washing fluid, namely
1 methanol（or isopropanol, ethylene glycol）water solution at the volume ratio
of 50%.
 Close the cover ①.
 Check whether the windshield washing system/wiper system works
normally.
Check the transmission weekly

Fluid level inspection
Check the transmission fluid level, see "Transmission Maintenance".
Check the engine, transmission, transfer case, drive axle, steering gear,
heater and hydraulic tilting system for any leakage.
When necessary, please go to SINOTRUK service station.
160
Check the followings monthly before starting the engine:

Power steering system（monthly）
WARNING!
1 2
The hydraulic power steering system may fail when hydraulic
oil is reduced due to leakage. In this case, it is difficult to steer
the vehicle. At this time, drive the vehicle slowly to the
nearest SINOTRUK service station.
Check the liquid level
 Vehicles should be parked on a flat surface.
 Tilt the cab.
 Pull out the oil dipstick ① and check the liquid level.
 When the engine stops, the level should fall between MIN and MAX scale
on the dipstick.
If the liquid level is low, use the filler ② to fill ATF Ⅲ automatic steering
fluid.
When filling, start the engine and run it stably at a low speed. While filling
fresh oil to the tank, turn the steering wheel back and forth between the left
and right ends until there is no air in the return oil. Stop the engine and fill
the reservoir to the above specified position and screw on the cap.
161
Check the clutch pipe

1
Check whether there is air or liquid leakage in the clutch pipe.
2 Check the wear indicator（monthly）
Check the clutch boost cylinder wear indicator（see “Clutch maintenance”）
and determine whether the clutch disc needs to be replaced.
Check the clutch reservoir brake fluid level（monthly）
Park the vehicle on a flat surface, open the engine hood, check the brake
fluid level in the clutch reservoir ②, and the level should fall between
MAX and MIN scale.
When necessary, unscrew the reservoir cover ① and fill DOT3/DOT4
brake fluid.
WARNING
If the amount of oil in the reservoir drops below the MIN
scale, the clutch actuator will not function normally.
162
Check every six months before starting the engine
Battery（In the tropics, check the battery monthly.）
WARNING
-Be careful of the risk of injury, explosion and short circuit!
-Follow the safety precautions for handling the battery, see
Chapter 6 "Safety notes".
-Do not smoke near the battery, no open flame or spark near
the battery, and no metal articles can be placed on the
battery.
 Remove the battery box cover.
 Check whether the battery electrode pole is loosened from wire connection
clip.
 Check the electrolyte level.
The electrolyte level in each battery should be 10-15mm above the upper
edge of the partition plate or flush with the MAX scale on the side plate.
When the electrolyte level is below the MIN scale, the distilled water must
be filled.
163
Check the project every six months before starting the engine:
Fuel tank
Draining
WARNING
1 During the operation, measures should be taken to avoid
environmental pollution caused by fuel leakage!
The sediment and water in the fuel tank should be removed every 6 months
to avoid damage to the fuel system and engine.
 Place a suitable container under the fuel tank;
 Unscrew the screw plug ① at the bottom of the fuel tank and drain the
sediment and water at the bottom of the tank;
 Properly dispose of the discharged material;
 Tighten the screw plug（tightening torque 34Nm）.
164
Engine oil pressure（daily）
WARNING
-Be careful of any damage to the engine!
-If the driver’s screen displays "Oil pressure alarm", stop the
vehicle immediately and shut down the engine. Identify the
cause, check the amount of oil, and when necessary, fill or
drain the appropriate amount of oil so that the oil level is in
the proper height.
When starting the engine, the driver‟s screen should not display "STOP"
sign or "Oil pressure alarm" message.
Eliminate the fault
 Check the oil level, and when necessary, fill the appropriate amount of oil.
165
Braking system（daily）
Before starting the vehicle, check whether the service braking system and
parking braking system work normally.
The vehicle parking brake can be released after the engine is started, the
system pressure reaches above 0.55MPa（white area）, the warning light
1
goes out and the alarm buzzer stops ringing.
Check the braking pressure
 Turn on the ignition switch, and the barometer pointer cannot be in the red
area.
 When necessary, start the engine and inflate the braking system until the
air dryer unloads the exhaust air.
Steering system（daily）
Check the steering clearance
 Start the engine and run it at the idle speed.
 Turn the steering wheel about 40 mm, and the wheel should be
significantly rotated.
If the steering gap is found to be too large, you should contact a
SINOTRUK service station for inspection.
166
Air suspension system（daily）
Check whether the body inclines
-After the airbag is inflated, the bodywork should not be inclined when the
vehicle is parked on a flat surface.
-If an airbag is under-inflated, deflate another airbag on the same axle to the
average level.Then, slowly drive the vehicle to the nearest SINOTRUK
service station.
Check every week afater starting the engine:
Air suspension system（weekly）
Inspect all air bags in the front and rear axles for signs of wear,
contamination, and aging.
167
After starting the engine, check the followings monthly
Air dryer
Check if the air dryer works normally and effectively（or more frequently
based on local climatic conditions, usage and driving conditions）. Open the
drain valve of the air reservoir for inspection.
WARNING
-In winter, a failed air dryer will freeze the braking system
and disable the brake!
-When operating the drain valve, take care of your eyes and
hands.
Inspection:
 Before inspection, the braking system pressure should be sufficient.
 Pull the pull ring ① laterally to check whether there is oil/water mixture.
See Chapter 1 "Braking system" for more details.
168
Chapter 3 Driving the vehicle
169
Driving/running-in
caution.
Driving/running-in
 The vehicles should run on a flat, well-paved road during the
During the initial driving period, it should be noted that the running-in period.
running-in of the engine and other assemblies is very important  A new vehicle cannot drive fast under full load. Observe the
for the economy and reliability of the vehicle. various indicators and warning lights!
 Always be careful to check the transmission, front and rear
WARNING
axles, hubs and brake discs, and in the event of severe heating,
After a new vehicle or the vehicle replaced with
identify the cause, adjust or repair immediately.
the wheels runs about 50 km, the wheel nut
should be tightened at the specified torque. After After running for more than 2000 km:
150 km, the wheel nut should be tightened again  The vehicle speed can be increased gradually until it reaches
at the specified tightening torque. the maximum vehicle speed or the maximum allowable engine
The following specifications should be observed: speed. If the vehicle is replaced with some mechanical
Before the first 2,000 km: assemblies or undergoes an overhaul, please drive it with
 The vehicle is in the running-in period, please drive it with ATTENTION.
170
Use the vehicle economically
Use the vehicle economically standstill to warm up the engine. Instead, warm up the engine
under medium load so as to bring the engine, transmission and
Optimize the working conditions of the vehicle
drive axle to their normal operating temperatures. This also
 Go to SINOTRUK service station for regular vehicle
saves the time waiting for the departure of the vehicle.
maintenance and repair. Only the vehicle that is in good
 Heat the cab. The engine is used to drive the vehicle, and the
condition（eg, air filter is clean, fuel injection is properly
engine is not an optimal source of heat at idle! The auxiliary
adjusted, etc.）can fulfill the best fuel consumption. heater consumes only 1/4 to 1/3 of the fuel that the engine runs
 Avoid unnecessary driving resistance. Bundle the canopy at idle and reduces vibration, noise and emissions.
properly, lowering the adjustable canopy frame to the lowest  If the vehicle is at a standstill for a long time, the engine
height can extend the life of the canopy and reduce the air should be stopped.
resistance, significantly reducing fuel consumption.
 Do not accelerate until the engine is stopped （ engine
 Proper tire pressure. If the tire pressure is 1bar below the
acceleration will increase fuel consumption）.
normal value, the tire deformation will cause fuel consumption
Economic method of driving
to increase by 2% and reduce the life of the tire.
 Low speed, high load. The economical operation range of the
Operate the vehicle economically
turbocharged diesel engines is about 50-70% of the rated speed
 Start the engine. When starting the engine, do not depress the
and 80% of full load. Therefore, during the normal driving, the
accelerator pedal so as to avoid unnecessary large injection
engine tachometer pointer should be kept within the green scale
amount, thus reducing the amount of exhaust gas（at this time,
as much as possible and the engine should be operated under
electronic diesel control（EDC）will automatically adjust the high load.
fuel injection amount according to various factors such as  When necessary, apply high power and low speed. When you
engine temperature）. need high drive power, use the full available power to reach the
 Warm up the engine. Under low load, the engine temperature rated speed. For example, uphill, overtaking, speed adjustment
rises slowly at idle. Therefore, do not run the engine at a for lane change and other circumstances.
171
Use the vehicle economically
 Use the tachometer. During the driving period, make sure to announcements broadcast via the radio to avoid the traffic jam.
view the engine tachometer, and keep the engine speed in the  Keep a safe distance away from the vehicle ahead, while the
economic area as much as possible. driver can adapt to the changing traffic conditions at any time.
 Shift timely. Before starting uphill, engage the low gear  Make best use of the inertia of the vehicle. The truck has a
timely so that the vehicle can finish the ramp at a high engine great inertia, which can be used to climb or coast on a flat road.
speed to avoid re-shifting. The accelerator pedal can be released 800m away from the exit
 Do not shift freely, and the engine torque should be used of the highway（with the limited time loss）, provided traffic
reasonably. The traction force will be interrupted for each shift, conditions permit and the highway is flat. Before reaching the
which means the loss of time and speed. Shifting freely will bottom of the hill, release the brake pedal in good time and
increase fuel consumption and accelerate the wear of clutch and allow the vehicle to gain kinetic energy（if the traffic conditions
synchronizer. and traffic regulations permit）. This eliminates the need for
 If possible, gear skip is allowed. additional fuel consumption to accelerate, and you can get the
 Select a higher starting-off gear. The vehicle can start off at a kinetic energy required for the vehicle.
high gear at full load on the flat. For example, the driver can  Avoid unnecessary parking and braking. Driving slowly and
start off at the 3rd or 4th gear, low splitter group to help reduce smoothly rather than parking（eg, in the traffic light）will reduce
clutch wear.
fuel consumption. Because it avoids starting the vehicle at a
 For a transmission with synchronizer, it is unnecessary to standstill and reduces wear of the driveline mechanism.
disengage the clutch twice or shut off the throttle when shifting.
 Use the cruise control reasonably. The flexible use of cruise
This means faster shifting, reducing the interrupted time of
control can make driving more comfortable and reduce
traction force and reducing the fuel consumption.
unnecessary fuel consumption.
 Drive smoothly. No obvious acceleration or deceleration, and
high average vehicle speed, and the fuel consumption will be
low. During the driving period, pay attention to the traffic
172
Tachograph
Tachograph and used to connect standardization device.
LCD: displays date, time, mileage, driver‟s information, initial

Use the Tachographs to record the vehicle relevant
configuration, fault code, and so on.
information as per the requirements of regulaition.
Main Technical Parameters:
Max. speed range: 125km/h;
Effective pulse range: 4000-25000imp/km.
Main Functions:
MTCO1324 tachograph can record the time of driving, rest, •Button 1, 2: press them to select driver.
preparation, working, and different operation conditions, etc.
•Button M: used to select information displayed and set.
The fault code can also be stored by tachograph.
•Button +, -: used to adjust time, date, page up and page down.
Vehicle speed will be recorded in ROM as system parameters
•Button ^ : to open paper tray.
after its signal has been processed by CMOS chip.
•Paper tray is under panel and includes two layers: the upper
Operation and Displaying
layer is used to place recorder paper for first driver, the lower
•Contents on the panel includes:
layer is for the second driver.
Communication interface: located at left and upper of panel,
173
Tachograph
The nameplate is pasted in paper tray.
User mode or servicing mode can be performanced by

operating the buttons on panel: press the button M shortly Time displaying area
to enter user mode; press the button M while switching on
the ignition key to enter servicing mode. Mileage recorder
area: mileage is
Press „menu‟ button, the screen will show the average recorded by
curve. Once up
speed within 15 mins before parking, press upward and
or once down
downward, you can check successively: means 5km.
1. Real Time and Speed 2. Average Speed Within 15 Mins

Before Parking 3. Fatigue Driving Record4. Driver‟S Code
5. Driving License Number 6. Excessive Alarm Speed
7. Vehicle Character Coefficient 8. Total Mileage and Trip Status displaying area: driving, rest, preparation, working
Mileage 9. Record Index and Parking Index Vehicle speed curve displaying area: speed shown at radial
direction, and time shown along circumference.
10. Serial No. Of Tachograph and Software Version.
Paper Recorder: record and print the information as vehicle

speed, mileage, etc.
174
Tachograph
Maintenance
Print
Except daily cleaning, no other maintenance is required. In the
Stop the vehicle, and then press the "Print" button to print the
event of a fault, it is recommended to replace the entire
data according to the display screen.
component or related parts. When cleaning the tachograph with
Note:
a clean and soft cloth, make sure that it contains no corrosive
1.Do not print while driving
chemicals and that there is no water inside the tachograph.
2.It always prints the current driver's data and the
Fault code and fault cause:
unidentified drivers.
Fault Fault
Fault cause Fault cause
code code Setting description
A00C Internal error 9010 LCD error IC card is only used to identify the driver and the position of
A400 No power supply 9060 Paper plate function error tachograph.
Vehicle speed system Note: When inserting IC card, lift the CMOS chip and quickly
A822 Sensor error 9061
error
A423
Sensor communication
9063 Paper plate support error
insert or unplug it.
error
System communication Paper plate mechanism Vehicle performance factor setting: Insert the IC card, the
A411 9064
error trigger error
No record on paper
screen will display "Vehicle performance factor setting: 624",
A051 900F Button error
plate and then press the up or down button to adjust the value. After
CAN communication No record of the first
900B 9051
interrupted driver‟s information the setting is completed, unplug the IC card, and the set value
No record of the second
900A Other CAN error 9052 will be saved. Speed setting is the same as time setting.
driver‟s information
Update paper plate
9430 Speed output error 9053
mechanism setup
175
Vehicle load
Vehicle load
Basic requirements for loading and unloading
When loading the vehicle, attention should be paid to the
-Do not exceed the maximum axle load or allowable total
followings:
weight of the vehicle.
-Current national regulations concerning labor protection
-Fix the goods properly to prevent from falling off when
and accident prevention（eg, health and safety provisions in
driving.
labor law）.
-The center of gravity of the goods should be located in the
-National regulations on road vehicle load safety and load
center of the vehicle, do not allow the center of gravity to move
distribution.
forward, otherwise it will overload the front axle.
-The manufacturer's instructions stored in the vehicle.
-If the goods are moved to the rear axle, the load on the front
Common loading errors
axle of the steering axle should be kept above the minimum
Loading error Consequence
specified value（eg, the minimum load on front axle of a
Overloaded on one side of
Loaded on one side only two-axle truck is 25% of the total weight and 20% for other
suspension/tire
Loaded on one side only and high models. For trailers with rigid drawbar/middle drawbar, the
Rollover may occur when turning
center of gravity
When braking or turning
minimum load needs to be kept at 25% of the total weight at
The goods is improperly fixed/not
well-bound on the goods flatbed
-Goods shaking any time）.
-Body and goods are at risk
There is a clearance between the -When the vehicle brakes, the load will be transferred to front
goods and the front partition, side When braking or turning axle, while the load on rear axle will be reduced accordingly,
partition and rear partition of the -Goods shaking
vehicle, or there is a clearance -Body and goods are at risk
and front axle will be at the risk of overload.
between the goods. -Pay attention to tire size, the rated load and the required air
pressure.
176
Use the vehicle in winter
Use the vehicle in winter below -30°C.

Auxiliary heater
It is recommended to apply the wax-based protective agent
onto the cab, body and chassis before winter. In particular, the In very cold weather（temperature below -20°C）, the vehicle's
freezing-prone areas should be recoated with the protective auxiliary heater will start working. Check its function and
agent. Regularly clean the entire vehicle to remove corrosives condition so as to ensure its normal operation.
that may contain salt. Cooling system
When idling the engine below 0℃ Check the antifreeze. Fill the antifreeze when necessary.
When the engine is idling at a temperature below 0°C for a Windshield wiper
long time, it will increase the wear of the engine, so the idling Fill the antifreeze fluid.
time should not be too long. Battery
Fuel tank Check the acidity of the electrolyte.
Before winter, empty the water in the fuel tank. Before winter, charge the battery fully. Throughout the winter,
Fuel the battery power should be maintained at more than 90% of its
In winter, the winter diesel of the suitable grade should be used. total charge so as to ensure that the battery is ready to work.
Fuel strainer Vehicle headlight
Drain the water in the fuel strainer daily at the temperature Check the installation state and make adjustments when
necessary.
177
Use the vehicle in winter
Snow chains
When driving on snow-covered roads, install snow chains on the drive

wheels. Do not install snow chains too tight, and ensure that snow chains
can move slightly（self-cleaning function）.
WARNING
-When using snow chains, make sure that there is an

adequate clearance between the mudguard and the tire, and
when necessary, an adequate clearance should be left between
snow chains and the body!
-When installing snow chains on vehicles that are equipped

with air suspension, be careful not to drive with low air
suspension!
178
Start the engine
Start the engine

Before starting the engine, check whether the main battery switch is on.
Avoid unnecessary engine starting to protect the battery.
WARNING
-When the vehicle is parked for a long time or the electrical

system is being serviced, the main battery switch should be off.
-Do not loosen or remove the battery terminal ends while the
engine is running.
Turn on the switch
Turn the main switch clockwise to the horizontal.
Turn off the switch
Turn the main switch anticlockwise to the vertical.
179
Start the engine
Be careful of accidents!
-Do not turn off the ignition switch while driving and always
keep the ignition switch in the driving position "II".
-The key must be removed when leaving the vehicle, even if
left for a short time.
Turn the key to position "II"
The lights will be switched on in turns: position light - brake light//reversing
light - rear fog light/work light - front fog light/low beam.... At the same
time, all the light on the Instrument panel will be switched on in turns, and
the instruments will begin to display. Information display screen can be
switched between "Driving Screen", "Input Information Screen" and
"Output Information Screen".
If the system detects a fault, the information display screen will flash with
the corresponding fault content（if there are multiple faults simultaneously,
they will be displayed one after another）.
Release the steering lock device
Insert the key into position "0".
Turn the key to "I" position, and rotate the steering wheel back and forth to
unlock the steering lock device.
180
Start the engine
 Wait for about 30 s to recover the battery.

Start the engine
 Repeat the above steps.
 Apply the parking brake and set the transmission to neutral or
depress the clutch.
Note: If the clutch is not depressed and the transmission is WARNING

not in neutral, the engine cannot be started.
-Check the driver’s screen immediately after the
 Depress the clutch. engine is started, see "Driver’s screen and
detection light Instrument panel".
 Turn the key to "III" position to start the engine.
-If the vehicle has started, the warning light "Oil
 The startup time should not exceed 15 s.
Pressure Alarm" on the driver’s screen will
 Release the key after starting the engine. come on and the central warning light will flash.
Other light will go out after completing the inspection/warning In this case, the engine should be shut down
functions. Do not start the vehicle until the fault display immediately to find out the cause of the
"STOP" on the driver‟s screen disappears. malfunction.
If the engine cannot be started
 Turn the key anticlockwise to position "0".
181
Stop the engine
Stop the engine

WARNING
If the engine is running at high load, the coolant temperature
will be high. Do not stop the engine at this time, and let it idle
for 3 to 5 min. Stop the engine until the engine coolant
temperature drops. Otherwise there is a risk of any damage
to the engine.
 Set the transmission at Neutral.
 Apply the parking brake.
 Turn the key anticlockwise to position "0". At this time, the engine is off.
 Turn off the battery switch.
Lock the steering wheel
 Turn the key to position "0" and remove it.
 Turn the steering wheel until you hear the locking sound of the steering
wheel.
At this time, do not rotate the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not lock the steering gear while the vehicle is driving.
182
Clutch
clutch pedal in half-linkage state）time of the clutch within 1

Clutch
min reaches 10 s, the clutch should be stopped for 5 min,
Clutch operation
during which the engine cannot be stopped.
1. The clutch should be depressed completely.
5. During start-up of the vehicle, if there is smell of the friction
2. When starting the vehicle, the engine speed should be as low plate burning and the start-up is not succeeded or the clutch has
as possible. To accelerate the vehicle, release the clutch pedal, slipping after start-up, stop the clutch for 15 min, during which
depress the accelerator pedal to raise the engine speed and then the engine cannot be stopped.
upshift.
6. When there is the sound of tooth breaking during the
3. When starting the vehicle, engage the clutch as soon as vehicle‟s warm-up, upshift to start the vehicle after depressing
possible after releasing the clutch pedal（under the premise of the clutch pedal and waiting for a while.
ensuring a smooth starting）. Do not move the vehicle in half
WARNING
linkage for a long time.
To protect the clutch, the vehicle should be
4. When the vehicle is under high load and starts on a slope or a started at 1st gear on a flat surface under full
surface with poor adhesion, sometimes the vehicle needs to be load or on a slope and a poor road.
started for several times in a row. The accumulative sliding（the
183
ZF transmission
ZF transmission
ZF-Ecosplit 16-speed transmission consists of 4-speed main transmission,
high/low range and splitter range.
Structure:
4-speed main transmission
-Synchronizer, reverse sleeve.
-Manual shift（rotary shaft control）.
-Double H range or（overlap）single H range.
-Servo shift.
High/low range, at the rear of the transmission
-Synchronizer shift.
-Double H range; automatic shift（pneumatic）when the shift lever is moved
between 3/4 and 5/6 positions.
（
- Overlap）single H range; shift by the pre-selector switch on the shift lever.
Splitter range, at the front of the transmission
-Synchronizer shift.
-Pneumatic shift by operating the pre-selection valve on the shift lever, and
then operate the clutch.
184
ZF transmission
Gear description（double H range）
◇ Automatic shifting range
R Reverse gear
1~4 Low range
5~8 High range
N Neutral gear
185
ZF transmission
Shift system
High and low gear double H shift system
The shift system is divided into 5 adjacent positions. There is a

spring-return neutral position respectively in the positions 3/4 or 5/6.
The gears are different from their spring forces, which are used to indicate
their positions on the transmission.
When shifting from 3/4 to 5/6, the pneumatic shift between high and low
range will be done automatically, and vice versa.
2 High/low shift control system consists of a shift module ② and a two-way

cylinder ① in the transmission.
186
ZF transmission
Splitter range
The shift operation of the splitter range is controlled by the pre-selector
switch on the shift lever. The driver uses the switch on the shift lever to
preselect high or low splitter range, and then depresses the clutch pedal to
shift between high and low splitter range.
Note
○
i -Shift the splitter only after the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
-Select high/low splitter range according to the vehicle driving
conditions.
Accessories
Ecosplit transmissions can be equipped with the following accessories
according to the vehicle structure:
 Clutch PTO
 Transmission PTO
Such as emergency steering pump
 ZF retarder
 Separated heat exchanger
Used to cool the transmission fluid
187
ZF transmission
Operation instructions
To ensure fuel economy, follow the following guidelines:
 Make sure the engine is working in the economic speed zone（middle
zone）.
 Drive the vehicle at high range as far as possible.
 Predict the traffic conditions in advance.
 Avoid unnecessary braking and acceleration.
188
ZF transmission
Start the engine and start the vehicle

 Apply the parking brake（to prevent the vehicle from rolling accidentally）.
 Set the transmission in neutral.

 Start the engine.
 Engage the gear（to protect the clutch, it is recommended to start the
vehicle at 1st gear）.

 Release the parking brake, release the clutch gradually, and the vehicle will
start.
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle when the engine is running, the
parking brake should be applied to prevent the vehicle from
rolling accidentally.
Clutch operation
 When using the clutch, the clutch pedal should be depressed.
WARNING
With the clutch not disengaged fully, shifting will cause the
wear of the transmission synchronizer.
189
ZF transmission
Shift operation
ZF Ecosplit series transmissions are synchronizer transmissions.
The synchronizer is a gear-set isokinetic gear unit which makes gearshift
more quickly and more safely:
 Upshift without depressing the clutch for two times.
 Downshift without depressing the accelerator and depressing the clutch for
two times（even on downhill and difficult driving conditions）.
Transmission gear diagram
For double H-shift, there is a spring-return neutral position（idle）in the 3/4
gear range（low）and 5/6 gear range（high）.
When selecting the positions 1/2 or 7/8, the shift lever needs to overcome
the spring force and come into the corresponding position before engaging
the gear. If released from the gear, the shift lever will automatically return to
the corresponding neutral position.
The low range is separated from the high range by a stronger spring lock
mechanism. The reverse gear is protected by a stopper and more force is
required to apply the reverse gear.
The gears are different from their spring forces, which are used to indicate
their positions so that the selected position can be confirmed easily.
190
ZF transmission
WARNING
-To protect the transmission synchronizer, always ensure that
the clutch is disengaged completely.
-Upshift or downshift must not exceed two gear steps（eg, from
4 low splitter to 6 low splitter）, otherwise the synchronizer will
be damaged.
-To avoid damage to the transmission and the engine,
downshift is only possible after decelerating and reaching the
maximum speed allowed for the target gear.
-Do not shift（including the splitter shift）during the PTO
operation period, otherwise the synchronizer will be damaged.
To shift and adjust the vehicle speed, make sure to first
disengage the PTO.
-Manipulate the shift lever gently and quickly（do not apply too
much force）, especially in the cold state. It is recommended to
open your hand to control the shift lever.
-When engaging a gear, hold the shift lever to overcome the
shift resistance until the synchronizer completes the shift.
191
ZF transmission
Double H-shift
When shifting between the position 3/4 and 5/6, gently tap the shift lever
with your hand, and then engage the desired gear again.
Note
○
i -When the vehicle is cold, higher shift force than usual will be
required; when shifting from the neutral 5/6 to the neutral 3/4,
the high/low-gear auxiliary transmission cannot be set at low
gear, and the appropriate gear should be engaged after
decelerating the vehicle.
WARNING
-When the vehicle speed is more than 28 km/h, do not shift in
the high/low-gear auxiliary transmission. Otherwise it may
cause the synchronizer wear of the high/low-gear auxiliary
transmission.
-To avoid any damage to the synchronizer, always shift
between high and low gears when the vehicle speed is below
28 km/h. In drive mode, other gears can be preselected only
before the gearshift is about to be made. Otherwise, if you
select the other high and low gear early, in the event of
quickly shifting under a traffic condition, it may cause the
failure to engage the desired gear, which may also cause the
transmission synchronizer wear.
192
ZF transmission
Reverse gear
WARNING
Only when the vehicle is stopped can the reverse gear be
engaged.
 When engaging or disengaging the reverse gear, the clutch should be
completely separated.
 Disengaging the clutch must be done at the engine idle speed.
 Only when the internal countershaft of the transmission is at a standstill
can the reverse gear be engaged. Otherwise, the gear may be damaged.
ATTENTION
The time that takes for the countershaft to stop may vary from
the operation mode and can be shortened by enabling the
synchronizer briefly, to which 1st gear is preferred.
 Engage or disengage the reverse gear, and no gear breaking sound will be
allowed when engaging the reverse gear.
 When necessary, please prolong the waiting time before engaging the gear,
or check that the clutch is completely separated.
 Slowly engage the clutch.
193
ZF transmission
PTO operation Danger!

Engage/disengage -No shifting is allowed when PTO is working.
 PTO can be engaged or disengaged only when the clutch is -When the vehicle is parked for a long time（eg,
disengaged
overnight）, disengage the PTO.
 The clutch must be disengaged at the engine idle speed
Shift interlock（optional）
 PTO can be engaged only when the transmission countershaft
is at a standstill or PTO is prone to gear breaking. Shift interlock is required in the following circumstances:
WARNING  When it is not allowed to drive the vehicle when the PTO is
-The time that takes for the countershaft to stop engaged.
may vary from the operation mode and can be  When the PTO must be prevented from engaging during the
shortened by enabling the synchronizer briefly, to driving period.
which 1st gear is preferred. Parking

-Engage or disengage the PTO. No gear breaking  Set the transmission in low range（gear 1-4）.
sound is allowed when engaging the PTO.  Apply the parking brake.
Prolong the waiting time before engaging the In order to increase the safety, engage a corresponding gear:
PTO when necessary, or check that the clutch is  Park the vehicle uphill: engage the forward gear!
disengaged completely.  Park the vehicle downhill: engage the reverse gear!
-Slowly engage the clutch to the normal operating To ensure the safety of the vehicle under load, an additional
speed. wheel fixture should be attached.
194
ZF transmission
Traction start DANGER

When starting the engine via traction, high range（5-8 position） To avoid any damage to the transmission, the
should be engaged in high/low range transmission. engine can be started via traction only in high
Towing range（5-8 position）. In addition, it is forbidden
Vehicles can be towed only under the following conditions: to start the engine in reverse gear.
 Equipped with emergency steering pump
 Select high range, shift lever in neutral position
 Maximum towing distance is 100 km
 The maximum allowable towing speed depends on the axle
ratio and tire size
Note
○
i If any of the conditions described is not satisfied,
the drive shaft must be disconnected from rear
axle flange or half shaft should be removed so as
to prevent any damage to the transmission.
Please follow the country's regulations on
maximum towing speed.
195
ZF transmission
Emergency operation
2
The failure of shifting in high/low range may be caused by the followings:
1  The compressed air system pipe is damaged.
 High and low gear valve ② or cylinder ① is faulty（condensed water or
dirt）.
WARNING
-In the above situations, driving can be continued only at a
low speed（1-4 position）.
-If the gear is in the high range when the fault occurs, the
vehicle must be towed.
Shift assist
CAUTION  If the shift assist is faulty, manual shift can still be achieved with high force.
-When leaving the vehicle with the Lubricant
engine in operation, the parking  The transmission should use the lubricant designated by SINOTRUK or oil
brake should be applied so as to products in the table of ZF oil products TE-ML 01, TE-ML 02. When used in
prevent the vehicle from rolling the temperature below -15℃, make sure to confirm whether the appropriate
accidentally.
oil product is used according to the table, and when necessary, please change
oil in time. In addition, it is also possible to preheat the oil products before
starting the engine, eg, preheating with warm air. However, the temperature
on the transmission must not exceed 130°C.
196
ZF transmission
Parking the vehicle at low temperatures

When parking at the outdoor temperatures below 0°C, make sure that the transmission is in the low range（at 1st gear or neutral in the
low range）.
Starting the vehicle at sub-zero temperature
Vehicle equipped with ZF-Ecosplit transmission
Transmission* Above-20℃ -20℃ to -40℃
Lubricant model and

See "Transmission Maintenance"
grade
Preheat at least 15 minutes at an engine speed of

approximately 1500 rpm.
The transmission is placed in neutral.
Precautions for starting All functions of the transmission are Before starting the engine, heat up the oil. This can be
the engine normal. done, e.g. using warm air which must not exceed 110℃ on
the transmission itself.
Do not heat the mechanical parts, the EST54 electronic
control unit, and the heat exchanger.
Restriction Shifting time may become longer. Need to heat up.

*
: The transmission temperature may differ from the ambient temperature.
197
SmartShift® AMT
SmartShift® AMT
（HW20716A（C）L/HW25712XA（C））
The well-crafted AMT-Automatic Mechnical Transmission system is
developed by sinotruk, gear shifting can be controlled by electronic control
system（or manual operation）, which can sharply reduce the labor intensity
of the driver，significantly improve the comfort of driving and economic
efficiency.
SmartShift® system
During the shifting process, the AMT operating status is displayed on the
Instrument panel. The main information is as follows:
"A" or "M" in the figure: A - Automatic mode, M - Manual mode
"C" in the figure: C - Crawl mode
"P" or "E" in the figure: P - Power mode, E - Economy mode
Number in the figure: "5" - Engaged gear, "4"/"12" - the appropriate gear
recommended by the control system according to the current working
conditions;
During the shifting process, “▲” flashes to indicate upshift and “▼”
flashes to indicate downshift.
198
SmartShift® AMT
SmartShift® system
AMT warning light is divided into red and yellow, and the specific meaning 1
is as follows:
An AMT fault message appears on the display together with the red warning
stop symbol ①,indicating that there is a serious fault in the AMT system. 2
Stop immediately and do not drive before the fault is repaired!
An AMT fault message appears on the display together with the yellow
warning symbol ②, indicating that there is a fault in the AMT system, but
the vehicle can still drive safely and should be inspected and repaired as
soon as possible.
HW20716A/HW25712XA series transmissions provide the following two
modes:
▼ Automatic mode, controlled automatically by the control system.
▼ Manual mode, directly controlled by the driver.
199
SmartShift® AMT
Automatic function（A function）

Automatic function is the default operating function of the control system. In
the automatic function, the driver only needs to select the starting gear via
the shift lever. Starting gears include drive gear, reverse gear or neutral gear.
During driving, the transmission control system will automatically select the
most suitable gear based on the current conditions. The driver can also
intervene in the shifting operation with the lever in the automatic function.
Manual function（M function）
Any manual shift request should be sent by the driver, the driver decides to
the shifting time, and the clutch is automatically controlled by the system to
complete the relevant actions.
A/M function selection
The driver can switch between manual and automatic functions via the
button ① on the lever.
The screen on the Instrument panel will display the current operating mode
of the transmission in real time.
The default operating mode is automatic. During the starting and driving
period, the driver can switch A/M function at any time.
1
200
SmartShift® AMT
The method to switch from automatic function to manual function:

Click the button ① on the shift lever, and the switching is achieved
when the screen displays the operating mode M.
The method to switch from manual function to automatic function:
Click the button ① on the shift lever, and the switching is achieved when
the screen displays the operating mode A.
Start the vehicle
 Select the appropriate starting gear
（only starting at 1~8 position is allowed 1
by the control system, and it is recommended to start the vehicle at 1~4
position）
 Depress the accelerator pedal gently and then the vehicle is started.
 Release the parking brake.
 When starting in the medium idle mode, please keep the current gear in
neutral, then press the button（C）, then engage the starting gear, depress the
accelerator pedal, release the parking brake, and then drive the vehicle. In
this mode, only 1~4 position is available. To exist C mode, press the button
（C）again.
 When starting in the high idle mode, please keep the current gear in
neutral, then press and hold the button（C）for more than 5s, then engage the
starting gear, depress the accelerator pedal fully, and then drive the vehicle.
After the vehicle is started normally, high idle mode will be enabled
automatically, without pressing the button（C）.
201
SmartShift® AMT
Creep mode
The AMT system provides a creep mode that allows the vehicle to travel at a
slower speed under certain conditions.
Switch to the M mode by double-clicking the M/A button on the handle.
Press the brake pedal to engage 1st gear. Release the brake pedal and the
vehicle moves slowly. During the creeping process, you can manually
upshift（up to 5th gear）, you can press the accelerator pedal to accelerate,
release the accelerator pedal to resume the creep mode, or you can
decelerate or stop by pressing the brake pedal, and release the brake pedal to
resume the creep mode. The creep mode supports 1-5 and R1 gears, and the
driver can choose the gear according to the working conditions. Pressing the
accelerator pedal and shifting the gear will not exit the creep mode, and only
manually switch to the A mode to exit the creep mode.
WARNING
-When creeping, the clutch is controlled using the accelerator
pedal. This places a great deal of load on the clutch.
Therefore, only use creep mode rarely and for a short period.
-It is not allowed to use the creep function on the up and
down ramp（>2%）;
-It is not allowed to enter the creep mode during driving.
202
SmartShift® AMT
Operation in automatic mode during driving

Upshift and downshift
During driving, the accelerator pedal ② will affect the engine speed,
torque and vehicle speed. AMT will automatically calculate and engage the
appropriate gear according to the current engine speed and other information.
After the brake pedal is depressed, the vehicle will decelerate and the
control system will automatically select the best gear for the vehicle's
operation. 1 2
Accelerate
To get the maximum acceleration of the vehicle, you can depress the
accelerator pedal ② fully. The driver can operate as follows:
-Switch to P mode.
-Depress the accelerator pedal ② fully.
-The control system will keep the current gear or select a low gear.
-Then the vehicle will gain adequate power to speed up rapidly.
Decelerate
To decelerate the vehicle, depress the brake pedal ① or release the
accelerator pedal ②, and the vehicle will decelerate.
203
SmartShift® AMT
Manual shift in automatic mode

When the vehicle operates in automatic mode, the driver can intervene in
the automatic mode via the shift lever. In automatic mode, pushing the lever
1
① forward will upshift, and push the lever ① backward will downshift.
In automatic mode, shifting can be achieved via the lever only when the
vehicle's operating environment meets the shifting needs. In automatic mode,
the lever operation can affect the operation of automatic mode, but will not
release the automatic mode and will not switch the transmission operating
mode to manual mode.
204
SmartShift® AMT
Operation in manual mode during driving

Any shift operation in manual mode should be send by the driver, but the
clutch is automatically controlled by the system to complete the relevant
actions.
Shifting can be achieved only when the vehicle's operating environment 1
meets the shifting needs. If the current engine speed cannot reach the
required speed at the target gear, the control system will switch to a suitable
gear which is not necessarily the target gear according to th e current speed.
If no shifting is allowed by the control system in the current operating
environment, a warning sound will be sent, which indicates that the driver's
shifting request is rejected.
•Upshift operation
According to the current traffic environment, do not change the current
accelerator pedal position when shifting unless there is a special
circumstance.
When the driver pushes the lever forward, the shift request of at least one
upshift will be sent without pressing the function button ①（the circle
button F on the left of the lever）, and the shift request of one upshift will be
sent when the function button is pressed. When the target gear on the screen
stops flashing, it indicates that the upshift is achieved.
205
SmartShift® AMT
Downshift operation
According to the current traffic environment, do not change the current
accelerator pedal position when shifting unless there is a special
circumstance.
1
When the driver pushes the lever backward, the shift request of at least one
downshift will be sent without pressing the function button ①（the circle
button F on the left of the lever）, and the shift request of one downshift will
be sent when the function button is pressed. When the target gear on the
screen stops flashing, it indicates that the downshift is achieved.
Shifting can be achieved only when the vehicle's operating environment
meets the shifting needs.
Engage an appropriate gear from neutral
When the vehicle is running and the transmission is in neutral position, it is
possible to shift to an appropriate gear via the lever.
Shift to the higher best gear:
Push the lever forward, and the shifting process is completed when the
driver‟s screen displays the target gear and stops flashing.
Shift to the lower best gear:
Push the lever backward, and the shifting process is completed when the
driver‟s screen displays the target gear and stops flashing.
206
SmartShift® AMT
Decelerate to stop
Please depress the brake pedal ① when stopping. When releasing the
brake pedal, the control system will downshift automatically. After stopping
the vehicle stably, pull up the parking brake. The vehicle will still be in the
gear after stopping, will stay at the gear for 90 s and then will return to the
neutral automatically if there is no other action. Depress the brake pedal and
then pull up the parking brake.
Engage N 1
If parking the vehicle for a long time, please switch the transmission to N so
as to protect the clutch. Press the Neutral button ②（the circle button N on
the right side of the level）, and when the screen displays the Neutral symbol
N, it indicates that the transmission is in neutral.
Note
○
i When the temperature is below -15℃, the transmission should
2
be in neutral. Start the engine and run it at the idle speed for a
short time until the engine runs smoothly; or drive the vehicle
under partial load to help the transmission reach the normal
operating temperature.
207
SmartShift® AMT
Engage R
The vehicle can be switched from N to R only when the vehicle is stopped.
2 To reverse the vehicle, please follow the following steps:
1
-First of all, switch the transmission to N.
-Press the function button ①（the circle button on the left of the lever）and
push the lever ② backward. When the target gear on the screen stops
flashing, it indicates that the upshift is achieved. Pushing the lever ②
backward once is to reverse at 1st gear. If you need to reverse at other gears,
the shifting method is same as manual shifting.
-Release the brake pedal ③ and parking brake, and depress the accelerator
pedal ④ gently to start reversing.
3 4
208
SmartShift® AMT
Crawl mode（C）
Under some special conditions, the vehicle needs to run at a low speed.
SINOTRUK SmartShift provides a crawl mode to improve the AMT's 2
1
performance. Crawl mode（C）sets the starting gear（engage the starting gear
from neutral in the parking state）at 1st gear, and the starting gears can be
switched from 1 to 4 via the lever.
During the driving period, it is only allowed to switch between 1 and 4 in

5
manual mode or automatic mode, and that is, the maximum gear is limited
to 4 in the crawl mode. If driving at a gear above 4, the control system will
not permit the crawl mode.
Pressing the button ⑤ on the lever will activate the crawl mode, and
pressing the button ⑤ again will deactivate the crawl mode,
The crawl mode is available in the parking state or when the vehicle runs at
1-4 position. When selecting the crawl mode in the parking state, the control
system will automatically switch to 1st gear.
3 4
209
SmartShift® AMT
Economic / power mode（E/P）
Economic / power mode is available only when the transmission is in

6 automatic mode and is unavailable in manual mode. Press the button ⑥ to
switch between economy/power modes;
Economic（E）mode: The control system will select the appropriate gear to

keep the engine running in the most economical area with the best fuel
economy.
Power（P）mode: The control system will select the appropriate gear to

maximize the power of the vehicle.
The driver can press the button ⑥ on the lever to switch between
economy/power modes. The vehicle's current operating mode will be
displayed on the instrument in real time. The default mode is economic（E）
mode. pressing the button ⑥ once will switch to power（P）mode, and
pressing the button again will return to economic mode.
The driver can switch between economic / power modes at any time.
210
SmartShift® AMT
Operation of PTO
Directly press the PTO switch on the instrument, and after the gear is
engaged, the screen will display the working PTO. PTO can be engaged
only when the vehicle is parked, and cannot be engaged during driving. To
achieve the driving power, make sure to park the vehicle, engage the PTO
7
and then drive the vehicle.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine
The driver must complete the following operations before stopping the
engine with the ignition switch:
-Apply the parking brake.
-Return the transmission to neutral. The transmission will fully return to

neutral until the driver‟s screen displays（N）.
-Stop the engine.
211
SmartShift® AMT
WARNING
-If parking the vehicle for a long time, set the transmission knob at "N" and apply the parking brake.
-If the engine is stopped directly on the gear and the transmission fails to return to neutral due to insufficient air
pressure, the engine may not be started smoothly.
-To ensure the next normal start of the engine, make sure to engage the neutral before stopping the vehicle!
Keep the pressure in the air line not less than 0.65MPa so as to ensure the normal use of all functions of the AMT
system.
-If the air line of the vehicle leaks, the residual air pressure in the air line cannot ensure the clutch action and the
correct shift operation for a long time. in this case, the driver must move the vehicle to a safe area for maintenance
（the vehicle cannot be started again）!
-If a transmission alarm or failure sign is displayed on the instrument, do not start the vehicle before
troubleshooting it.
If the current engine speed is lower than the engine idle speed, the clutch may be disengaged automatically.
Therefore, never run the engine below its idle speed.
212
SmartShift® AMT
Operating temperature operating inclination angle exceeds 15 degrees（the operating
The maximum temperature of the transmission during inclination angle is equal to the installation angle of the
continuous operation may not exceed 120°C and the minimum transmission on the chassis plus the angle of the ramp）.
temperature may not be less than -40°C. When the operating Towing or coasting
temperatures is above 120°C, l the lubricant will be When it is necessary to tow the vehicle, the half shaft can be
decomposed, and the service life of the transmission will be pulled out or the drive shaft is disengaged, or the vehicle is
shortened. towed with the drive wheels above the ground.
Any of the following conditions can cause the transmission to Note
operate at the temperature above 120°C:
-Operate continuously at the driving speed <32km/h.
○
i -Regularly check the wire harness connection, oil
and air pipe connections for leakage, looseness,
-The engine speed is high. etc.
-Ambient temperature is high. -The transmission within the “Repair, refund,
-There is an eddy current around the transmission. replacement” period cannot be disassembled or
-The exhaust system is close to the transmission. assembled without permission.
-Overspeed operation at high power.
Operating inclination angle

Lubrication may not be sufficient when the transmission's
213
Retarder
Retarder  If your vehicle is equipped with the engine exhaust brake, it
The retarder is an auxiliary brake for the vehicle and can be can work together with the retarder.
used to decelerate when the vehicle is driving at a high speed or WARNING
to control the speed during continuous downhill driving. The -Before and during a downhill, ensure that the
retarder is controlled by the right combination switch on the engine speed is not less than 1600 rpm and the
steering column. After the retarder is activated, the retarder clutch can be depressed quickly only when
shifting. Do not run the engine at its idle speed or
work symbol is displayed on the driver's display. When
depress the clutch during a downhill, otherwise
the retarder fails, the retarder alarm symbol lights up the sufficient cooling of the engine coolant cannot
（yellow or red）. be guaranteed.
 When necessary, the transmission should downshift for one
 The retarder mainly includes the following two types:
gear to increase the engine speed, thereby increasing the pump
- ZF-Intarder（integrated with ZF transmission）;
flow and heat dissipation.
- SmartShift AMT optional retarder.
If the coolant temperature reaches the maximum allowable
 If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS or EBS braking
temperature, the retarder ECU will automatically adjust
system, the retarder brake will be affected or interrupted when
the retarder braking torque to the maximum allowable
the ABS/EBS system functions. Once the ABS or EBS stops,
value （ the retarder will reduce the braking torque
the retarder will return to its operating mode before
interruption. automatically）.
ABS = anti-lock braking system The driver should take into account the decrease of the retarder
EBS = electronically controlled braking system performance and change the driving style accordingly（change
 Using the retarder will not affect the operation of the the drive gear and enable the engine exhaust brake or service
transmission. When the clutch is disengaged（for shifting）, the brake）.
retarder's braking torque will remain unchanged.
214
Retarder
WARNING It is forbidden to use the retarder when the

transmission is in neutral.
There is a danger of slipping on the slippery
road to use the retarder! If the retarder is used, The retarder function is automatically turned off
gears should be shifted one by one. In case of when ABS is active.
bad road conditions, the retarder function
If you want to park, apply the service brake.
should be turned off.
When the retarder fails, the exhaust brake and the
Be careful to use the retarder when the vehicle
service brake should be used to control the speed of
is running unladen.
the vehicle.
The retarder is an auxiliary brake device. In
The retarder brake function does not replace the
case of emergency, please use the service brake
parking brake. Apply the parking brake before
to decelerate.
leaving the vehicle.
At lower temperatures, the brake effect will be
If the coolant is insufficient, do not start, otherwise
delayed when the retarder is used for the first
the retarder and gearbox may be damaged. The
time after the vehicle starts. If necessary, apply
recommended coolant shall be added to the specified
the service brake.
level.
215
Retarder
Operation instructions
The right combination switch is the retarder operating handle.
0 position: disenable the retarder
1 position: downhill constant speed function, adjust the braking torque along
with the vehicle speed automatically
2-6 position: manually set the retarder brake
 1 position（downhill constant speed function）
（Downhill constant speed function depends on the vehicle configuration）
This function can be used to keep the vehicle at a constant speed during
downhill（the speed can be set as needed）. The retarder ECU automatically
sets the braking torque required for constant speed operation.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the downhill constant speed

function will be interrupted automatically; when the accelerator pedal is
released, the current speed will be set to the speed after the constant speed
function is enabled again.
216
Retarder
Enable 1 position（downhill constant speed function）
Set the retarder lever at 1 position

Cancel 1 position（downhill constant speed function）
-Depress the accelerator pedal when the retarder is in 1 position（after the
accelerator pedal is released, the downhill constant speed function will be
enabled again and set at the current speed）.
or:
-Shift the retarder lever to 0 or 2-6 position（brake mode）.
If the braking force required for the vehicle downhill is greater than the
maximum braking force of the retarder, apply the engine exhaust brake and
the service brake simultaneously.
If the current speed is less than the set speed, the retarder will not work.
Once the speed reaches the set value, the retarder will start working.
Note
○
i The retarder can be used simultaneously with the engine
exhaust brake. If only a small braking force is required, it is
recommended to use the hydraulic retarder first.
217
Retarder
 2-6 position
A different fixed braking torque is set at 2-6 position, and the braking force
increases from 2 to 6 position in turns.
Enable 2-6 position
Turn the retarder lever at the desired 2-6 position.
Disable 2-6 position
Turn the retarder lever to 0 or 1 position（downhill constant speed function）.
If the braking force required by the vehicle is greater than the maximum
braking force of the retarder, apply the engine exhaust brake and the service
brake simultaneously.
218
Differential lock
Differential lock
Differential lock – rear axle inter-wheel differential lock
Before entering a poor or muddy road, the differential lock can be used for a short time
in order to prevent one-sided tire on the rear axle for slipping. When engaging the
differential lock, the vehicle should be at a standstill or run slowly in a straight line.
WARNING
-When the differential lock is used, the adjustment function of the wheel
anti-lock braking system will be delayed for a period of time. The wheel
may be locked for a short time before the adjustment by the wheel
anti-lock braking system. Steering capacity and directional stability are
limited.
-When the differential lock functions, the vehicle steering ability will be
affected. Since there is no differential function between left and right
wheels on the same axle, it is not allowed to drive in a curve on a solid
road. When the vehicle runs on a solid road, the differential lock should
be released immediately.
219
Differential lock
Inter-wheel differential lock engagement - 4×2, 6×2 vehicle

 Release the accelerator pedal（deceleration）.
1
 Press the bottom part of inter-wheel differential switch ①.
After the inter-wheel differential lock is engaged, the inter-wheel differential
lock indicator on the Instrument panel will come on.
 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal and then accelerate slowly.
Disengage the differential lock
 Release the accelerator pedal and depress the clutch pedal.
 Press the upper part of inter-wheel differential switch ①.
After disengaging the inter-wheel differential lock, the inter-wheel
differential lock indicator on the Instrument panel will go out.
WARNING
-The differential lock should be engaged only when the
vehicle is at a standstill or runs at a low speed（equivalent to
the human walking speed）in a straight line.
-When the inter-wheel differential lock indicator comes on,
the vehicle cannot turn and run at a high speed.
220
Differential lock
Inter-wheel differential lock - 6×4, 6×6 and 8×4 and other vehicles
Differential lock engagement principle: First engage the inter-wheel 1

differential lock, and then engage the inter-wheel differential lock.
 Engage the inter-axle differential lock（see “Engagement of inter-axle
differential lock” for more details）.
 Press the bottom part of the inter-wheel differential switch ①.
After the inter-wheel differential lock is engaged, the inter-wheel differential

 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal and accelerate slowly.
 Press the upper part of the inter-wheel differential switch ①.
After disengaging the inter-wheel differential lock, the inter-wheel

221
Differential lock
Inter-axle differential lock

Inter-axle differential lock: it is used to lock the inter-axle differential
2
between the first and second drive axles.
Engagement of inter-axle differential lock
 Press the bottom part of the inter-axle differential switch ②.
After the inter-axle differential lock is engaged, the inter-axle differential

 Press the upper part of the inter-axle differential switch ②.
After the inter-axle differential lock is disengaged, the axis inter-axle

WARNING
-The differential lock can be engaged only when the vehicle is
at a standstill or runs at a low speed（equivalent to the human
walking speed）.
-When the inter-axis differential lock indicator is on, the
vehicle cannot turn and travel at a high speed.
222
Air suspension
Air suspension
Overview of air suspension system
Air suspension airbags are filled with compressed air, and the airbag
inflation/deflation is controlled by the control system, thus achieving the
vehicle load and height adjustment.
Air suspension structure characteristic:
-Adjustable height, easy towing and goods loading/unloading;
-Fore vehicle models equipped with the lift shaft, the lift shaft can be raised
in no-load or light-load conditions;
-Real-time monitoring of load on each axle.
223
Air suspension
Electrically Controlled Air Suspension（ECAS）
Electrically controlled air suspension is the suspension system which fulfills

the suspension height adjustment, lift shaft raising/lowering, load transfer
and other functions by virtue of remote control or rocker switch on the
dashboard.
224
Air suspension
Description about remote control buttons
Note:
○
i -For front axle of non-air suspension structure, the airbag lift
button will not function;
-If the intermediate（rear）axle is not a lift shaft, the lift button
will not function;
-Due to the particularity of the lift shaft, the front and rear
axle control will be deactivated automatically if the lift shaft
control is activated; similarly, the lift shaft control will be
deactivated automatically if the front or rear axle control is
activated;
-When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain limit（30km/h）, it is
not allowed to adjust the vehicle height via the remote control,
except when the normal height is recovered.
225
Air suspension
Vehicle height adjustment
 Click the rear axle support airbag control activation button, the rear axle
support airbag control indicator will come on and the height lift state will be
activated.
 Click the axle support airbag control activation button again, the rear axle
support airbag control indicator will go out, and the height lift state will be
deactivated.
226
Air suspension
Adjust the vehicle height
 Press and hold "UP" or "DOWN" button, the vehicle height can be raised
or lowered, during which the vehicle height adjustment will stop after the
button is released.
Maximum height: maximum allowable setting value;
Normal height: default value under normal driving;
Minimum height: minimum allowable setting value.
Note:
The remote control can be operated only within the allowable height range.
227
Air suspension
Save the memory height
 Press "UP" or "DOWN" button, adjust the vehicle to the desired height,
release the button and press "STOP"+ "M1/M2" button for height memory.
Use the height memory
 Press "M1"/"M2" key, the air bag will be deflated automatically and
adjusted to the memory height.
228
Air suspension
Recover the vehicle's normal height
 Press the "Normal height" button, and the vehicle automatically will
recover to the set normal height.
"STOP" button
 Pressing the "STOP" button can immediately stop all operations（including
height adjustment, raising, lowering, axle lifting, etc.）and the frame will
remain at the height when the button is pressed.
229
Air suspension
Axle lifting
 Click the lift airbag control activation button, the lifting airbag control
indicator will come on and the lifting state will be activated;
 Click the lift airbag control activation button again, the lifting airbag
control indicator will go out and the lifting state will be deactivated;
230
Air suspension
 When the lifting airbag control is activated, click "UP" or "DOWN" button
to control the raising and lowering of the lift shaft
Note:
When the lifting airbag control is activated, "Memory button" and "Normal
height button" will not function.
When the lift shaft is raised, the automatic lowering should be activated in
the following conditions:
-Drive axle under full load. To protect the safety of the drive axle and
vehicle, the lift shaft will be automatically lowered onto the support;
-ECAS system is faulty. In the event of a system failure, the lift shaft will be
lowered automatically to avoid unknown risks.
In both cases, it is impossible to lift the axle.
231
Air suspension
Cab rocker switch

4×2 and 6×4 vehicle models（single axle with four airbags, double axles
with eight airbags）are provided with three-height selector switch ① and
1 2
ECAS fault warning light ②;
6×2 vehicle models with lift shafts are provided with three-height selector
switch ① , airbag control switch on the intermediate/rear axle ③ ,
3 4 three-mode selector switch ④ , ECAS fault warning light ② and the

5
intermediate/rear axle lifting airbag control indicator ⑤.
ECAS fault warning light

In the event of ECAS fault, ECAS fault warning light will come on. In this
case, the vehicle should be stopped immediately for inspection. If the
vehicle can be driven, drive it slowly to the place that does not obstruct the
traffic, and immediately request the help from SINOTRUK service station.
232
Air suspension
Intermediate/rear axle lift airbag control indicator

When the intermediate/rear axle lift airbag control indicator on the
dashboard comes on, it indicates that the lift shaft is in a raised position.
Intermediate/rear axle lift airbag control switch （ three-gear

self-resetting type）
If the vehicle is provided with the intermediate/rear axle lift airbag control
switch, the switch can be used to control the lift shaft. This switch function
is the same as the lift control on the remote control（available for some
remote controls）.
The lift shaft has only two states: up and down. After pressing the lift shaft
switch（or operation on remote control）, the lift shaft will automatically
inflate and deflate to the appropriate position. The lift shaft cannot stay in
the middle of any position.
After pushing upward the intermediate/rear axle lift airbag control switch,
the lift indicator will come on and the axle will be lifted; after pushing
downward the switch, the lift indicator will go out and the lift shaft will be
lowered.
233
Air suspension
Three-height selector switch（three-gear switch）

When the switch is in the middle position, the frame will stay at a normal
height;
Click the upper part of the switch, and the frame will be raised by 25mm
over the normal height;
Click the lower part of the switch, the frame will be lowered by 25mm over
the normal height.
Three-mode selector switch（three-gear switch - self-reset）
When the switch is in 0 position, ECAS control mode is the proportional
control;
Press the lower part of the switch to activate the optimal traction mode. At
this time, the load on the support axle（lift shaft）will be transferred to the
drive axle so that the load on the drive axle reaches the standard load,
improving the drive force of the vehicle.
Press the upper part of the switch（self-reset）to activate the drive assist
mode. When this function is activated, the load on the lift shaft will be
transferred to the drive axle until the drive axle reaches its maximum load,
maximizing the vehicle's drive force.
When the speed is not less than 30km/h, the driving assistance mode will
automatically turn off and resume to the proportional control mode.
When the speed is less than 30km/h, pressing and holding the upper part of
the switch for more than 5 s or turning off the master power switch can
manually deactivate the drive assist mode after activating the drive assist
mode.
The optimal traction mode is free from the speed limit.
234
Air suspension
Precautions for vehicle models with the lifting function of the three-mode selector switch at 0 position）. In this way, the
air suspension: vehicle axle load distribution will maintain the original set
-The total mass of the vehicle train should comply with the value, so as to avoid any unnecessary trouble due to the sharp
relevant laws and regulations. difference between intermediate axle and rear axle at the time
-Vehicles with a lift shaft are of single-axle drive, so the drive of vehicle weighing.
axle tires have more wear than non-drive axle tires. Drive tires -The drive assist mode（click the upper part of the three-mode
should be those with the drive pattern. selector switch）should be activated in advance before starting
-When the vehicle is under no-load and light-load, the lift shaft
the vehicle or climbing a slope. This maximizes the loading
should be lifted if possible. This can effectively avoid the drive
ability of the drive axle and the driving and climbing ability of
wheel slipping, lack of climbing ability and other problems of
the vehicle, effectively avoiding the slippage of the drive
the vehicle, and effectively reduce the wear of the lift shaft
wheels and prolonging the service life of the tires.
tires.
-When the vehicle is running on a slippery, rainy or snowy road,
-In the event of high vehicle load, if the lift shaft cannot be
it is not advisable to raise the lift shaft and activate the drive
lifted, the optimal traction mode can be activated（set the
assist function so as to improve the steering stability of the
three-mode selector switch at its lower position）so that the vehicle and prevent skidding.
drive axle can maintain the standard load, avoiding the drive -To protect the drive axle tires, operation for starting the
wheel skidding, lack of vehicle climbing ability and other vehicle should be gentle. Never depress the accelerator pedal
problems. It is recommended to use the optimal traction mode violently.
when the vehicle is under full load. -When the frame height is low, the clearance between the tire
-When the vehicle is about to enter the toll booth, the and the fender will small. If the tire pattern contains sand and
proportional control mode should be activated in advance（set
235
Air suspension
gravel, etc., the fender may be damaged. Therefore, before -After the support axle（and steering support axle）is lifted or
starting the vehicle, check whether there is an adequate the drive assist function is activated, the vehicle braking and
clearance between the tire and the fender. If the clearance is not steering performance may be changed due to the large load
adequate, the frame should be raised to appropriately 40mm transfer of the vehicle axle. Always drive the vehicle with
below the maximum height. The frame should be restored to its ATTENTION.
normal height after running at the speed of no more than -During the vehicle loading or unloading period, the vehicle
50km/h for a period of time. load will be changed sharply. Do not activate the drive assist
-If the tire is equipped with snow chains, the height of the and optimal traction functions at this time so as to prevent the
frame should be raised properly to ensure that the snow chains frame from sudden raising or lowering.
will not damage the mudguards. -For vehicles that mostly run in mountainous areas, the drive
-When the frame deviates from the default normal height, the assist function will be deactivated automatically at the speed of
travel of the suspension will be affected. When the vehicle runs 55km/h so as to obtain the optimal traction performance.
at the highest or lowest position for a long time, the frame, Therefore, for vehicles that run in such areas, the drive axle is
suspension, transmission, etc. may be damaged, and also the more frequently under overload than in other areas, and the
fender may be damaged. Therefore, drive the vehicle at the service life of the drive axle and driving wheel will be affected
normal frame height if not necessary. to a certain extent.
-When the airbag failure causes the insufficient pressure in the
airbag, stop the vehicle immediately and contact SINOTRUK
service station.
236
Fifth-wheel
Fifth-wheel
3 1
C7H series semi-trailer tractor models are equipped with 50 or 90
fifth-wheel.
Opening
As shown in the figure: Rotate the bolt stopper ① upward to the horizontal
position, and rotate the handle ② forward to lock the quadrilateral slot on
the front side of the rectangular slot on the fifth-wheel plate.
Inspection after connecting the trailer:
Make sure the bolt stopper ① has been returned to the state as shown in the 2
figure and the warning hole ③ is near the outside of the fifth-wheel plate,
and then the fifth-wheel should be locked securely.
If the bolt stopper ① does not fall to the locked position or the warning hole
③ is away from the outside of the fifth-wheel plate, check whether the
fifth-wheel is locked.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the operation requirements.
237
Fifth-wheel
Fifth-wheel maintenance
Grease: Useheavy duty grease （ high pressure grease containing
molybdenum disulfide（MoS2）or graphite）.
WARNING
When the fifth-wheel is used for the first time, it should be
applied with grease, otherwise its service life may be affected
severely!
Rules for regular inspection and maintenance:
8,000km 16,000km 24,000km 32,000km

Maintenance intervals
4weeks 8weeks 12weeks 16weeks
Clean Remove grease in order to be able to visual inspection ★ ★ ★ ★
Damage inspection Check for damage, bend, leaks or cracks, etc. ★ ★ ★ ★
Function inspection ★ ★ ★ ★
Wear inspection See figure ★

Torque inspection See figure ★ ★ ★ ★
Clearance adjustment See figure adjusting steps ★
Fill the grease See figure ★ ★ ★ ★
238
Fifth-wheel
Mechanism clearance adjustment:
 Check that there is no impurity at the tractor fifth-wheel neck and traction
pin, then connect the tractor, and mount the traction pin against the wear
ring, without any clearance.
 Loosen the locknut（Fig. 1）.
 Unscrew the adjusting screw（Fig. 2）.
 Tap the handle gently in the A direction（do not pull out the handle）.
 Rotate the adjusting screw（Fig. 3）until the handle begins to move.
 Then continue to screw in for 1.5 circles.
 Fasten the lock nut（Fig. 4）.
If the above method fails to eliminate the clearance, replace the wear ring,
lock hook or pull pin.
239
Semi-trailer operation
Semi-trailer operation semitrailer, and replace it when necessary.

-Avoid any damage to the wire due to heating!
General rules for semi-trailer operation
-When the moisture, dust or sand enters the trailer
Semi-trailer tractor is equipped with dual-pipe braking system.
WARNING socket, especially ABS socket（always under 24V
-When connecting the semitrailer or operating voltage）, it can easily cause the connection corrosion.
the fifth-wheel for the first time, check the A considerable heat will be generated under load,
signboard on the side of the fifth-wheel carefully. which may damage the connectors and cables.
-When the tractor reverses toward the Therefore, the socket and plug should be blown dry
semi-trailer, nobody is allowed to stand between regularly with compressed air and should be cleaned
the tractor and the semi-trailer. with anti-abrasive cloth when necessary.
-After connecting the semi-trailer, check the -Check the socket regularly, and in the event of
handle position to confirm that the fifth-wheel is damage, go to SINOTRUK service station for
engaged properly. replacement immediately.
-If a variety of semi-trailers are used, make sure Clean the tractor and semi-trailer sockets
to check the clearance between the center pin and The tractor and semi-trailer sockets cannot be cleaned with
fifth-wheel. water and mechanical articles. It should be cleaned with 6~8
-The damaged air connection may cause the bar compressed air.
failure of the trailer braking system. Make sure to During cleaning, turn off the ignition switch and the lighting
check the air connection between tractor and system.
240
Connect the semi-trailer

 Fix the semi-trailer to prevent slip.
 Lift the handle of the fifth-wheel so that the handle enters the upper long
hole and then pull it out until the locating groove on the handle catches the
fifth-wheel housing. At this time, the fifth-wheel is in the open state ready
for coupling.
 For reverse connecting, after the traction pin is inserted into the
fifth-wheel connector, the locking hook and the wedge block will
automatically lock the traction pin, and then the handle will automatically
return to its position, indicating that the connection is completed properly.
WARNING
When the tractor is connected to the semi-trailer, make sure
to check that the fifth-wheel lock handle is locked properly.
-Connect the brake pipe and electrical connector between the semitrailer and
tractor. Connect the compressed air pipe, make sure that the pipes and wires
will not be involved with tension, friction or winding.
-First connect the control pipe connector（yellow）and then connect the air
pipe connector（red）.
-Check whether the function is normal.
241
Disengage the semi-trailer

 Check the road conditions to prevent the semi-trailer from slip.
 Fix the semi-trailer so that the wheels cannot move.
 Disconnect the brake pipe and electrical connection between the tractor and
semitrailer. The following sequence should be strictly observed: First disconnect
the inflatable pipe connector（red）, and then disconnect the brake control pipe
（yellow）, otherwise the trailer braking will be disabled.
 Pull out the fifth-wheel handle ① until its locating groove catches the
fifth-wheel housing. At this time, the wedge block ② will be disconnected from
the lock hook ③. When the tractor is moved forward, the lock hook ③ will be
rotated to loosen the traction pin and to disconnect the trailer.
Note:
If no trailer is connected for a long time, please reset the
fifth-wheel handle ①.
1 WARNING
- Make sure to disconnect the pipe air connector in the correct
sequence. Otherwise, the semitrailer braking will be released,
3 2 which may cause rolling.
-Cover the connector after disconnecting the pipe air connector so
as to avoid contamination.
242
Tire spacing
Make sure there is an adequate tire spacing!
WARNING
- Danger of damage to the vehicle!
-There is a strict limit on the distance between the
semi-trailer and tractor!
-The tractor and trailer mobility is limited!
-When driving on puddles, slopes or muddy roads, there is a
risk of serious damage to the tractor and semitrailer.
WARNING!
-Danger of damage to the vehicle!
- When the vehicle is lowered in height, it can only run a short
distance at the human walking speed, see "Maintenance in
winter " and "Operation of semi-trailer". Otherwise the
fenders and tires may be damaged.
243
Chapter 4 Practical advices
244
Replace the tire
Replace the tire - Vehicle condition

The toe-in of front wheel should be regularly checked and
Tire operation and maintenance
adjusted, otherwise tire wear and early damage may occur.
- Air pressure
The inflated tire should be checked for air leakage at various Do not use the rusty rim or non-conforming rims（which may
parts, and any leakage should be immediately repaired. cause stop wear）.
A normal tire pressure should be maintained in the course of Passing the curbsides can cause internal damage to the tire（tire
operation. body damage）that cannot be seen on the outside, the tire
Tire pressure should be checked regularly when working for a explosion and even serious accidents. Try to avoid passing
long time. When parking for a long time under full load, the curbsides and, if unavoidable, pass them at a speed as low as
front and rear axles must be raised. possible（below the human walking speed）at the angle of 90
High pressure is prone to causing wear or explosion at the top degrees.
of the tire; low pressure is prone to causing deformation or - Pattern
damage of the tire. Longitudinal pattern features little resistance and fast speed,
When two tires are installed together, they should have the suitable for cement, asphalt and other hard pavements.
same pressure. Lateral pattern features strong adhesion and good climbing
-Speed performance.
Tires vary from different speed level limits. Overspeeding can The mixed pattern is combined with the characteristics of the
cause early damage to the tire. Do not drive quickly on poor road longitudinal pattern, suitable for asphalt, concrete and other
conditions, and try to avoid sudden braking and sharp turn. pavements.
Tire is prone to temperature rise at a high driving speed. Once Off-road pattern is suitable for poor road conditions.
the temperature is high, measures should be taken timely to The tire cannot be used when its tread is worn to the wear sign.
prevent the explosion of the tire.
245
Replace the tire
-Load -Wheel rotation

Vehicle load should comply with the existing national standards, Tires should be rotated regularly. Generally, a truck should be
and overload is forbidden. done with tire rotation every 5,000 km.
Goods on the vehicle should be evenly distributed to avoid - Tubeless tire
unbalanced loading. Tubeless tires for steering wheel and drive wheel. Steering
Serious overload can cause abnormal wear on the tread, wheel features good steering, and drive wheel features good
shoulder cavity, delamination, stop bursting, etc. adhesion. Therefore, drive wheel tires cannot be used on
High-level and high-load tires is unsuitable for high speed steering wheel!
running. The spare tire should be a steering wheel tire.
The reinforced tires can be increased with load appropriately - Change the tire size
according to design standards. Only use the wheel and tire sizes designated for this series of
-Assemble models.
Tires should be assembled on the designated models and rims, If it is necessary to change the tire size, go to SINOTRUK
and should be installed and removed with special tools and service station to refresh the vehicle control unit CBCU, engine
equipment. No prying or hitting is allowed. ECU and tachograph, otherwise the tachograph accuracy may
The same axle should be equipped with the tire of the same size, be affected.
structure, pattern and level. - Basic requirement
Oblique tires and radial tires cannot be mixed. Due to the sun exposure and environmental factors, the tire will
When assembling the patterned tires, the rotation direction of gradually age, the rubber in the tire will lose its elasticity, and
the tire shall be the same as the driving direction of the vehicle. the tire will harden and become brittle and begin to crack.
Anti-skid chains should be installed symmetrically, and should Therefore, the tires should be replaced timely according to their
be removed immediately when not in use. use and wear conditions.
246
Replace the tire
Replace the tire

ATTENTION!
Turn off the ignition switch before replacing the spare tire.
 When replacing the spare tire on the road, for your safety, make sure to
comply with local traffic laws（such as placing a warning triangle, etc.）and
make sure that the vehicle cannot move.
 Remove the wheel fixing nuts, leaving three uniformly distributed nuts.
 Place the jack at the point of support designed on one side of the vehicle
and ensure that it will not slip.
According to the relevant provisions, jacks should be inspected by
professionals（at a professional service center）at least once a year.
 Jack up the vehicle, and ensure a solid ground.
 After confirming that the wheel to be replaced can move freely on the
wheel bolt, loosen the left three wheel nuts.
 Remove the wheel, and be careful not to damage the thread.
 Before installing the spare tire, remove the rust and dirt on the contact
surfaces of the brake drum, rim, nut and bolt. Wipe clean the wheel
alignment hole and the outer circle on the wheel rim and apply a appropriate
amount of grease.
247
Replace the tire
 Install the spare tire（the tire inflation pressure should comply with the
provisions）, and be careful not to damage the thread.

 Tighten the nut by hand, and tighten the nut diagonally until it stops.
 Lower the jack, lower the wheel and tighten the nuts at the torque of
550～600 Nm.
 After the vehicle runs for about 50 km, retighten the nuts and check
whether they reach the specified tightening torque on a daily basis, and
tighten them again when necessary.
Tire inflation
The tire can be inflated with an inflation fitting mounted on the air dryer as
follows:
 Remove the connection dust cover ①.
1  Connect one end of the tire inflation hose to the tire valve.
 Screw the other end of the tire inflation hose onto the inflation fitting on
the air dryer.
 Speed up the engine.
 Check the tire pressure, and adjusted as needed.
248
Towing and towing start
When towing the vehicle, turn on the hazard warning lights on

the towing vehicle and the malfunctioning vehicle.
Overview
General requirements
For purpose of towing and towing start, the vehicle is equipped
 Follow the instructions in "Electrical system".
with a towing hook for self-help. There are two threaded
mounting holes for the towing hook on the frame chassis（under
 If possible, keep the engine running and make the braking
the towing hook plug）. The towing hook is usually placed in
system and auxiliary power steering system available.
the storage box on the driver's side, and should be completely
 If the vehicle is equipped with a steering/starting lock, turn
screwed into the threaded mounting hole when using it. If there
are two threaded mounting holes for the towing hook on the the key to the "II" position - do not pull it out.
front towing beam, two towing hooks should be equipped to  Set the transmission in neutral.
ensure that the towing force should be in the center when  Use a rigid drawbar and do not use a rope or cable.
towing the vehicle, so as to avoid deformation of the frame in  If the air suspension fails, tow the vehicle slowly.
the course of one-sided towing.
 If the vehicle is trapped, do not swing the vehicle side to side
When towing a vehicle on a muddy and soft ground, it should, or pull it in an inclined way. And in particular, do not pull it on
first of all, be unloaded. If unloading is not possible due to one side.
technical or practical reasons, select as many points of force on
 If the steering system is damaged, raise the front axle.
the vehicle as possible（the points on the axle are preferred）.
249
Towing preparation
Before towing, the drive shaft of the vehicle to be towed should be
disconnected so as to cut off the power transmission.
WARNING
- At the absence of hydraulics, Attempting to turn a stationary
vehicle may cause damage to the steering system!
- Turning at the absence of hydraulics can be performed only
when the vehicle is moving.
- If the engine is stopped, a greater force needs to be exerted on
the steering wheel due to the hydraulic assist failure, and the
vehicle should be towed slowly.
- If the spring braking is enabled due to the insufficient air
pressured in the braking system, the spring braking can be
released via external compressed air（at least 5.5 bar）or
mechanical means. See "Spring-loaded brake chamber -
Emergency release". It should be noted that the vehicle has no
braking from then on!
250
Towing in the event of axle damage

WARNING
- Turn on the ignition switch if the vehicle is raised.
- Turn the ignition switch set to "0" position.
Front axle
 Tow the vehicle with special transport equipment or after raising the front
axle.
 If the front of the vehicle is raised, disconnect the drive shaft of rear axle.
 The four-axle vehicle can only be raised at the front.
Rear axle
Tow the vehicle with a dedicated transport equipment or after raising rear
axle.
WARNING
- If the conditions are not satisfied, disconnect the drive shaft
or remove the half shaft at the rear axle flange.
- If the transmission is suspected to be damaged, disconnect
the drive shaft or remove the half shaft at the rear axle
flange.
251
Tow the vehicle with a drawbar

A driver should be available for turning and braking of the towed vehicle.
•Start the engine.
•Inflate the braking system until the unloading pressure of the air dryer is
reached.
•Set the transmission in neutral of high range.
•Disconnect the transfer case.
•Release the parking brake.
•Slowly tow the vehicle.
Note:
•The tow distance cannot exceed 100 km.
•The maximum allowable trailer speed should be based on the axle ratio and
the tire size as shown in the figure（for example, axle ratio iaxle=6, tire
rolling radius R = 0.5 m, and maximum allowable trailer speed: Vmax= 25
km/h ）.
After towing
•Stop the engine.
•Apply the parking brake, and when necessary, block the wheel with a
wedge so as to prevent vehicle rolling.
252
Jump Start/Auxiliary Start
Jump Start/Auxiliary Start

If the engine cannot be started due to the battery power lack, another battery
can be used to start the engine. Before using auxiliary equipment, you must
refer to the operating instructions. Only use the jumpers with sufficient
cross-section.
①Battery that provides jump start ② Battery that needs jump start
Connect the positive and negative terminals（engine off）
 Connect the positive terminal.
 Connect the negative terminal of the charged battery to the grounding
point on the transmission or engine.
WARNING
 It is also possible to start the jumper across the jumper with the main power -Only use the standard jumpers.
switch. Disconnect the main power switch and connect the negative terminals -Follow the operation instructions for
jumpers.
of both batteries, and the switch should be closed after the connection is -Only use the batteries of the same
completed. rated voltage（24 V）.
 Start the engine that provides jump start. -Do not use a charger or jumper
starter for auxiliary start-up.
 Start and run the engine that needs jump start, maximum 15 s.
-Do not connect the grounding point to
Disconnect the positive and negative terminals the frame!
 The disconnecting sequence is opposite to the connection sequence.
253
Spring-loaded brake chamber - Emergency release

2 1
When the parking brake circuit pressure is lower than about 5.5 bar, the air
pressure acting on the brake chamber diaphragm will be less than the spring
force and the spring braking will function.
At the same time, "STOP", braking system fault light ① and parking brake
light ② will come on. In the case of emergency or at a service station, the
spring-loaded brake chamber can be released via pneumatic or mechanical
means.
WARNING
- Make sure that the vehicle cannot move on its own before
releasing the spring-loaded brake chamber!
- The spring-loaded brake chamber emergency release
devices can only be used to maneuver the vehicle at the
service station or in an emergency.
- After the emergency release of the spring-loaded brake
chamber, the vehicle may cause an accident because the air
pressure in the brake circuit I and circuit II may not be
sufficient to ensure an effective braking!
- Do not operate the vehicle until all information displayed on
the driver’s screen disappears.
254
Spring-loaded brake chamber - Parking brake release
Lift the parking brake valve handle ①, release the handle, and the parking
brake will automatically return to the release position. At the same time, the
indicator on the Instrument panel will go out.
WARNING
- The parking brake can be released completely only when

1
the braking system pressure is higher than 0.55MPa and
after the parking brake signal light goes out.
- Do not start the vehicle until the signal light goes out!
255
Spring-loaded brake chamber - Mechanical emergency release

Diaphragm spring brake chamber
When the air pipe connected to the spring brake chamber gives rise to
self-braking due to leakage, the braking can be released as long as the spring
brake chamber rear bolt ① is unscrewed to the release position.
Double diaphragm spring brake chamber

1 Open the double diaphragm spring brake chamber rear cover ②, insert the
bolt ③ from the rear cover and then screw it out manually, and the parking
brake can be released.

WARNING
- Before releasing the spring brake cylinder, first engage the
1st gear and check whether the service brake（foot brake）
works normally.
- When releasing the spring brake cylinder on a slope, block
the wheel first to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
2
- Never start the vehicle before the parking signal light goes
3 out!
256
Belt
Belt
Check the situation（monthly）
 Tilt the cab, see "Cab tilting mechanism".
 Check the belt ① for crack, oil stain, aging or wear.

1
 In the event of damage, oil stain, aging or wear, contact the SINOTRUK
service station immediately for replacement.
Belt replacement cycle: vehicle running for 2 years or 200,000 km,

whichever comes first.
257
Fuel system
Fuel system
 Check the fuel system condition and tightness.
 Visually check the pipes and their fittings in the fuel system（especially
near the heat source）for damage or corrosion.
 Unscrew the plug ① at fuel outlet on the bottom of the tank, and the
diesel in the fuel tank can be drained fully. Sludge and condensate water in
the tank can be drained here, and at least one blowdown should be
performed every year. This can reduce the risk of the engine failure due to
water entry.
Retightening the fuel tank drawstring
1  Tightening torque of the aluminum alloy tank drawstring is 50±3Nm.

When the vehicle runs for 2,000km, the tank drawstring should be tightened
for the first time, and after that, should be re-tightened every 5000km. In
poor road conditions, the mileage for re-tightening should be shortened.
258
Fuel system
Fuel coarse filter（fuel-water separator）maintenance
 Check the differential pressure indicator ① daily. When the diaphragm
reaches the red area, a new canister should be used.

 Regularly drain the water in the filter.
 Due to the difference in weather, fuel quality, usage and average daily
1
mileage, water drainage may be required on a weekly basis or even a shorter
cycle.
2
Water drainage for filter
 Unscrew the drain valve ② at the bottom of the fuel strainer, drain
the impurities and water and dispose of them properly.

 Tighten the drain valve.
WARNING
If the water filtered by the fuel strainer enters the
engine again, the engine components may be damaged
and water drainage must be performed regularly!
259
Fuel system
Fuel fine filter
When the engine fuel filter ① is blocked, the engine fault alarm indicator
② on the Instrument panel will come on.
260
Fuel system
After pressing the engine diagnostic switch ③ , the engine fault alarm
indicator ② will flash with the code 215.
If the fuel filter is blocked, please replace it with a new one in time.
261
Vehicle LNG supply system

WARNING
- LNG has an extremely low temperature at the atmospheric
pressure: -162°C.
- Natural gas is a suffocating gas.
- Natural gas is a flammable gas.
- Non-professionals are allowed to operate and maintain the
LNG supply system.
LNG vehicle drivers should receive the relevant professional and technical
training to ensure normal use and safe operation.
Valve operation
The operation of LNG cylinders is relatively simple and there are only three
valves to be operated by user for daily normal use:
 The liquid valve ①: normally open, should be closed when a fault occurs;
1 should be slowly opened again to prevent the over-flow valve from cutting
off automatically.
 Pressurized liquid valve ②: normally closed, when the cylinder pressure
放
VENT
空
进液
is low, the pressurized liquid valve should be opened for self-pressurization,
2 and the valve ③ should be opened.

 Vent valve ③: should be opened for pressure relief.
262
LNG filling Note

Conventional filling
Conventional filling is done with a separate filling hose. When
○
i - The pressure in a fully filled cylinder rises
rapidly, which may cause frequent opening of the
safety valve; therefore, a fully filled cylinder
filling, first release the pressure in the cylinder to between 0.6
should be put into operation as soon as possible,
and 0.9MPa, connect the filling gun to the holder, and then start
and should not be stored for a long time.
the refilling switch of the dispenser, and the liquid is injected - When the residual liquid in the cylinder exceeds
from the liquid inlet pipe in the cylinder. When the liquid level 2/3, try to avoid adding liquid.
reaches the rated position, the liquid filling will stop Hot cylinder filling
automatically. Generally, automotive LNG welded and insulated cylinders are
referred to as hot cylinders before they are filled with LNG for
Return gas filling
the first time and when they have out of service for more than
When high pressure in the cylinder causes the difficulty in
two weeks. Filling of hot cylinders should be made according
filling, the return gas filling should be performed. to the following procedure:
 Connect the gas gun to the holder on the cylinder and connect  First of all, fill about 30L of LNG into the cylinder and leave it
the return gas gun to the cylinder's return gas holder. at a standstill. During the vaporization and pressurization of LNG
 Open the vent valve, reduce the cylinder pressure below the in the cylinder, the inner liner of the cylinder will also be cooled.
 When the pressure in the cylinder reaches the normal working
pressure required by the dispenser, and close the vent valve.
pressure, the system's tightness test should have carried out.
 Start the pump for filling, and remove the filling gun and the
 After reducing the pressure by way of venting, follow the
return gas gun until the dispenser stops automatically.
normal filling or return gas filling procedures.
263
Regular maintenance requirements

System maintenance
Maintenance Maintenance
Time interval
 To ensure the normal operation of the vehicle, the system contents method
should be regularly checked for leakage. In the event of any Connect the nuts on Each time before a Visually check for
the cylinder pipe trip leakage
fuel leakage, contact SINOTRUK service station for
Clean the scale on
processing. Vaporizer Every 12 months
the coil
 The pressure of the cylinder involved with vacuum failure Every 7,500km or Check for tightness
Valve
2 months and leakage
will rise rapidly by 0.1~0.4MPa/h appropriately. If there is a Send it to the local
substantial pressure change, contact the SINOTRUK service technical
Safety valve Every 12 months supervision
station for processing immediately. department for
verification
 When dismantling or replacing the parts, contact SINOTRUK Send it to the local
technical
service station for processing. Pressure gauge Every 12 months supervision
department for
verification
Applicable road conditions
Cylinder vacuum
Every 12 months Pressure test
In poor road conditions, drive the vehicle at a low speed, degree
Check the system
otherwise the fatigue damage to the support structure may Every 7,500km or Airtightness test or
connection points
2 months leakage detection
occur, resulting in leakage and other safety accidents. for leakage
264
Fuel gas indicator
The fuel gas indicator displays the amount of fuel in the cylinder.
If the pointer stays below 0 scale, it indicates that the gas sensor has a signal
failure, and the gas alarm signal light ① on the fuel gauge will flash. When
the gas in the cylinder is low（the pointer in the red area）, the gas low alarm
light on the instrument will come on to remind the driver of inflating in time.
LNG cylinder number selector switch 1
LNG cylinder number selector switch ② has 3 positions, which
corresponds to the upper cylinder of the rear double cylinders, the lower
cylinder of the rear double cylinders and side cylinder respectively. When
the number of cylinders is less than the number of positions and the
appropriate position is selected, the gas gauge is displayed as void.
265
Natural gas leakage alarm

When the gas leakage reaches the set alarm concentration, the alarm ③
will send a sound and light alarm.

3
2 Note:
According to the environment in which this product is used, please carry out
regular inspection to ensure safety. The inspection cycle is 1 to 3 months,
check whether the alarm host and detector work normally. The detector
should be free from the impact of artificial high concentrations of natural
gas, otherwise the sensitivity of the gas sensor will be reduced for a short
time. No contamination of silicon materials is allowed so as to prevent
damage to the detector! In the event of natural gas leakage, the host will send
a sound and light alarm, and the vehicle power supply should be cut off as
soon as possible. Troubleshoot the leakage points immediately, close the
valve, ventilate or take other measures. It is strictly forbidden to plug the
connector between the alarm host and the detector when powered on,
otherwise the internal chip of the system may be damaged. If the sensor in
the detector is damaged or faulty, it may not be replaced by yourself, and you
should contact SINOTRUK service station for processing.
266
Vehicle CNG supply system

CNG system composition
CNG system is composed of the cylinder and the cylinder valves, integrated
control assembly, high/low pressure filters, low pressure solenoid valves,
cylinder pipes and so on.
Cylinder and cylinder valves
Before starting the vehicle, make sure that the cylinder valve ① is opened.
The cylinder valve is integrated with fusible plug and bursting disc, which
1
can guarantee that the pressure in the cylinder can be released timely in high
temperature and over pressure conditions; the over-current protection device
in the cylinder valve can guarantee that the pipes can be cut off timely in the
event of leakage of gas supply system.
If the sensor in the detector is damaged or faulty, it may not be replaced by
yourself, and you should contact SINOTRUK service station for processing.
High/low pressure filter assembly
High-pressure filter assembly ② and low-pressure filter assembly ③ can
effectively filter the water and impurities in the natural gas, so as to further
2 3
protect the engine.
267
Integrated control assembly

 The integrated control assembly consists of: shut-off valve V1 ④, shut-off
valve V2 ⑤, barometer ⑥ and inflation port ⑦.

6
 Shut-off valve V1 represents the inflatable shut-off valve, which must be
7
opened during inflation, and be closed after inflation.
 Shut-off valve V2 represents the supply gas shut-off valve, which must be
opened before the vehicle works, and be closed during vehicle maintenance
and shut down for a long time.
 The barometer displays the gas pressure in the system.
5 4
High pressure reducer
See “NG engine maintenance”.
Filling for CNG system
If the pressure is below 5MPa, gas filling for the cylinder should be
considered, and if the pressure is below 2.5MPa, the cylinder should be
immediately filled.
Note
○
i Since the vehicle will release a large amount of heat in the
process of inflation and the inflation gas temperature is high,
the pressure of the gas will be decreased after a sufficient
cooling, which is a normal phenomenon.
268
WARNING
CNG vehicle driving
The instrument in the cab displays the remaining
CNG vehicle drivers should receive the professional and
CNG proportion in the cylinder rather than the
technical training, get familiar with the operation and
actual pressure, and the actual pressure should be
maintenance of natural gas engine as well as safety
subject to the pressure which is indicated by the
requirements, and in particular, have a deep understanding of
barometer on the combination panel.
natural gas systems so as to ensure the normal and safe
operation. Solving of troubles that occur during driving
Inspection before a trip During the vehicle running, if the engine circulating water
temperature is normal, the pressure reducer will not be
Generally, observe the pressure indicated on the barometer of
involved with frost blocking or other phenomena. In the cold
the integrated panel after parking the vehicle every night,
winter, frost may be attached to the surface of the pressure
observe the pressure indicated on the barometer again before a
regulator, which will not affect its normal work.
trip in the next day, and compare them for any substantial drop
so as to check whether the natural gas system is involved with When the vehicle runs smoothly, in the event of gas leakage or
leakage. In the event of substantial pressure drop, troubleshoot high noise, stop the vehicle immediately for inspection, and
the leakage points. then run the vehicle after troubleshooting.
269
During the vehicle running, if a large number of natural gas Requirements for stopping the vehicle
is leaked due to the rupture of natural gas pipe, loose collar,
When the driver leaves the vehicle or stops temporarily for
etc., pull over the vehicle immediately, cut off the power,
more than 10 min, the power supply should be turned off and
and close all gas valves before troubleshooting.
the engine should be stopped.
If there is a serious gas leakage and the overflow valve is
Leakage detection can be performed only using the gas leakage
faulty and the cylinder shut-off valve cannot be closed,
detector, soapy water or other non-corrosive foam water.
personnel should be evacuated from the site and the fire
Leakage detection with open flame is strictly prohibited.
source should be isolated. At the same time, the situation on
the site should be reported to the local vehicle service, fire During the vehicle maintenance, it is forbidden to tap and
and transport authorities, impact the natural gas system installations, which should be
kept 10m away from the fire. It is forbidden to operate the
and subsequent handling should be performed after the
vehicle in the event of equipment malfunction or system
natural gas disperses.
leakage.
If the vehicle is in a fire, turn off the main power switch
Before starting the vehicle, open the gas supply valves in the
immediately, close all gas valves as soon as possible, and
system slowly to prevent over-flow valve from being enabled.
give an alarm immediately.
270
Maintenance the decompression regulator valve works normally.

Routine maintenance 50000km maintenance:
In addition to routine maintenance of vehicles according to the Test the performance of the decompression regulator. If the
maintenance requirements, users should conduct routine performance cannot be restored to near the factory level, the
maintenance of natural gas systems according to the following decompression regulator should be replaced; check the
norms. Note: Items at the higher level include all items at the circulating water hose for damage or aging.
level. High-pressure filter maintenance:
5000km maintenance: See “Engine”.
Check whether all high/low pressure pipe fittings of natural gas Low-pressure filter maintenance:
installations, gas valves, vacuum regulators and other system See “Engine”.
components are involved with leakage or damage, whether the Precautions
components are installed reliably, whether the pipe clamps are Without the approval of OEM, it is forbidden to disassemble
tightened, and whether the pipes interfere with other parts. And and replace the devices in the natural gas supply system.
eliminate the existing problems. Please fill in and save the driving record related to the natural
10000km maintenance: gas system for future reference.
Replace the low-pressure filter element; check the Reasonable replacement cycle for fuel（gas）hose:
decompression regulator for leakage; check whether the It is recommended to replace the gas pipe every 2 years, and
decompression regulator outlet pressure is normal and whether the fuel pipe has the same life as the vehicle.
271
Air filter
Air filter
Dry air filter
WARNING
- The engine must be stopped when replacing the filter
element.
- Repeatedly blowing the filter will reduce the filter element
efficiency, so do not blow the filter element!
- Avoid unnecessary opening of the air filter for several times
so as to reduce the risk of dirt entry into the clean air side.
- Replace the filter elements with the original parts.
- When replacing the filter element, make sure that the filter
element is not damaged and there is no dirt on the clean air
side.
Maintenance cycle
When the air filter blocking alarm indicator on the Instrument panel comes
on, carry out the following maintenance against the air filter:
272
Air filter
The models that are not equipped with oil bath type air filters should be
replaced with a new dry air filter main element.
The models that are equipped with oil bath air filters, should, first of all, be
cleaned with the steel filter element in the filter, and the oil bath air filter
after three times of maintenance should be replaced with a dry air filter main
element.
The main filter element of the dry air filter after being removed for 5 times
3
should be replaced with a new safety filter element.
Main filter element and safety filter element should be replaced with new
ones after being used for more than 12 months.
Maintenance method
 Tilt the cab（see “Cab tilt mechanism”）.
First of all, loosen the four spring clips ① on the air filter seal cover,
remove the end cover ②, then empty the dust inside and wipe it clean.
 Pull out the main filter element, remove the dust inside the air filter
housing ③with a brush or vacuum cleaner and clean the housing inside.
273
Air filter
 Each time the main filter element is pulled out, a "√" mark shall be made
on the maintenance record at the rear of the safety filter element. After the
main filter element is removed for five times, one safety filter element shall
be replaced. If there is dust deposit on the safety filter element, immediately
replace it with a new safety filter element（rotate the safety filter element
clockwise and remove it）.
3  Before installing the main filter element, carefully check whether the filter
paper is damaged and whether the end face sealant is cracking. If yes, it
should be replaced with a new filter element.
 If no problem is found after inspection, insert the filter element into the
housing, restore the sealing end cover and press the spring catch.
 Finally check whether the intake pipe seal is intact and whether the hose
clamp is loose. Check the pipe wall for wear, and prevent air from entering
the engine.
274
Air filter
Clean the dust collection bag
 When used in winter and in dusty conditions, empty and clean the dust
collection bags daily ④. If the dust collection bag falls off and is damaged,
4
replace it with a new one timely.
Check the drain valve
WARNING!
- Regularly clean the drain valve and check its function.
- If the air in the engine cylinder contains any water drop, the
engine may be damaged.
The drain valve ⑤ is located at the bottom of the air intake pipe at the air
filter inlet.
 Check the drain valve for smoothness by hand and drain the drain valve
when necessary. 5
275
Air filter
Oil bath air filter

Note
○
i - The new vehicle is not filled with oil before leaving the
factory.
- Oil should be filled before the vehicle is put into operation,
and the waste oil can be used.
- Fill the oil at the amount of 5 L or at the depth of 30 mm. No
excessive oil filling is allowed.
- If the oil is difficult to flow when shaking the oil pan, make
sure to clean the steel filter element, and change the oil.
- Under particularly harsh conditions, the oil flow should be
checked daily. In normal conditions, oil can be used
continuously for 80 to 150 h. The steel filter element can be
used for a long time without replacement.
- Check whether the connection bolts or hooks between the
oil pan and filter body are loose every day when you pick up
the vehicle, and tighten them when necessary.
276
Air filter
Oil bath type air filter

Disassembly, inspection and cleaning steps
 Open the spring clips that lock the upper and lower housings.
 Remove the oil pan, refuel at the amount of 5L or at the depth of 30mm.
277
Air filter
 Clean the filter element assembly.
Use the diesel to clean the fan blades and filter elements until no oil sludge
is found in the filter elements or fan blades after visual inspection.
 Clean the upper filter element assembly（the cleaning method same as the
lower filter）.
278
Air filter
 Assemble the filter element assembly.
Before refitting the cleaned steel filter element, make sure that the diesel in
the filter element has been drained. First install the upper filter element, then
install the lower filter element, and finally lock them with a rubber pad, flat
pad and butterfly nut.
 Assemble the lower housing. Fix the oiled lower housing securely with a
spring clip.
279
Electrical system
charging.
Electrical system
Disconnecting sequence: first negative, then positive.
Precautions: Connecting sequence: first positive, then negative.
For safety reasons, disconnect the battery or its main switch  If the vehicle is not used for a long time, charge it every four
before servicing the electrical system. weeks.
WARNING  Make sure that the voltage is measured only with the correct
The mixture of hydrogen and oxygen may occur equipment.
in the closed battery box. After the battery  To avoid short circuit, the measuring equipment input
terminals are disconnected, electric consumers or resistance should be at least 10 MΩ.
monitoring devices still in operation may  The ignition switch should be off before the electronic control
generate a spark which ignites the gas. Therefore, unit plug is disconnected and connected.
the sealed battery box should be blown dry or  Plugs or sockets with obvious signs of corrosion or visible
cleaned thoroughly with compressed air before cracks should be replaced.
the battery terminals are disconnected.  When washing the vehicle:
 Do not start the engine unless the battery is connected
Protect the socket, starter and generator from moisture（water
securely.
splash）, and the tractor and trailer sockets must not be cleaned
 Do not disconnect the battery while the engine is running.
with water or mechanical articles. Approximately 0.6-0.8MPa
 Connect the battery and get it charged at least partially before
compressed air should be used for cleaning.
towing start, see "Towing and towing start".
During cleaning, the ignition switch and the lighting circuit
 Do not use the charger to jump start the vehicle.
must be off.
 Disconnect the positive and negative terminals before
three-phase AC socket（such as refrigerated trucks）
 When the vehicle is equipped with an alternator and 400 V
280
Electrical system
Cleaning with compressed air is allowed only when both the to the vehicle cables.
engine and the external power supply are cut off.
- The parts to be welded should be of good contact, ensuring
 When welding good conductivity. For example, the weldments are pressed
together by the negative terminal of the welding equipment.
- Disconnect the battery and connect the disconnected positive
and negative cables.  The battery boxes of truck, dump truck and cement mixer are
provided with the power connectors of the bodywork position
- Do not use any other power sources except DC power. Check
light. The power on one side should be less than 100W.
whether the polarity of the electrode is correct.
- Turn on the battery's mechanical master switch.

WARNING
- The electromagnetic switch connector must not be connected
to a battery, and the cables can be removed and connected. Users should not increase the electric consumers
on the vehicle or change the electrical circuit
- The welding equipment‟s grounding wire should be close to
without permission, otherwise the vehicle’s
the welding area as far as possible, and grounding should be
electrical system may have a failure, causing
made in a place of good conductivity.
serious consequences!
- The welding equipment‟s cables cannot be placed in parallel
281
Lighting
Lighting
Replace the bulb
Before replacing the bulb, switch off the suspected electric consumers.
Do not touch the bulb glass with bare fingers.
When installing a new bulb, make sure that there is an identical sign at the
bottoms of the new light and the old light.
Headlight
After replacing high beam and low beam, check the headlight setting.
WARNING
Do not touch the bulb glass with bare fingers!
282
Lighting
Cause for light fogging
After the headlight is lit up, it will generate a lot of heat, which needs to be
dissipated via the vents. At the same time, the humid air outside can easily
enter the interior of the light via the vents, and fogging will be generated
during the exchange of hot and cold air. This phenomenon usually occurs in
winter, rainy or humid climates.
In such cases, if the fogging disappears within 45 min after the headlight is
lit up, it should be considered normal.
283
Vehicle cleaning and maintenance
Vehicle cleaning and maintenance  Clean the wheel and wheel shield with a brush and water.
 When rinsing the alloy wheels, the cleaning solvents or
Regular professional maintenance can play the role of
special cleaning agents can be used according to the degree of
maintaining the value of your vehicle.
dirt.
Vehicle washing
 Do not spray water on the unit at the operating temperature.
WARNING
 Do not moisten the alternator or starter.
If the vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage
 If a steam cleaner is used, OEM's operation instructions
electrical system（operating voltage above 24V）.
should be strictly followed and the distance between the nozzle
Before washing the vehicle, the engine should be
and the painted work surface should be at least 30 cm.
stopped.
WARNING
 Only wash the vehicle in a well-equipped area and take
When using a steam cleaner, do not spray water
measures to avoid any damage to the environment.
directly into the knuckle.
 In the first few weeks, the new vehicle and the newly painted
 After cleaning the vehicle with a steam cleaner or oil-based
vehicle should be washed frequently but only with clean water.
detergent, lubricate the vehicle.
The steam cleaner should not be used for the first six weeks.
 In winter, the vehicle should be washed more frequently.
 Make sure to thoroughly rinse the sponge which is used for
 Do not apply paint, gasoline, benzene, petroleum or mineral
vehicle washing.
oil on the brake pipe. When spraying and lubricating, be careful
 When washing the vehicle, do not expose the vehicle in the
not to touch the brake hose and spray or grease.
sunshine.
284
 Below 30℃, wash the curtain with a flexible cleaner.

Paintwork maintenance
 Small paint damage should be repaired immediately.  Clean the seat belts with warm water and soap. Do not use
any chemical detergent.
 The painted surface should be protected from corrosion in
good time.  In frosty weather, handle the door and window seals with talc
to prevent the doors and windows from being freezed with the
Rearview mirror
seal.
 Clean the dirty mirror surface with a glass cleaner.
Cleaning and maintenance of seats and berths
Clean the cab inside
 Clean the plastic parts（eg, belts, holders, levers）with a damp
 Clean the steering wheel, shift lever, dirty interior and carpet
cloth and a solvent cleaner（eg, scrubbing solution）can be used
with warm water and detergent solution. Do not use the
if dirty.
scrubbing solution.
 Clean the interior and seat cushions with a special damp cloth,
 Oil stain can be removed with alcohol（gasoline cannot be
and also the dry foam and a soft brush can be used.
used）.
285
Table of dirt
The substances listed in the table can be purchased from chemical or special stores. Do not spill these substances on the surface of the
material, and the following methods are based on experience. You can try out each substance first in a hidden place, and we do not
assume any liability for damage.
Dirt soluble in water
Dirt type Detergent Method
Apply the reagent onto a soft cotton cloth

until dirt starts to dissolve. Do not rub hard,
Blood stains, eggs, excrements, urine Cold water, shampoo, carpet foam
otherwise it will change the surface. When
stains solvent
necessary, rub from the outside to the
center, and then rinse with water.
Fatty-contained substances, vomits,

Warm water, shampoo, liquid carpet
cream coffee, hot chocolate, lipstick, Same as above
foam, benzene, detergent
mayonnaise milk, ice cream, seasoning
Warm water, shampoo, solvents such

Ordinary alcohol, beer, foam drink, juice,
as benzene, methylation solvents and
lemonade, liqueur, fruit or liquor, sugar Same as above
detergents should be used only after
solution
the dirt is dry
286
Dirt insoluble in water
Dirt type Detergent Method
Butter, polishing wax, pigment A）Apply the reagent onto a soft cotton
cloth until the dirt starts to dissolve. Do
（ vivid ） grease, varnish, resin,
Cleaners, detergents, shampoos not rub hard, otherwise it will change the
carbon, nail polish, oil, paint, soot,
surface. Rub from the outside to the center
tar
as needed, and then rinse with water.
Paraffin, stearin wax such as candle Benzene, scrapped off as much as possible Same as above
Spray, knock it down with a hard object

Chewing gum Icing spray
（hammer）
15% sodium fluoride dissolved in water, one

Corrosion Use as described in A）above
scoop every 100 ml of water
287
Chapter 5 Vehicle maintenance
288
Steering system
Steering system
Hydraulic oil of steering gear: ATF Ⅲ automatic transmission fluid produced by CNPC, without change for the first maintenance.
Refer to the table below for the recommended oil change intervals under different conditions:
Oil Quality level Oil
First change mileage Change interval mileage
Assembly product and product Remarks
or time or time
Name viscosity level volume
Single
steering
5L
axle ① Long-haul vehicles:
① Long-haul vehicles: It is required to
models 100,000 km or 10 months use the special
100,000 km or 10 months
in high-speed conditions, oil for
in high-speed conditions,
whichever comes first. aftermarket
Municipal vehicles, designated by
Municipal vehicles, urban
Double ATF Ⅲ urban construction SINOTRUK.
construction vehicles,
Steering steering Steering automatic vehicles, transport-type Otherwise, the
6.5L transport-type dump
gear axle fluid transmission dump trucks, mixer steering gear
trucks, mixer trucks:
models fluid trucks: will be
80,000 km or 10 months,
80,000 km or 10 months, damaged.
whichever comes first. SINOTRUK
③ Mine site trucks:
③ Mine site trucks: will only
20,000 km or 4 months, provide the paid
Rear 20,000 km or 4 months,
whichever comes first. services.
lift axle 7L whichever comes first.
models
Check the oil level monthly and check the hydraulic oil cleanness.
289
Steering system
Oil change method is as follows

 Support the front axle.
 Open the cover and unscrew the return pipe on the steering gear（make sure to keep it clean,
prevent dirt and foreign matter from entering the oil system）.
 Start the engine, idle it for about 10 s, and rotate the steering wheel to the left and right limit
position for several times, so that all the oil in the tank, booster pump and steering gear is
drained completely（collect and dispose the drained oil in a proper manner）.
 Retighten the return pipe, clean the tank, and fill oil into the filter and filter element. It is
recommended replace the filter element for each change of oil.
 After the tank is filled with hydraulic oil, run the engine at the idle speed, turn the steering
wheel to the left and right repeatedly, and replenish the hydraulic oil until the oil level in the
tank no longer drops and there is no bubble. The oil level should fall within MIN and MAX.
Note:
○
i For first maintenance and periodic maintenance, make sure to check the
clearance of the rotation components such as track rod and drag link joints. If
the clearance is high, they should be replaced. For each periodic maintenance,
grease should be filled everywhere.
290
Diesel engine
Diesel engine
Lubrication system maintenance
Oil specifications and replacement cycle（no change for first maintenance）
Oil Quality grade Recommended Oil
Assembly product and viscosity suppliers and product quanti Mileage or time for first change Change interval mileage or time Remarks
）
name grade specifications ty1
2） 2）
Long-haul vehicle : 100,000 km or Long-haul vehicle : 100,000 km or 1. Any other engine
12 months in high-speed conditions; 12 months in high-speed conditions; oil （ including
42L 80,000 km or 12 months in urban 80,000 km or 12 months in urban WD615, D12 ）
Mobil Delvac XHP （ firs conditions; heavy duty conditions conditions; heavy duty conditions cannot be used for
Extra 10W- 40 t Class I 60,000 km or 6 months; Class I 60,000 km or 6 months; MC engine.
ACEA E4/M filling 40,000 Km or 6 months in Class II 40,000 Km or 6 months in Class II Otherwise, it will
Castrol Vecton Long
3277 10W/40 ）40L heavy-duty conditions; whichever heavy-duty conditions; whichever cause serious
Drain 10W-40
Rimula R6 M 10W-40 （ the comes first comes first damage to the
amou Municipal vehicles, urban Municipal vehicles, urban engine in a very
Diesel nt of construction vehicles, transport construction vehicles, transport short period.
MC11 engine filling dump trucks and mixer trucks: dump trucks and mixer trucks: SINOTRUK only
oil witho 40,000 km or 10 months（30,000 km 40,000 km or 10 months（30,000 km provides the paid
ut or 8 months in Class 3 harsh or 8 months in Class 3 harsh services.
）
replac conditions3 ）, whichever comes first conditions）, whichever comes first 2. Take the regular
Mobil Delvac 1 SHC ing commercial fuel as
5W-40 the Mine site trucks: 20,000 km or 4 Mine site trucks: 20,000 km or 4 the standard, and if
ACEA E4/M
Castrol Enduron plus filter months or 1000 hours, whichever months or 1000 hours, whichever the fuel quality fails
3277 5W/40
5W- 40 eleme comes first comes first to meet the standard,
Rimula R6 ME 5W-30 nt） reduce the oil
Engine for lifting purposes: 1,200 h Engine for lifting purposes: 1,200 h change mileage
or 12 months, whichever comes first or 12 months, whichever comes first accordingly.
Note:
1）The oil products and oil amount in the list are for reference only, and the actual amount should prevail;
2）For long-haul vehicles, when the average fuel consumption is less than 40L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per the high-speed
conditions; when the average fuel consumption falls between 40L/100km and 50L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per the urban
conditions; when the average fuel consumption falls within 50L/100km~60L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per Class I heavy-duty
conditions; when the average fuel consumption is greater than 60L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per Class II heavy-duty conditions;
3）The harsh condition means that the vehicle is involved with serious overload, poor roads and heavy dust.
291
Diesel engine
Oil Quality grade Recommended Oil

Assembly product and viscosity suppliers and product quanti Mileage or time for first change Change interval mileage or time Remarks
）
name grade specifications ty1
Long-haul vehicle2）: 100,000 km or Long-haul vehicle2）: 100,000 km or 1. Any other engine
12 months in high-speed conditions; 12 months in high-speed conditions; oil （ including
42L 80,000 km or 12 months in urban 80,000 km or 12 months in urban WD615, D12 ）
Mobil Delvac XHP conditions; heavy duty conditions conditions; heavy duty conditions cannot be used for
Extra 10W- 40 （first
ACEA E4/M filling Class I 60,000 km or 6 months; Class I 60,000 km or 6 months; MC engine.
Castrol Vecton Long 40,000 Km or 6 months in Class II 40,000 Km or 6 months in Class II Otherwise, it will
3277 10W/40 ）40L
Drain 10W-40 heavy-duty conditions; whichever heavy-duty conditions; whichever cause serious
Rimula R6 M 10W-40 （ the comes first comes first damage to the
amou Municipal vehicles, urban Municipal vehicles, urban engine in a very
Diesel nt of construction vehicles, transport construction vehicles, transport short period.
MC13 engine filling dump trucks and mixer trucks: dump trucks and mixer trucks: SINOTRUK only
witho
oil 40,000 km or 10 months（30,000 km 40,000 km or 10 months（30,000 km provides the paid
ut
or 6 months in Class 3 harsh or 6 months in Class 3 harsh services.
replac
Mobil Delvac 1 SHC ing conditions3 ）） , whichever comes conditions3 ）） , whichever comes 2. Take the regular
5W-40 first first commercial fuel as
ACEA E4/M the
Castrol Enduron plus the standard, and if
3277 5W/40 filter
5W- 40 the fuel quality fails
eleme Mine site trucks: 20,000 km or 4 Mine site trucks: 20,000 km or 4
Rimula R6 ME 5W-30 to meet the standard,
nt） months or 1000 hours, whichever months or 1000 hours, whichever reduce the oil
comes first comes first change mileage
accordingly.
Note:
1）The oil products and oil amount in the list are for reference only, and the actual amount should prevail;
2）For long-haul vehicles, when the average fuel consumption is less than 40L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per the high-speed
conditions; when the average fuel consumption falls between 40L/100km and 50L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per the urban
conditions; when the average fuel consumption falls within 50L/100km~60L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per Class I heavy-duty
conditions;
when the average fuel consumption is greater than 60L/100km, the oil change interval should be executed as per Class II heavy-duty conditions;
3）The harsh condition means that the vehicle is involved with serious overload, poor roads and heavy dust.
292
Diesel engine
Change the oil

Change the oil after the diesel engine is in a horizontal position and is
stopped for at least 10 min.
Place a suitable oil container under the diesel engine.
Loosen and remove the drain plug ② on the oil pan ① and drain the waste
oil.
Install a new composite ring ③, and then tighten the oil drain plug ② on 3
the oil pan at the torque of 80 Nm.
Install a new oil filter element 1
2
Loosen the oil filter cover ① and let it stand for 2 min.
Pull the oil filter cover ①, seal ring ② and oil filter ③ out of the oil filter
housing ④.
Remove the old seal ring ②.
Apply a little oil on the new seal ring ② and then insert it into the seal
groove of the oil filter cover ①. 1
Insert the new filter element ③ into the oil filter cover ① as a
pre-assembly. 2
Insert it into the oil filter housing ④, and tighten the oil filter cover at the
torque of 40+10 Nm（high torque may cause the rupture of the filter 3
cover）.
Note: A new oil filter element should be installed for each change of
diesel engine oil. 4
293
Diesel engine
WARNING
The engine must be provided with special oil and oil filter of
MC engine, otherwise it will cause early wear of the engine.
SINOTRUK only provides the paid services!
Fill the oil
See "Inspection and maintenance before starting the engine".
Check the oil level
Note
○
i Oils of different grades cannot be mixed.
If the oil products of different manufacturers of the same

grade（eg, in line with 10W-40 ACEA E4）is compatible with
each other, they can be mixed.
294
Diesel engine
Fuel system maintenance

1
Diesel specifications
Diesel grades should be selected according to the ambient temperature
（under normal circumstances, the selected diesel grade should be 5~10℃
2
below the ambient temperature）.
Replace the fuel filter and clean the strainer
 Unscrew the fuel filter cover ①, let it stand for 2 min, unscrew the drain 3
valve ⑤ and drain the fuel filter.

4
 Retighten the drain valve ⑤ at the torque of 3Nm.
 Remove the filter cover ① and fuel filter element ③.
 Pull the fuel filter element ③ out of the fuel filter cover ①.
 Remove the seal ring ②.
 Apply a little diesel onto the new seal ring ② and mount it onto the fuel
filter cover ①, then the new filter element ③ into the upper cover ① as a
5
preassembly, and finally tighten the filter housing at the torque of 25+5Nm.
295
Diesel engine
Air bleeding by hand pump

1
Rotate the hand pump handle ④ anticlockwise, pull it up, and pull the
2 handle ④ up and down to remove the air in the fuel filter and then fill the
diesel into the filter. When the hand pump is subject to a certain resistance,
press the handle ④ to the bottom and lock it clockwise.
3
4 WARNING
The engine must be provided with special fuel filter element of

MC engine, otherwise it will cause early wear of the engine.
296
Diesel engine
Cooling system maintenance

Coolant specifications and change intervals
MC series diesel engine coolant: DELIAN BASF G48-24 -35℃coolant.
No coolant change is required for first maintenance, see the table below for the recommended change intervals:
Oil product Oil product

Assembly Quality grade and viscosity grade Change interval mileage or time Remarks
name volume
-35℃ coolant, Class I Q/ZZ21007 200000 km or 4 years, whichever

MC11/MC13 Coolant 42-48L
（BASF G48-24-35℃） comes first.
Note: If the coolant is cloudy or browned no matter how long the interval is, change it immediately.
297
Diesel engine
Drain the coolant

 Place a suitable container of proper volume under the oil module ①.
1  Unscrew the drain plug ② and the composite gasket ③ and drain the
coolant.
 Install a new composite gasket ③, and tighten the screw ② at the torque
3 of 80+10 Nm.
2  Dispose of the drained coolant in a proper manner.
Fill the coolant
WARNING
- The engine must be provided with special fuel filter element
of MC engine, otherwise it will cause early wear of the engine.
- Do not use water instead of coolant.
- The air in the coolant should be removed, otherwise the
pump may be damaged.
298
Diesel engine
Check and replace the ribbed belt and automatic tensioner

 Check the belt and automatic tensioner condition
Check the alignment of the entire wheel system: Adjust any deviation
immediately and find out the reason.
Check the ribbed rib for crack, oil stain, sintering overheating, abrasion,
abnormal noise, etc.; if yes, please replace it.
Check the tensioner performance.
Check whether the tensioner arm can rotate flexibly and can return
automatically.
Check whether the tensioner pulley can rotate flexibly.
Check the other components of the tensioner.
In the event of any abnormality, the tensioner should be replaced.
299
Diesel engine
 Check the belt tension force
The ribbed belt tensioner spring is under tension and is maintenance-free. If

the belt cannot be tensioned, it is necessary to further check whether the
cause is the failure of the tensioner or the belt‟s excessive extension, and
replace it timely.
 Replace it with a new ribbed belt
Rotate the tension pulley bolt ① clockwise to the stop position with a
wrench and fix it securely.
Replace the old belt with the new belt ②, and confirm the belt installation
position.
Automatic tensioner ① will return slowly until it contacts the new belt.
Check the belt contact surface again.
 Replacement cycle of the ribbed belt and tensioner
2 years or 200,000 km, whichever comes first.
300
Diesel engine
emission standards.
SCR system
After the diesel engine is started, the burned exhaust gas will
SCR （ Selective Catalytic Reduction ） is one of the most
enter the exhaust pipe. Based on the NOx content in the
effective ways to degrade nitrogen oxides（NOx）in diesel
exhaust gas, the urea solution is pumped from the urea tank
exhaust and is the most popular technology. SCR technology
into the supply unit（SM）via the hydraulic pipe and then to the
can significantly reduce the harmful by-products content of
urea injection unit（DM）. When the system pressure reaches the
nitrogen oxide in diesel exhaust, so that the emission level of
preset value, the valve of the injection unit will be opened and
the diesel engine can meet Euro IV/Euro V standard,
the urea solution will be atomized and sprayed into the exhaust
effectively alleviating the increasing air pollution problems
pipe to decompose the ammonia, accelerating the reduction of
around the world.
NOx under the action of the catalyst. The entire Denoxtronic®
Denoxtronic® 2.2 system 2.2 system is composed of a urea supply unit（SM）, a urea
MC series diesel engines are provided with BOSCH injection unit（DM）, a electronic control unit（DCU or ECU）
Denoxtronic® 2.2 system, which can meet Euro IV/Euro V and a hydraulic pipe（electrically heated）.
301
Diesel engine
302
Diesel engine
Operation of Denoxtronic® 2.2 system urea solution in the system, which will last for 2-3 min. Please
Denoxtronic® 2.2 system is easy to use. During the warranty do not turn off the master power switch when the system is still
period, there is no need to replace the urea injection unit, the working.
urea supply unit（except the filter element）and the electronic Denoxtronic® 2.2 system can be shut down for 4 months at
control unit, but the urea solution should be checked regularly -40°C to 25°C without disassembly after the system has been
and filled when necessary. closed normally（after the entire reverse pumping process is
Urea solution（vehicle urea solution in line with DIN 70700 or completed）, but the hydraulic and electrical connections should
ISO 22241-1）should be purchased from an authorized retailer not be disconnected during this period; it is necessary to avoid
or a professional manufacturer. When filling the urea solution, the evaporation of water vapor in the urea solution in DM and
it is recommended to use a dedicated equipment to fill a urea SM, and it is recommended to fill the urea tank before
solution so as to prevent splashing of the urea solution. It is shutdown so as to reduce the evaporation in the pipe.
forbidden to use the self-made or non-compliant urea solution At high temperature, the maximum downtime without
or other alternative liquids, because the impurities or metal ions disassembly will be shortened accordingly. When the time limit
will affect the normal operation of the system and shorten the is exceeded, the system should be commissioned before starting
service life as well. The resulting loss will not be covered so as to ensure a normal start-up. The steps are as follows: ①
within the warranty scope. Refill the urea tank with urea solution; ② Replace the filter in
The vehicle factory setting is that the low urea level indicator
on the Instrument panel will flash for warning when the level in SM; ③ start Denoxtronic® 2.2 system; shut down the system
the urea tank is less than 10%. At this time, the urea solution in the event of abnormality, and restart the system after the
should be filled timely, and the consumption of urea solution is DCU/ECU main relay stops（the stop time varies from the
about 5% of fuel consumption. different applications）. Request the help from SINOTRUK
After the diesel engine is started, Denoxtronic® 2.2 system will service station if the system still cannot be started.
start to work when the engine speed and exhaust temperature
reach their set values. After the diesel engine is stopped, the
system will enter into the reverse pumping phase to empty the
303
Diesel engine
Maintenance of Denoxtronic® 2.2 System removed;

Denoxtronic® 2.2 system components should be protected from - Check whether the Denoxtronic® 2.2 system is arranged
direct mechanical and thermal shocks. No debris such as stones properly;
and dust can be accumulated on the protective cover, and the - Check whether the hydraulic pipe and power cables are
system should be kept away from heat sources such as exhaust complete and fixed securely, and whether hydraulic pipe is
pipe, turbocharger and diesel engine. loose or bent;
Both the urea supply unit and urea injection unit have certain - Check whether there is a sufficient flow in the coolant pipe;
waterproof and dustproof functions, but should be protected - Check whether the heating equipment（thermal relay, heating
from flooding and high-pressure water gun impact. It is not valve, etc.）is fixed securely and works normally;
recommended to lubricate the hydraulic pipe joints, and the - Check whether SM filter needs to be replaced;
lubrication of the electrical interface is absolutely forbidden. - Check whether there is any urea crystal attached to the DM
The urea supply unit filter components（filter element and nozzle mounting flange and exhaust pipe（when disassembling
pressure balancer）of Denoxtronic® 2.2 system should be DM or if the service station is equipped with an endoscope）.
replaced every 3 years or 80,000 km at an authorized service WARNING
station. In the event of heavy pollution of urea solution in a - Urea solution is corrosive to the skin. If it
poor application environment, it should be replaced according accidentally touches the skin or eyes when filling,
to the actual situation. rinse with water as soon as possible. If the pain
The gasket on the bottom of the urea injection unit is a continues, please seek medical help. If swallowed,
disposable part and should be replaced after each disassembly. please seek medical help.
For vehicle maintenance, check the followings against - When the urea solution is run out and the
Denoxtronic® 2.2 system: engine continues to operate, the emission will
- Surface cleanliness of Denoxtronic® 2.2 system, especially exceed the standard and MIL indicator will come
waterproof and dust proof parts of the harness connector. If on. After the engine is restarted, the output
there is any debris such as crushed earth or mud on the outer torque will be limited.
surface or the protective cover, it should be immediately
304
Diesel engine
Heat the urea pipe

Since the urea solution will
freeze when the temperature is
lower than -11 ℃ , in order to
ensure the normal use of the
system at low temperature, the
system has the function of urea
unfreezing. The heat source that
is used to unfreeze the urea
tank comes from the coolant of
the engine. When the electronic
control unit detects the urea
temperature up to -8℃ via the
urea level and the temperature
sensor, DCU will open the
coolant solenoid valve, and the
hot engine coolant will flow to
the urea tank along the pipe,
ensuring that the urea solution
will not be freezed and
achieving the unfreezing of the
urea system. The urea pipe is
unfreezed with the help of the
resistance wire which is wound
on the pipe, which heats the urea pipe according to the set temperature（usually below 8°C）.
Note: Since the metering system will pump out the residual fluid in the pipe after the engine is stopped so as to prevent crystal
blockage, the master battery switch should be turned off after the ignition switch has been turned off for one minute.
305
Diesel engine
Precautions for removal and refitting of SCR system:

1. The DM unit is mounted on the engine exhaust pipe and is responsible for
injecting DEF pumped from SM into the exhaust. DM subsystem is cooled
by the engine coolant, and the joint specification meets SAE J2044 standard;
2. It is recommended to install DM on the straight exhaust pipe at the angle
of 30 degrees. For a curved exhaust pipe, DM should be installed at the
corner as far as possible, so that DEF flows into the straight pipe along the
direction of air flow. DM can be appropriately increased by the injection
angle of 3-5 degrees towards the exhaust pipe centerline so as to compensate
the deviation caused by the flow of exhaust gas. If a mixer is provided on the
urea injection path, the deviation in direction can also be reduced effectively.
1. The correct installation sequence of DM: first fix the mounting hole #1
and the mounting holes #2 and #3. The minimum diameter of the contact
surface（nut or washer）is 12mm, and the maximum contact pressure is
180N/mm2. THE recommended installation torque is 8±2Nm（the friction
coefficient reference value is 0.14）, and the minimum length of the screw is
selected to be 20mm. The gasket is a disposable part, and should be replaced
with a new one when it is removed and refitted. For installation/replacement
of DM, make sure to check the crystallization in the exhaust pipe and around
DM, so as to ensure that the flange mounting surface is clean.
2. DM has a total of 3 mounting holes. The inner diameter of the mounting
hole is subject to the actual product. The shortest length of the mounting bolt
306
Diesel engine
is 90mm. The shockproof gasket（the contact area diameter of than 1m. The hydraulic pipes and electrical wires should be
18mm ） should be used. The surface contact pressure is fixed securely so as to reduce the failures such as rupture
260N/mm2. The recommended mounting torque is 19Nm±20% caused by vibration in the operating conditions.
（the friction coefficient reference value is 0.14）. 4. The temperature sensors at the catalyst inlet and outlet are
installed in the upstream of the carrier. The connector of the
3. When installing the SCR system, an adequate space should
exhaust temperature sensor should be welded on the exhaust
be reserved for all kinds of connecting wires, and the electrical
pipe at the upstream of the catalyst, within 50 cm of the carrier.
wires should be laid before the hydraulic pipes; when
disassembling, the hydraulic pipes should be laid before The specific location depends on the exhaust system. 127mm（5
electrical wires. For purpose of antifreezing and unfreezing in inches）long space is required for the installation of the exhaust
winter, the hydraulic fittings and hydraulic pipes should be temperature sensor.
provided with heating devices, which should be insulated. The 5. If the exhaust pipe is vertical at the installation position of
connector specifications of SM and DM should meet SAE the sensor, the sensor connector can be arranged anywhere in
J2044 standard. Attention should be paid to the correspondence the circumferential direction. If the exhaust pipe is inclined or
between the hydraulic pipes and their joints when installing. horizontal, the sensor installation position should be avoided
The outlet pipe（OUTLET）, backflow pipe（BACKFLOW） from the 45-degree sector area.
and inlet pipe（INLET）are arranged from left to right, and the 6. NOx sensor must be properly installed on the catalyst to
ensure that water droplets cannot enter the sensor unit. In any
corresponding prompts in English is provided on SM seal cover.
case, the sensor must be installed at the angle of greater than 10
Please connect them properly.
degrees to the horizontal position. The NOx sensor measuring
Do not insert and pull the hydraulic plugs violently. Do not
unit is mounted on the vehicle. The sensor wiring harness
shake them laterally（maximum force on F side = 225N）, so as
cannot be arranged in the tension state, cannot be wound and
not to damage the connector.
should be kept away from hot parts. Do not touch the pins.
SCR system allows the maximum pumping height of 1m, so the
drop between the inlet pipe and the outlet pipe should be less
307
Diesel engine
Fault diagnosis of SCR system generate ammonia with an irritating odor. It is normal to smell
a slight irritating odor after the vehicle operates.
WARNING To prevent the economic loss and environmental pollution due
Failure of any part of the SCR system will cause to urea leakage, it is necessary to usually check whether the
the excessive emission and torsion limit of the consumption of urea solution is normal. In the event of frequent
engine! urea filling due to excessive consumption, please check
1.MIL light flashes at the code of 431 or 432 whether there is a leakage of urea.
When the flash code is 431 or 432, it indicates that the SCR Simple routine urea leakage inspections include: check whether
post-processing system has failed. Please confirm the there are any white or fallow crystals at the urea pipe fitting
installation of each component, check whether the urea level in and urea nozzle mounting flange and whether there is water
the tank is normal, whether the urea pump works normally, and trace on the ground due to urea leakage after the vehicle is
whether there is any urea leakage. If the cause cannot be found stopped.
out, go to the service station and use 6-in-1 diagnostic tool for 3.Other faults
diagnosis there, and then repair it accordingly. 431 means that Some improper operations may cause the failure that the diesel
Nox exceeds 5.0g/kWh, and 432 means that Nox exceeds engine is out of the emission standard, and the failure will be
7.0g/kWh. stored in DCU. When the post-processing（SCR）system fails to
2.Ammonia leakage with an irritating odor work normally due to other unknown faults, please go to the
The urea solution is easy to evaporate and hydrolyze to service station to check and repair it in time.
308
Diesel engine
Vehicle Diagnostic System（OBD）

OBD system is used to monitor and control the emission control system. When OBD system detects that the diesel engine is out of
OBD standard or the relevant components of the exhaust system are faulty（eg, the relevant sensors are dismantled, the urea tank is
empty, the urea pump fails to work, etc.）, MIL light will be activated and the control system will respond according to the effect of
the failure on emission control.
SCR system fault code table
P-Code fault Flash
Fault name Fault description MIL light Fault light
code DEC code
Come on after 3 driving cycles and
DFC_AirHt_TstOffHi P2609 323 Air intake heating grille test failure Not come on
go out immediately after repair
DFC_AirHt_TstOffLo P2609 323 Air intake heating grille test failure Not come on
DFC_AirHt_TstOnHi P2609 323 Air intake heating grille test failure Not come on
DFC_AirHt_TstOnLo P2609 323 Air intake heating grille test failure Not come on
Air intake heating control switch Come on after 3 driving cycles and
DFC_AirHtStickOn P2609 322 Not come on
normally closed go out immediately after repair
MIL light comes on
ECU internal relay 0 short to power
DFC_ARlySCB_0 P0659 114 immediately and goes out Not come on
supply positive
after 3 driving cycles
MIL light comes on
supply positive
MIL light comes on
supply positive
309
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on
DFC_ARlySCG_0 P0658 114 ECU internal relay 0 short to ground immediately and goes out Not come on
MIL light comes on
MIL light comes on
DFC_BattUHi P0563 124 Battery voltage above the upper limit Not come on Not come on
DFC_BattULo P0562 124 Battery voltage below the lower limit Not come on Not come on
Battery voltage sensor signal is above
DFC_BattUSRCMax P0563 124 Not come on Not come on
the upper limit
Battery voltage sensor signal is below
DFC_BattUSRCMin P0562 124 Not come on Not come on
the lower limit
DFC_BrkCrCtlLmp P0504 223 Brake pedal reliability check Not come on
DFC_BrkCrCtlRls P0504 223 Brake pedal reliability check Not come on
Braking signal is not trustable or the Come on after 3 driving cycles and
DFC_BrkNpl P0504 223 Not come on
signal line is open go out immediately after repair
Braking signal is not trustable or the Come on after 3 driving cycles and
DFC_BrkNplSngSwt P0504 223 Not come on
DFC_BrkSig P0571 223 The brake signal from CAN bus fault Not come on Not come on
MIL light comes on
DFC_BusDiagBusOffErrPasNo
U0073 411 CAN bus 0 communication fault immediately and goes out Not come on
deA
310
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_BusDiagBusOffErrPasNo
U0073 412 CAN bus 1 communication fault Not come on Not come on
deB
MIL light comes on
DFC_BusDiagBusOffNodeA U0073 411 CAN bus 0 communication fault immediately and goes out Not come on
DFC_BusDiagBusOffNodeB U0073 412 CAN bus 1 communication fault Not come on Not come on
MIL light comes on after
Water temperature reasonable
DFC_CEngDsTAbsTst P0116 242 3 driving cycles and then Not come on
detection error
goes out
Water temperature dynamic value
DFC_CEngDsTDynTst P0116 242 3 driving cycles and then Not come on
reasonable detection error
goes out
MIL light comes on
Water temperature sensor voltage
DFC_CEngDsTSRCMax P0118 241 immediately and goes out Not come on
signal is above the upper limit
MIL light comes on
Water temperature sensor voltage
DFC_CEngDsTSRCMin P0117 241 immediately and goes out Not come on
signal is below the lower limit
The clutch signal is not trustable or Come on after 3 driving cycles and
DFC_ClthNpl P0704 222 Not come on
DFC_CoETSBstPrtTrqLim P1038 521 Strong limitation by turbo loader Not come on Not come on
DFC_CoETSEngPrtTrqLim P1039 522 Strong limitation by engine protection Not come on Not come on
DFC_CoETSInjSysTrqLim P1040 523 Strong limitation by injection system Not come on Not come on
DFC_CoETSLimInfo P1006 524 Not come on Not come on
Strong limitation by negative torque
DFC_CoETSNTCTrqLim P1041 534 Not come on Not come on
coordinator（engine brake）
Strong torque limitation from
DFC_CoETSPDiffTrqLim P1042 533 Not come on Not come on
particulate ﬁlter active
311
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Strong limitation by performance
DFC_CoETSPrfmLimTrqLim P1043 532 Not come on Not come on
limiter
DFC_CoETSSmkTrqLim P1044 531 Strong limitation by smoke control Not come on Not come on
AT1OG1 CAN message number of
DFC_ComAT1OG1DLC U0113 421 Not come on Not come on
bytes fault
DFC_ComAT1OG1TO U0113 421 AT1OG1 CAN message time-out 3 driving cycles and then Not come on
goes out
DFC_ComDM19DsAck U0113 424 Not come on Not come on
BAM to Packet Timeout for DM19Ds
DFC_ComDM19DsBAM2PKTTO U0113 424 Not come on Not come on
CAN message
BAM Timeout for DM19Ds CAN
DFC_ComDM19DsBAMTO U0113 424 Not come on Not come on
message
Packet to Packet Timeout for DM19Ds
DFC_ComDM19DsPKT2PKTTO U0113 424 Not come on Not come on
CAN message
EFL_P1 CAN message sending
DFC_ComEFL_P1TO U0100 413 Not come on Not come on
time-out
DFC_ComIC1TO U0100 413 IC1 CAN message sending time-out Not come on Not come on
CAN message content exceeds the
DFC_ComNOxNoCat2DsSAE U0113 421 Not come on Not come on
reasonable range specified by SAE
CAN message content exceeds the
DFC_ComO2NoCat2DsSAE U0113 421 Not come on Not come on
reasonable range specified by SAE
DFC_ComSensNOxStabNoCat CAN message content exceeds the
U0113 422 Not come on Not come on
2DsSAE reasonable range specified by SAE
DFC_ComSensO2StabNoCat2 CAN message content exceeds the
DsSAE reasonable range specified by SAE
DFC_ComSensPwrRngNoCat2 CAN message content exceeds the
DsSAE reasonable range specified by SAE
312
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_ComSensTempNoCat2Ds CAN message content exceeds the
SAE reasonable range specified by SAE
DFC_ComTI1TO_C U1103 413 TI1CAN message sending time-out Not come on Not come on
TIMEDATA CAN message data length
DFC_ComTimeDateDLC U0101 413 Not come on Not come on
error
TIMEDATA CAN message sending
DFC_ComTimeDateTO U1101 413 Not come on Not come on
time-out
NOxSensGlbReqTx CAN message
DFC_ComTxPGNRQGlbTO U1105 413 Not come on Not come on
sending time-out
PGN request message sending
DFC_ComTxPGNRQTO U0100 413 Not come on Not come on
time-out
DFC_ComUAA1TO U0100 413 UAA1CAN Message sending time-out Not come on Not come on
DFC_ComVCU1DLC VCU1CAN message length error Not come on Not come on
DFC_ComVCU1TO VCU1CAN message sending time-out Not come on Not come on
DFC_CoVehPrfmLimAct P1007 511 Performance limit activation Not come on Not come on
DFC_CrCUIModeNpl P0575 341 Cruise switch state is not reasonable Not come on Not come on
313
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on immediately in
ECU internal chip communication
DFC_Cy146SpiCom1 P0607 111 Not come on the case of failure and goes out
fault
immediately after repair
DFC_Cy320SpiCom P0607 111 Not come on the case of failure and goes out
fault
The battery voltage is above the upper
DFC_DevLibBattUHi P0563 444 Not come on Not come on
limit of the actuator supply voltage
The battery voltage is above the lower
DFC_DevLibBattULo P0562 444 Not come on Not come on
limit of the actuator supply voltage
Exhaust brake request button state is
DFC_EBrkPreSelPlaus P1500 342 Not come on Not come on
not reasonable
Engine shutdown signal from CAN
DFC_ECBtnStopSig P2536 343 Not come on Not come on
bus fault
Engine startup signal from CAN bus
DFC_ECBtnStrtSig P2536 343 Not come on Not come on
fault
DFC_EEPEraseErr P062F 117 EEPROM area erase fault Not come on Not come on
DFC_EEPRdErr P062F 117 EEPROM area read fault Not come on Not come on
DFC_EEPWrErr P062F 117 EEPROM area flash failure Not come on Not come on
DFC_EngICO P1008 512 Fuel injection interrupted Not come on the case of failure and goes out
DFC_EngPrtOvrSpd P0219 513 Engine overspeed Not come on Not come on
DFC_EngSpdOL P100A 344 Speed output signal is open Not come on Not come on
DFC_EngSpdOvrTemp P100B 344 Speed output drive chip is overheated Not come on Not come on
Speed output signal is short to the
DFC_EngSpdSCB P100C 344 Not come on Not come on
power supply
DFC_EngSpdSCG P100D 344 Speed output signal is short to ground Not come on Not come on
314
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on
Ambient pressure sensor voltage signal
DFC_EnvPSRCMax P2229 232 immediately and goes out Not come on
is above the upper limit
MIL light comes on
Ambient pressure sensor voltage signal
DFC_EnvPSRCMin P2228 232 immediately and goes out Not come on
is below the lower limit
Ambient temperature sensor reliability
DFC_EnvTAmbTempMon P0071 235 Not come on Not come on
check
MIL light comes on
Ambient temperature sensor voltage
DFC_EnvTSRCMax P0073 235 immediately and goes out Not come on
signal is above the upper limit
MIL light comes on
Ambient temperature sensor voltage
DFC_EnvTSRCMin P0072 235 immediately and goes out Not come on
signal is below the lower limit
MIL light comes on
DFC_EpmCaSI1ErrSig P0341 123 Camshaft sensor signal fault immediately and goes out Not come on
MIL light comes on
DFC_EpmCaSI1NoSig P0340 123 Camshaft sensor has no signal immediately and goes out Not come on
MIL light comes on
Camshaft sensor timing signal
DFC_EpmCaSI1OfsErr P0340 123 immediately and goes out Not come on
deviation is high
MIL light comes on
DFC_EpmCrSErrSig P0336 122 Crankshaft sensor signal fault immediately and goes out Not come on
MIL light comes on
DFC_EpmCrSNoSig P0335 122 Crankshaft sensor has no signal immediately and goes out Not come on
315
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_ExhFlpLPOL P0475 311 Exhaust brake drive circuit is open Not come on
DFC_ExhFlpLPOvrTemp P0475 311 Exhaust brake drive chip is overheated Not come on
Exhaust brake drive circuit is short to Come on after 3 driving cycles and
DFC_ExhFlpLPSCB P0478 311 Not come on
power supply go out immediately after repair
Exhaust brake drive circuit is short to Come on after 3 driving cycles and
DFC_ExhFlpLPSCG P0477 311 Not come on
ground go out immediately after repair
DFC_ExhFlpLPStLnNpl P0476 311 Exhaust brake action is not reasonable Not come on
DFC_ExhFlpLPStLnSig P0475 311 Not come on
Fuel filter blocking detection signal
DFC_FlFltCtlClogDet P1048 213 Not come on the case of a failure and goes out
fault
after repair
Fuel filter blocking detection
DFC_FlFltCtlClogDetPlaus P1049 213 Not come on the case of a failure and goes out
feasibility fault
after repair
Air intake preheat power circuit is
DFC_GlwLmpSCG P3081 332 Not come on Not come on
short to ground
Air intake preheat indicator preheat
DFC_GlwLmpSCB P3081 332 Not come on Not come on
power circuit is short to power supply
DFC_GlwLmpOvrTemp P3081 332 Not come on Not come on
power is overheated
DFC_GlwLmpOL P3081 332 Not come on Not come on
power is open
316
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on immediately
DFC_IAirHtOL P0110 321 Air intake heating is open Not come on after 3 driving cycles and goes out
DFC_IAirHtOvrTemp P0110 321 Power level temperature is high Not come on after 3 driving cycles and goes out
The power level is short to power
DFC_IAirHtSCB P0113 321 Not come on after 3 driving cycles and goes out
supply
DFC_IAirHtSCG P0112 321 Power level is short to ground Not come on after 3 driving cycles and goes out
The number of fuel injection exceeds 3 driving cycles and goes
DFC_InjCrvInjLimChrgBal P100E 152 Not come on
the limit out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
DFC_InjCrvInjLimQntBal P100F 152 Not come on
after repair
DFC_InjCrvInjLimSys P1010 152 Not come on
after repair
DFC_InjCrvNumInjRtmLim P1011 152 Not come on
after repair
DFC_InjUnStrtTst P0A0F 127 Not come on Not come on
317
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on after 3
Rail pressure is less than the minimum driving cycles and goes
DFC_InjVlvPresMin P0087 276 Not come on
injection pressure out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
MIL light comes on
immediately and goes out
DFC_IVDiaBnkShCir_0 P062D 151 Fuel injection module 0 is short Not come on
after 3 driving cycles after
repair
MIL light comes on
DFC_IVDiaBnkShCir_1 P062E 151 Fuel injection module 1 is short Not come on
repair
MIL light comes on
DFC_IVDiaChp_0 P062B 153 CY33x chip drive circuit fault Not come on
repair
MIL light comes on
DFC_IVDiaCylNoLd_0 P0201 141 Injector（ignition sequence 1）is open Not come on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
318
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
DFC_IVDiaCylShCir_0 P0262 141 Injector（ignition sequence 1）is short Not come on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
319
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
Injector（ignition sequence 1）high/low immediately and goes out
DFC_IVDiaCylShCirHSLS_0 P0261 141 Not come on
end is short after 3 driving cycles after
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
MIL light comes on
repair
320
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on
repair
DFC_IVDiaShCirGndToutBnk
P062D 151
_0
DFC_IVDiaShCirGndToutBnk
P062E 151
_1
DFC_IVDiaShCirGndTstBnk_0 P1581 151
DFC_IVDiaShCirGndTstBnk_1 P1582 151
MIL light comes on

The number of open and short circuits
DFC_MeUnIntCtct P0251 133 exceeds the limit or the time interval Not come on
between fault is below the limit
repair
MIL light comes on
DFC_MeUnOL P0251 133 Metering unit is open Not come on
repair
MIL light comes on
Metering unit power level is immediately and goes out
DFC_MeUnOT P0252 133 Not come on
overheated after 3 driving cycles after
repair
MIL light comes on
Metering unit high end is short to immediately and goes out
DFC_MeUnShCirHSBatt P0254 133 Not come on
power supply after 3 driving cycles after
repair
321
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
MIL light comes on
Metering unit high end is short to immediately and goes out
DFC_MeUnShCirHSGnd P0253 133 Not come on
ground after 3 driving cycles after
repair
MIL light comes on
Metering unit low end is short to immediately and goes out
DFC_MeUnShCirLSBatt P0254 133 Not come on
power supply after 3 driving cycles after
repair
MIL light comes on
Metering unit low end is short to immediately and goes out
DFC_MeUnShCirLSGnd P0253 133 Not come on
ground after 3 driving cycles after
repair
MIL light comes on
DFC_MeUnSRCMax P0254 133 Not come on
repair
MIL light comes on
DFC_MeUnSRCMin P0253 133 Not come on
repair
MIL light comes on after 3 driving
DFC_MILOL P0650 331 MIL light output power level is open Not come on cycles and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_MILOvrTemp P0650 331 MIL light output power level is hot Not come on cycles and goes out immediately
after repair
MIL light output power level is short
DFC_MILSCB P0650 331 Not come on cycles and goes out immediately
to power supply
after repair
322
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code

MIL light output power level is short
DFC_MILSCG P0650 331 Not come on cycles and goes out immediately
to ground
after repair
MIL light comes on in the case of a

DFC_MoCADCNTP P060B 262 ADC zero test fault Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair

DFC_MoCADCTst P060B 262 ADC self-test fault Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair

ADC conversion voltage is not
DFC_MoCADCVltgRatio P060B 262 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
accurate
after repair

ECU internal response communication
DFC_MoCComErrCnt P060C 262 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
fault
after repair

DFC_MoCComSPI P060C 262 ECU internal SPI communication fault Not come on failure and goes out immediately after
repair

DFC_MoCROMErrXPg P060C 262 ECU internal ROM self-test fault Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
323
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
SOP_CPU and monitoring module MIL light comes on in the case of a
DFC_MoCSOPErrMMRespByte P060C 263 communication Not come on failure and goes out immediately
Sync loss after repair
Used to limit the torque before SOP_
DFC_MoCSOPErrNoChk P060C 263 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
fault is reported
after repair
SOP_ communication response time
DFC_MoCSOPErrRespTime P060C 263 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
fault
after repair
SOP_ multiple SPI communication
DFC_MoCSOPErrSPI P060C 263 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
faults
after repair
DFC_MoCSOPLoLi P060C 263 SOP_ voltage is low Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
SOP_monitor module WDA cannot MIL light comes on in the case of a
DFC_MoCSOPMM P060C 263 work Not come on failure and goes out immediately after
normally repair
DFC_MoCSOPOSTimeOut P060C 263 SOP_ operating system time-out Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
SOP_ fuel injection active shutdown
DFC_MoCSOPPsvTstErr P060C 263 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
test failure
after repair
DFC_MoCSOPTimeOut P060C 263 SOP_ communication timeout Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
324
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_MoCSOPUpLi P060C 263 SOP_ voltage is high Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_MoFAPP P1012 264 Pedal voltage is abnormal Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_MoFESpd P1013 264 Engine speed fault Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_MoFInjDatET P1014 264 Abnormal fuel injection time Not come on failure and goes out immediately after
repair
DFC_MoFInjDatPhi P1015 264 Abnormal fuel injection stop Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
Abnormal 0 Fuel consumption
DFC_MoFInjQnt P1016 264 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
power-on time
after repair
DFC_MoFMode1 P1017 264 POI2 efficiency is abnormal Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_MoFMode2 P1018 264 POI2 shutdown is abnormal Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_MoFMode3 P1019 264 POI3 efficiency is abnormal Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
The maximum allowable power-on
DFC_MoFOvR P101A 261 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
time is abnormal
after repair
325
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Power-on time is abnormal when
DFC_MoFOvRHtPrt P101A 261 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
overheat protection
after repair
DFC_MoFQntCor P101B 264 Waveform correction is abnormal Not come on Not come on

DFC_MoFRailP P101C 264 Rail pressure is abnormal Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
Torque allowable value and actual
DFC_MoFTrqCmp P101D 264 Not come on failure and goes out immediately after
value are abnormal
repair
DFC_MonLimCurr P101E 264 Rail pressure control is limited Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_MonLimLead P101F 264 The air system is limited by the torque Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
The amount of oil is limited by the
DFC_MonLimSet P1020 264 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
torque
after repair
MIL light comes on
Sensor supply voltage is above the immediately and goes out
DFC_MonUMaxSupply1 P1600 265 Not come on
upper limit after 3 driving cycles after
repair
MIL light comes on
Sensor supply voltage is below the immediately and goes out
DFC_MonUMinSupply1 P1601 265 Not come on
lower limit after 3 driving cycles after
repair
326
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_MRlyErlyOpng P068A 125 Main relay is opened too early Not come on Not come on
DFC_MRlyStk P068B 125 Main relay cannot be disconnected Not come on Not come on

The power state of CAN transmission 3 driving cycles and goes
DFC_NoCat2DsBattSt P2200 421 Not come on
is abnormal out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
Monitor Nox signal preparation 3 driving cycles and goes
DFC_NoCat2DsNOxRdyTO P2200 421 Not come on
abnormality out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
3 driving cycles and goes
DFC_NoCat2DsNOxSRCMax P2201 421 Nox signal maximum value error Not come on
out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
DFC_NoCat2DsNOxSRCMin P2201 421 NOx signal minimum value error Not come on
after repair
DFC_NoCat2DsOpCir P2200 421 Nox signal is open Not come on
out immediately after
repair
DFC_NoCat2DsShCir P2200 421 Nox signal is shorted Not come on
repair
327
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
ECU internal chip communication MIL light comes on after the failure
DFC_OCWDACom_C P060C 111 Not come on report and goes out immediately after
fault（response communication）
repair
MIL light comes on after the failure
DFC_OCWDALowVltg_C P060C 111 Not come on report and goes out immediately
failure（low voltage）
after repair
DFC_OCWDAOvrVltg_C P060C 111 Not come on report and goes out immediately
failure（high voltage）
after repair
DFC_OCWDAReasUnkwn_C P060C 111 Not come on report and goes out immediately
failure（other reasons）
after repair
DFC_OilPMin P0524 243 Oil pressure is below the lower limit Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
cycles after repair
DFC_OilPNpl P0521 243 Oil pressure reasonable check failure Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
cycles after repair
DFC_OilPSwmpPhysRngHi P0523 243 Oil pressure is above the upper limit Not come on Not come on
DFC_OilPSwmpPhysRngLo P0524 243 Oil pressure is below the lower limit Not come on Not come on
DFC_OilPSwmpSig

Oil pressure sensor voltage signal is
DFC_OilPSwmpSRCMax P0523 243 Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
above the upper limit
cycles after repair
328
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Oil pressure sensor voltage signal is
DFC_OilPSwmpSRCMin P0522 243 Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
above the lower limit
cycles after repair
DFC_OilTNplHigh
DFC_OilTSig
DFC_PhyModNOnMonMapNpl P1031 0 Not come on Not come on

The reasonable check deviation
3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_PIntkVUsPlsHi P006D 231 between boost pressure and ambient Not come on
pressure is above the lower limit
after repair
The reasonable check deviation
DFC_PIntkVUsPlsLo P006D 231 between boost pressure and ambient Not come on
pressure is below the lower limit
after repair
Boost pressure sensor voltage signal is the failure report and goes
DFC_PIntkVUsSRCMax P0238 231 Not come on
above the upper limit out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Boost pressure sensor voltage signal is the failure report and goes
DFC_PIntkVUsSRCMin P0237 231 Not come on
below the lower limit out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
MIL light comes on in the event of a
PRV opening frequency exceeds the
DFC_PRVctOpnMax P0089 134 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
maximum allowable value
after repair
329
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
PRV is opened forcedly to execute the
DFC_PRVFrOpnPresInc P0089 137 Not come on Not come on
increase in rail pressure
PRV is opened forcedly to execute the
DFC_PRVFrOpnPresShck P0089 138 Not come on Not come on
sudden change in rail pressure
the failure report and goes
DFC_PRVOpn P0089 135 PRV is opened Not come on
out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Fuel injection balance check after PRV
DFC_PRVQBalChk P1036 136 Not come on Not come on
is opened
The average rail pressure after PRV is the failure report and goes
DFC_PRVRPOutOfRng P1037 136 Not come on
opened exceeds the limit value out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
The cumulative opening time of PRV
DFC_PRVtiOpnMax P0089 136 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
exceeds the limit
after repair
DFC_R2S2_MscComm1 P0060 111 R2S2 MSC error Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
The actual rail pressure is below the the failure report and goes
DFC_RailMeUn0 P0251 251 Not come on
set value out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
The actual oil volume in the system the failure report and goes
exceeds the reasonable value out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
330
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Under the small opening of the fuel the failure report and goes
metering unit, rail pressure is high out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Under the small opening of the fuel the failure report and goes
metering unit, rail pressure is very high out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_RailMeUn3 P0087 256 Rail pressure is very low Not come on
after repair
DFC_RailMeUn4 P0088 271 Rail pressure is high Not come on
after repair
DFC_RailMeUn42 P0088 272 Rail pressure is very high Not come on
after repair
In the inverse towing condition, the the failure report and goes
fuel metering unit has high flow out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
In the idling condition, the fuel the failure report and goes
metering unit has high flow out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_RailPGradMon P0194 275 Rail pressure signal jump is high Not come on
after repair
331
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Rail pressure sensor signal positive 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_RailPOfsTstMAX P0191 132 Not come on
deviation out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
Rail pressure sensor signal negative 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_RailPOfsTstMin P0191 132 Not come on
deviation out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
Rail pressure is high after the pressure the failure report and goes
DFC_RailPRV4 P0088 136 Not come on
relief valve is opened out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
after repair
after repair
Rail pressure sensor voltage signal is the failure report and goes
DFC_RailPSRCMax P0193 131 Not come on
above the upper limit out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Rail pressure sensor voltage signal is the failure report and goes
DFC_RailPSRCMin P0192 131 Not come on
below the lower limit out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
332
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_RdcAgQlDetFail P203B 434 Not come on
after repair
DFC_SCRChkEta P0420 0 Not come on Not come on

DFC_SCRChkEta1 P0420 431 NOx exceeds 5.0 g/kWh Not come on
after repair
DFC_SCRChkEta2 P0420 432 NOx exceeds 7.0g/kWh Not come on
after repair
Downstream nitrogen and oxygen
DFC_SCRChkNOxDsPeakErr P2214 421 sensor reasonable inspection Not come on
fault（peak value inspection）
after repair
Downstream nitrogen and oxygen
DFC_SCRChkNOxDsStkErr P2214 421 sensor reasonable inspection Not come on
fault（increment inspection）
after repair
Urea backflow pipe blocking fault
DFC_SCRMonDetModeBLPlaus P3050 441 （Detectio Not come on
n Mode）
after repair
Urea pressure fault（Detection 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_SCRMonDetModePresChk P3053 441 Not come on
Mode） out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
333
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Urea pressure failure （ pressure
DFC_SCRMonDetModePresStab P3054 441 （
fluctuation is high） Not come on
Detection Mode）
after repair
System urea emptying failure
DFC_SCRMonLdStOvrThres P3015 447 Not come on Not come on
（emptying）
Urea pressure is high（Metering 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_SCRMonMetCtlOvrPresErr P3039 442 Not come on
Control） out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
Urea metering control fails to work in 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_SCRMonMetCtlTmr P3089 449 Not come on
time out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
Urea pressure is low（Metering 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_SCRMonMetCtlUndrPresErr P3056 443 Not come on
Control state） out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
DFC_SCRMonOvrPresErr P3039 442 Urea pressure is high Not come on
after repair
DFC_SCRMonPresBuildUpErr P3040 441 Pressure build failure Not come on
after repair
Pressure reduction failure（Detection 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_SCRMonPresDropChk P3049 441 Not come on
Mode） out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
334
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_SCRMonPresRdcErr P3041 441 Pressure reduction failure Not come on
after repair
DFC_SCRPODMonTnkT P2043 446 Urea tank temperature is high Not come on
after repair
DFC_SCRPODPlausUDosVlv P2047 453 Urea injector valve fault（stuck） Not come on
after repair
Urea reversing valve fault（stuck in the
DFC_SCRPODPlausURevVlv P3014 453 closed Not come on
position） after repair
Urea tank level sensor fault （ the
DFC_SCRPODPlausUTnkLvlHi P3066 445 measured Not come on
value is high） after repair
Urea tank level sensor fault （ the
DFC_SCRPODPlausUTnkLvlLo P3067 445 measured Not come on
value is low） after repair
Urea pump and injection valve
DFC_SCRPODPUQPErr P3000 441 operation Not come on
is untrustworthy
after repair
335
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_SCRPODSMHtr P3057 455 Urea supply module heater fault Not come on
after repair
Urea supply module heater
DFC_SCRPODSMHtrT P3058 455 temperature sensor Not come on
dynamic monitoring is untrustworthy
after repair
DFC_SCRPODSMHtrTCldStrt P3059 455 temperature sensor Not come on
cold start is untrustworthy
after repair
Urea supply module temperature
DFC_SCRPODSMT P3060 456 sensor Not come on
dynamic monitoring is untrustworthy
after repair
DFC_SCRPODSMTCldStrt P3061 456 sensor Not come on
cold start is untrustworthy
after repair
Urea tank temperature sensor is the failure report and goes
DFC_SCRPODTnkTempResp P203B 456 Not come on
untrustworthy out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_SMHtrTDycFail P3029 455 temperature PW Not come on
M signal duty ratio fault
after repair
336
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_SMHtrTDycInvld P3029 455 temperature PW Not come on
M signal duty ratio fault
after repair
DFC_SMNoAvl P3038 454 signal Not come on
fault
after repair
DFC_SMPerPwm P2062 454 measurement cycle does not Not come on
fall within the normal range
after repair
Urea supply module and electronic
DFC_SMPwm P2062 456 control unit communication Not come on
sequence fault
after repair
DFC_SMTDycFail P3029 456 PWM signal Not come on
duty ratio fault
after repair
DFC_SMTDycInvld P3029 456 PWM signal Not come on
duty ratio fault
after repair

DFC_SRCHighAPP1 P0123 221 Not come on failure and goes out immediately after
repair
337
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code

DFC_SRCHighAPP2 P0223 221 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair

Accelerator pedal 1 voltage signal is
DFC_SRCLowAPP1 P0122 221 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
below the lower limit
after repair

Accelerator pedal 2 voltage signal is
DFC_SRCLowAPP2 P0222 221 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
below the lower limit
after repair

DFC_SRCMaxUTnkLvl P203D 445 Urea level sensor signal is high Not come on
after repair
DFC_SRCMinUTnkLvl P203C 445 Urea level sensor signal is low Not come on
after repair
DFC_SSpMon1 P0643 112 Sensor power supply module 1 fault Not come on
after repair
after repair
338
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
after repair
DFC_SSpMonSply1Max P1602 113 12V sensor supply voltage 1 is high Not come on Not come on
DFC_SSpMonSply1Min P1603 113 12V sensor supply voltage 2 is low Not come on Not come on
DFC_SSpMonSplyMax P1602 113 Internal sensor supply voltage is high Not come on Not come on
DFC_SSpMonSplyMin P1603 113 Internal sensor supply voltage is low Not come on Not come on
DFC_StrtOL P0615 121 Starter drive circuit is open Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_StrtOvrTemp P0615 121 Starter drive chip is overheated Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
Starter drive circuit is short to power
DFC_StrtSCB P0617 121 Not come on failure and goes out immediately
supply short positive
after repair
DFC_StrtSCG P0616 121 Starter drive circuit is short to ground Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
DFC_SVSOL P1604 333 SVS light drive circuit is open Not come on Not come on
DFC_SVSOvrTemp P1605 333 SVS light drive chip is overheated Not come on Not come on
The SVS light drive circuit is short to
DFC_SVSSCB P1606 333 power supply positive Not come on Not come on
terminal
DFC_SVSSCG P1607 333 SVS light drive circuit short to ground Not come on Not come on
DFC_SWReset_0 P1608 118 Software reset 0 Not come on failure and goes out immediately after
repair
339
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_SWReset_1 P1609 118 Software reset 1 Not come on Not come on
DFC_SWReset_2 P160A 118 Software reset 2 Not come on Not come on
DFC_SyncAPP P2135 221 Accelerator pedal sync fault Not come on failure and goes out immediately
after repair
Two-way accelerator pedal
DFC_SyncAPPDblPotLIS P2135 221 Not come on Not come on
potentiometer and idle switch fault
DFC_SyncAPPLIS P0 0 Not come on Not come on
DFC_T50Err P2530 345 T50 signal fault Not come on Not come on
Intake air temperature sensor voltage
DFC_TCACDsSRCMax P0098 233 signal is above Not come on
the upper limit
after repair
Intake air temperature sensor voltage
DFC_TCACDsSRCMin P0097 233 signal is below Not come on
the lower limit
after repair
SCR catalyst upstream temperature
DFC_UCatUsTSRCMax P042D 448 sensor Not come on
input voltage is high
after repair
SCR catalyst upstream temperature
DFC_UCatUsTSRCMin P042C 448 sensor Not come on
input voltage is low
after repair
the error report and goes
DFC_UDCRdcAgRmn P203F 445 Urea tank level is low Not come on
repair
340
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Urea injection valve drive circuit is the failure report and goes
DFC_UDosVlvOvrTemp P3009 453 Not come on
overheated out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea injection valve low end is short to the failure report and goes
DFC_UDosVlvSCBLS P2049 453 Not come on
power supply out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea injection valve high end is open the failure report and goes
DFC_UDosVlvSCBOLHS P2049 453 Not come on
or short to power supply out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea injection valve low end is open or the failure report and goes
DFC_UDosVlvSCGOLLS P2048 453 Not come on
short to ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UDosVlvSCHS P2047 453 Urea injection valve high end is short Not come on
after repair
SCR system shutdown due to urea the failure report and goes
DFC_UHCEnfShOffWiEmp P3025 433 Not come on
heating component fault out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Backflow pipe heater feedback signal the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrBLLdFdBkPlaus P3069 461 Not come on
unreasonable failure out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
341
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_UHtrBLLdOL P3070 461 Backflow pipe heater is open Not come on
after repair
Backflow pipe heater is open or short the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrBLLdSCGOL P3071 461 Not come on
to ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Backflow pipe heater low end drive the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrBLOL P3021 461 Not come on
circuit is open out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrBLOvrTemp P3072 461 Not come on
circuit is overheated out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrBLSCB P3023 461 Not come on
circuit is short to power supply out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrBLSCG P3022 461 Not come on
circuit is short to ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Pressure pipe heater feedback signal the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrPLLdFdBkPlaus P3073 462 Not come on
unreasonable fault out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
342
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_UHtrPLLdOL P3074 462 Pressure pipe heater is open Not come on
after repair
Pressure pipe heater is open or short to the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrPLLdSCGOL P3075 462 Not come on
ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Pressure pipe heater low end drive the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrPLOL P3024 462 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrPLOvrTemp P3076 462 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrPLSCB P3027 462 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrPLSCG P3026 462 Not come on
after repair
Heater high end relay is short to power the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrRlyLdSCB P3077 463 Not come on
supply out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Heater high end relay control drive MIL light comes on after
DFC_UHtrRlyOL P3043 463 Not come on
circuit is open the failure report and goes
343
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
after repair
Heater high end relay control drive the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrRlyOvrTemp P3044 463 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrRlySCB P3045 463 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrRlySCG P3046 463 Not come on
after repair
Urea inlet pipe heater feedback signal the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrSLLdFdBkPlaus P3078 464 Not come on
unreasonable fault out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrSLLdOL P3079 464 Urea inlet pipe heater is open Not come on
after repair
Urea inlet pipe heater is open or short the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrSLLdSCGOL P3080 464 Not come on
to ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea inlet pipe heater low end drive the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrSLOL P3028 464 Not come on
after repair
344
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_UHtrSLOvrTemp P3081 464 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrSLSCB P3032 464 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrSLSCG P3031 464 Not come on
after repair
Urea supply module heater feedback the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrSMLdFdBkPlaus P3082 464 Not come on
signal reasonable fault out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrSMLdOL P3083 464 Urea supply module heater is open Not come on
after repair
Urea supply module heater is open or the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrSMLdSCGOL P3084 464 Not come on
after repair
Urea supply module heater low end the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrSMOL P3033 465 Not come on
drive circuit is open out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
345
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Supply module heater low end drive
DFC_UHtrSMOvrTemp P3085 465 circuit Not come on
is overheated
after repair
DFC_UHtrSMSCB P3037 465 Not come on
drive circuit is short to power supply out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrSMSCG P3036 465 Not come on
drive circuit is short to ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea tank heating valve drive circuit is the failure report and goes
DFC_UHtrTnkOL P3016 466 Not come on
open out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrTnkOvrTemp P3018 466 Not come on
after repair
DFC_UHtrTnkSCB P3020 466 Not come on
short to power supply out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UHtrTnkSCG P3019 466 Not come on
after repair
346
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_UPmpMotNDvt P3001 451 Urea pump speed deviation fault Not come on
after repair
Urea pump speed deviation permanent the failure report and goes
DFC_UPmpMotNDvtPerm P3086 451 Not come on
fault out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_UPmpMotNoAvl P3002 451 Urea pump is not connected Not come on
after repair
DFC_UPmpMotOL P3006 451 Urea pump control circuit is open Not come on
after repair
Urea pump control circuit is the failure report and goes
DFC_UPmpMotOvrTemp P3003 451 Not come on
after repair
Urea pump control circuit is short to the failure report and goes
DFC_UPmpMotSCB P3004 451 Not come on
power supply out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea pump control circuit is short to the failure report and goes
DFC_UPmpMotSCG P3005 451 Not come on
ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
347
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Urea pressure sensor reasonable fault 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_UPmpPPlausMax P3007 451 Not come on
（the measurement is high） out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
Urea pressure sensor reasonable fault 3 driving cycle and goes
DFC_UPmpPPlausMin P3007 451 Not come on
（the measurement is low） out after 3 driving cycles
after repair
Urea pressure sensor input voltage is the failure report and goes
DFC_UPmpPSRCMax P204D 451 Not come on
high out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea pressure sensor input voltage is the failure report and goes
DFC_UPmpPSRCMin P204C 451 Not come on
too low fault out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea control valve high end control the failure report and goes
DFC_URevVlvHSOL P3047 452 Not come on
after repair
DFC_URevVlvHSOvrTemp P3048 452 Not come on
drive circuit is overheated out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_URevVlvHSSCB P3049 452 Not come on
after repair
348
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
DFC_URevVlvHSSCG P3050 452 Not come on
drive circuit is short to ground out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea control valve low end control the failure report and goes
DFC_URevVlvOL P3010 452 Not come on
after repair
DFC_URevVlvOvrTemp P3011 452 Not come on
drive circuit is overheated out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
DFC_URevVlvSCB P3012 452 Not come on
after repair
Low-end urea control valve drive the failure report and goes
DFC_URevVlvSCG P3013 452 Not come on
after repair
Urea tank temperature sensor input the failure report and goes
DFC_UTnkTSRCMax P205D 446 Not come on
voltage is high out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
Urea tank temperature sensor input the failure report and goes
DFC_UTnkTSRCMin P205C 446 Not come on
voltage is low out after 3 driving cycle 3
after repair
349
Diesel engine
P-Code fault Flash

code DEC code
Urea tank temperature sensor signal MIL light comes on after
DFC_UTnkTVDPlausTempMax P205B 446 reasonable fault（the measurement is Not come on
high） after repair
Urea tank temperature sensor signal MIL light comes on after
DFC_UTnkTVDPlausTempMin P205B 446 reasonable fault （ the measurement Not come on
value is low） after repair
Speed is above the maximum
DFC_VehVMax P0279 224 Not come on Not come on
allowable value
DFC_VehVNplMon P2162 224 No speed signal Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
cycles after repair
DFC_VehVPlaus P0501 224 Speed is not reasonable Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
cycles after repair
Speed sensor voltage signal is above
DFC_VehVSRCHi P0503 224 Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
the upper limit
cycles after repair
Speed sensor voltage signal is below
DFC_VehVSRCLo P0502 224 Not come on cycle and goes out after 3 driving
the lower limit
cycles after repair
350
Diesel engine
Engine maintenance
 First maintenance
The first maintenance should be conducted between 2000 km and 5000 km.
 Regular maintenance
Annual maintenance（after 12 months）, which is independent of diesel

engine oil change.
 Maintenance in winter
To maintain the diesel engine operation and safe driving, maintenance in

winter should be carried out in time when the temperature starts to drop.
Select the fuel of an appropriate grade according to the ambient temperature.
Empty the water in the fuel module.
Check the cooling system and top up the coolant.
Check the electric appliance.
351
Diesel engine
Maintenance list
Work Cycle Remarks
Cooling system
Check the level Daily inspection specification
Check the function and sealing performance First maintenance and regular maintenance
Retighten the hose clamps of the cooling and intake
First maintenance
pressurization system
Check the intercooler and radiator fins for contamination Regular maintenance
Change the coolant, and check the expansion tank safety
4 years or 200000km
valve（when necessary, replace it with a new one）
Check the coolant specifications Maintenance in winter and regular maintenance
Check the belt condition and tension condition 20000km, regular maintenance
Injection system
Check the fuel level Daily inspection specification
Check the fuel system state and air tightness First maintenance and regular maintenance
Fuel module; Clean hand pump strainer, and replace the fuel According to the fuel pressure sensor reminder, the
filter element longest distance may not exceed 20,000km
Replace the fuel coarse filter element And replace the fine filter element simultaneously
Air intake and exhaust system
Check the air filter element for contamination When changing the oil
It is recommended to replace the
Replace the filter element According to the vehicle regulations filter element in time according to
the contamination situation
First maintenance, when changing the diesel engine
Check the exhaust system state, function and air tightness
oil
Cylinder head
Check the valve clearance and adjust when necessary Regular maintenance
Lubrication system
Check the oil level Daily inspection specification
Change the oil and filter element According to the oil change cycle
Electrical system
Check the starter and generator state First maintenance and regular maintenance
352
Natural gas engine
Natural gas engine

Except otherwise indicated below, all other parts are maintained same as MC engine.
Fuel
CNG used on the gas engine should comply with the requirements of ISO/FDIS 15403.
WARNING
The use of non-compliant natural gas will affect the performance of the gas
engine, which may cause the power loss or damage to the engine.
SINOTRUK only provides the paid services.
Lubricant
MT series engine after-sale special oil: SINOTRUK MT gas engine special oil 10W-40
allows the replacement of low quality level oil by high quality level oil.
Oil grade
Oil grades should be selected as follows:
20W/50 application range: -15℃ -50℃;
15W/40 application range: -20℃ -40℃;
10W/40 application range: -25℃ -40℃.
353
Natural gas engine
First maintenance and oil change cycle

First maintenance:
MT13:
Tractor: 50,000 km.
Cement mixer: 1200h.
Oil change cycle:
MT13:
Tractor: 50,000 km or 8 months, whichever comes first.
Cement mixer: 1200h.
Replace the oil filter element when changing the oil.
WARNING
- Do not check the oil level while the gas engine is running.
- Oils of different grades cannot be mixed.
- No other engine oil can be used on MT13 engine. Otherwise
the engine will be severely damaged in a short time.
354
Natural gas engine
Coolant
The MT13 series engine coolant specifications and replacement cycle are the same as those of the MC11/13 engine.
Auxiliary materials
The application parts of various auxiliary materials are given in the table below.
Gas engine auxiliary materials table
Glue grade Color Function Gluing part
Loctite 573 Anti-loose Crankshaft gear back
Loctite 270 Tighten and seal Oil hole plug of the timing gear chamber
Loctite 5900 Seal Crankcase transition plate and crankcase combination surface
Anti-seize Gray Anti-bite Exhaust pipe bolts, supercharger bolts, oxygen sensors
Note: The color of the glue may vary from different suppliers.
355
Natural gas engine
Operation precautions
To ensure the driving safety, the parts on the gas engine should be routinely checked
before use. In the event of any abnormality, go to the authorized service station
immediately for inspection and repair.
Before the gas engine is started, check the oil level and the coolant level, and check
whether the cylinder pressure meets the requirements so as to ensure normal use and
safety as well.
If the gas engine fails to be started within 5s, it should be started again at the interval of
15s.
After the gas engine is started, run it at the idle speed for 3-5 min, and the oil pressure
should be above 100kPa; when the coolant temperature is not higher than 60℃,do not
run the engine at a sudden high speed or heavy load, otherwise the reliability of the gas
engine will be affected.
Before stopping the vehicle, the gas engine under load should be reduced with load and
speed and should run at the idle speed for at least 3-5 min.
During the running-in period of the gas engine（3,000km）, it is preferred to run the
engine under the moderate load.
Maximum idling time of the vehicle is 15-20 min. It is forbidden to run the vehicle for
more than 20 min. Idling for a long time may cause carbon deposition in the engine.
356
Natural gas engine
Maintenance rules
Application conditions
WGⅠ WGⅡ WGⅢ

Poor application conditions （ cold or hot
weather, high dust content, short distance Vehicles with an annual mileage of less
transport, use on construction site, and buses, than 6×104km, short- & Vehicles with an annual mileage of
municipal buses, snowplows, fire trucks）or more than 6×104km, long-distance
medium-distance transport （ used for
Vehicles with an annual mileage of less than 2 transport
goods delivery）
x 104km or annual operating hours of less than
600hr
First inspection, routine inspection and maintenance cycle

Application conditions
WGⅠ WGⅡ WGⅢ
Item
First inspection 1000~1500km or 30~50h 1500~2000km 1500~2000km
Routine inspection（P） Every 5000km or 150h Every 1×104km Every 1.5×104km
Level 1 maintenance（WD1） Every 1×104km or 300h Every 2×104km Every 3×104km
357
Natural gas engine
Gas engine maintenance specifications

Gas engine maintenance items First inspection P WD1 WD2 WD3 WD4
According to oil change intervals under the different
Change the gas engine oil
conditions,
change the oil filter or filter element 25,000 km
Replace the low-pressure filter element ● ● ● ●
Replace the high-pressure filter element（CNG
● ● ● ●
engine）
Check the coolant capacity and fill when necessary ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change the coolant Follow the requirements in 1.3
Tighten the cooling pipe clamp ●
Tighten the air intake manifold, hose and flange
● ● ● ● ●
connections
Check the turbocharger bearing clearance ●
Electrical components and electrical control system
Check every 250 h
wire harness
Check the ignition coil rubber sleeve for cracking ● ● ● ●
Check the system pipes and fasten the pipe fittings ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cool down the circulating water pipes of the heating
Clean every 2000 h
components before cleaning
Note: ● Maintenance mark is required
358
Natural gas engine
Maintenance precautions
Spark plug
For the routine maintenance of the gas engine, make sure to check whether
the spark plug clearance meets the requirements, and replace the spark plug
according to the use condition; the recommended replacement mileage:
60000km.
Remove the spark plug after the engine has cooled down to prevent burns
and damage to the spark plug tightening threads. After the spark plug thread
is unscrewed completely, remove it with the ignition coil rubber sleeve.
When installing the spark plug, first screw the spark plug onto the cylinder
head spark plug mounting thread with the ignition coil rubber sleeve until it
contacts the gasket. Then tighten it with the spark plug mounting tool, and
tighten M14 spark plug at the torque of 25~30Nm.
At the absence of a torque wrench or the torque wrench fails to work
normally, tighten the spark plug by hand until it cannot move, and ensure
that the spark plug gasket comes into contact with the cylinder head surface.
Then tighten the spark plug as shown in the figure. MT13 engine uses M14
spark plug, and the spark plug electrode should be replaced when the
clearance is greater than 0.6mm.
359
Natural gas engine
Note: M14 big electrode spark plug used on MT13 engine is different from
that used on T10/T12 engine, and mixing them will shorten the service life of
the spark plug.
Throttle
Rinse the throttle with Loctite special cleaning agent every 20,000 km（the
failure to clean it in time will shorten the life of the throttle）, and the
cleaning positions are shown in the figure:
360
Natural gas engine
Mixer
Rinse the mixer housing with Loctite special cleaning agent every 20,000
km, and when cleaning, the mixer nozzles should be broken down and
cleaned one after one. And wipe the inner wall of the mixer to remove the
deposits attached onto inner wall.
361
Natural gas engine
Exhaust release valve
Rinse the hole with Loctite special cleaning agent every 20000 km, and the
cleaning positions are shown in the figure:
CFV（continuous flow valve）
Drain the oil, water and other impurities accumulated at the lower part of
CFV every 50,000km, and the maintenance mileage can be shortened
appropriately according to the actual gas quality. The drain positions are
shown in the figure:
362
Natural gas engine
High-pressure filter
Drain every 2000 km, and replace the filter every 10000 km. Replace
the filter element according to the operation instructions on the
high-pressure filter, and at the same time, replace the housing rubber seal
rings. The refitted filter and its connector should be checked for leakage.
WARNING
- Never maintain or drain under pressure, otherwise serious
personal injury may occur.
- Depending on the gas quality in the area where the vehicle is
used, both the drainage mileage and the filter element
maintenance mileage may be shortened appropriately.
Low pressure filter
Drain every 2000 km.
For CNG vehicles, the filter element should be replaced every 10,000 km
due to the dirty gas.
For LNG vehicles, the mileage to replace the filter element can be extended
to 30,000 km.
The sewage and filter replacement mileage can be shortened or extended
properly according to the actual situation.
363
Natural gas engine
High pressure reducer

During the operation, it is necessary to check daily whether the coolant can
be normally supplied to the engine. If the engine power is insufficient and
the high-pressure reducer is found with frosting, it indicates that the cooling
heating high pressure reducer pipe is faulty. Check whether there is a loss in
the coolant pipe which affects the flow of coolant. Insufficient heating for a
long time can cause the gas temperature to be low, damaging the high
pressure reducer and the downstream components.
MT13-CNG engine cannot use the high-pressure reducer of T10-EPR
system/T12-DEPR system engine. Otherwise CFV may be damaged due to
high adjustment pressure.
Stabilizer
MT13-LNG model is equipped with a pressure regulator.
Care should be taken to ensure that the dust cover on the regulator will not
be clogged with dust during the operation. Otherwise the pressure regulator
may produce deviation. If the dust cover is blocked, remove it and then
blow it with compressed air before refitting.
It is recommended to purge the dust cover every 2000km（the mileage can
be shortened in the muddy or dusty environment）.
364
Natural gas engine
Gas cylinder precautions ensure the vehicle safety.

CNG cylinder
LNG cylinder
During gas filling, the temperature of the gas cylinder will
Make sure to observe whether the carburetor is frosted during
increase, which can be felt obviously by hands, but is not hot.
the operation. If the frosting occurs, it indicates that the
This is because heat is released from the compressed gas during
carburetor coolant flow rate is insufficient. Check whether the
gas filling, which is a normal phenomenon. After the vehicle after
heating pipe is twisted. Otherwise the lack of the engine power
gas filling（filled to 20MPa）is put aside for a while, the pressure
may occur due to the carburetor‟s insufficiency in its
will drop, which is a normal phenomenon（due to the temperature vaporization capacity.
drop in the gas cylinder ） . For gas filling, the operation When the vehicle runs at low temperature in winter or under
procedures of CNG station should be observed strictly. The CNG heavy load for a long time, the driver can open the pressurizing
filling pressure should not be higher than 20MPa. valve to increase the pressure inside the gas cylinder and
The vehicle is out of service increase the vaporization amount of LNG. Guarantee the gas
When the CNG vehicle is out of service for more than 3 h, the engine supply and engine power. When the vehicle runs at high
driver must close the main shut-off valve and the master battery temperature in summer or under small load, the pressurizing
switch on the integrated control panel before leaving the valve should be closed.
vehicle. The pressure of the cylinder pressure regulator on MT13 engine
When the CNG vehicle is out of service for more than 24 h, the is 8.7 bar.
driver should close all the cylinder valves in addition to the
main shut-off valve and the master battery switch, so as to
365
Clutch
Clutch
Operating parameters
1. Operating medium: compressed air, DOT3/DOT4 brake fluid;
2. Maximum operating pressure: brake fluid 4MPa, air 0.85MPa;
3. Operating temperature: - 40℃~+80℃;
4. Pedal travel: total travel up to 130mm;
5. Pedal force: not more than 190N when a booster is available.
Change the clutch brake fluid:
Change cycle（no coolant change is required for first maintenance）:
Assembly Name Quality level volume Change interval mileage or time Remarks
The special after-sales coolant designated by
Clutch
Brake 160,000 km or two years, SINOTRUK must be used, otherwise the clutch
control DOT3/DOT4 0.5 L
fluid whichever comes first. and its control system may be damaged.
system
Note:
 Before filling or changing the brake fluid, check that the tank and its surroundings are clean and tighten the tank cover after filling
brake fluid.
 When changing the brake fluid, drain the residual fluid from the hydraulic system and change it with the brake fluid of the same
grade and batch.
 Brake fluid is corrosive, avoid the brake fluid from splashing on your body and vehicle paint surface.
WARNING
Oil and grease are prohibited from entering the hydraulic pipe. Otherwise the master cylinder and booster cylinder
may be damaged.
366
Clutch
Hydraulic pipe bleeding

Air in the hydraulic pipe of the clutch will reduce the effective stroke of the
booster cylinder push rod, resulting in the incomplete clutch separation and
the difficulty in shifting. Bleeding must be done after changing and filling
the brake fluid or removing the pipe. Bleeding work should be performed by
two people through cooperation. 1
Remove the dust cover on the bleed screw ① and wipe off the bleed screw
①. Connect one end of the vinyl hose to the bleed screw ① and the other 2
end into a transparent container. When bleeding, maintain an appropriate
amount of brake fluid in the tank. Tighten the bleed screw ①, keep the
clutch pedal at the bottom after depressing it for several times, unscrew the
bleed screw ①, drain the brake fluid with bubbles into the container, and
then tighten the bleed screw ①. Repeat the above operations for several
times until the bleed screw ① has no bubble. Then refit the dust cover ②
onto the bleed screw ①.
Note:
●When bleeding, make sure to release the pedal after the bleed screw is
tightened, so as to prevent the entry of air;
●The pedal should be lifted to the maximum height so that the brake fluid in
the tank can be filled into the master cylinder.
367
Clutch
Application of the clutch wear indicator

2 3 4 The clutch wear indicator is used to match the vehicle model which is
1
equipped with a pull-type clutch. Observing the position of the indicator②
can understand the clutch driven disc wear limit, so as to replace the driven
disc immediately. The clutch wear indicator is located above the clutch
booster cylinder ④ valve body.
The clearance L between the measuring rod holder ③ and the indication ②
will gradually increase along with the clutch driven disc wear. For
HW12706T and HW12710C transmission, replace the driven disc when L =
20mm; for other transmission, replace the driven disc when L = 23mm.
After installing the clutch booster cylinder ④ for the first time or replacing
the clutch driven disc, push the indicator ② along the measuring rod ①
until it contacts the measuring rod holder ③, that is initialization. Do not
move the indicator ② during the normal operation of the vehicle.
368
Clutch
Common faults and troubleshooting
Fault Cause Solution
Clean the oil stain on the clutch pressure plate,

Friction plate sticky oil
driven plate and flywheel
Clutch slip The driven disc friction plate has been worn to the
Replace the driven disc
limit position
The clutch pressure plate assembly is damaged Replace the pressure plate assembly
The clutch is not There is air in the clutch hydraulic system, and the
Empty the air in the hydraulic system
separated completely effective separation stroke is reduced
Pressure plate surface is uneven, or the diaphragm Replace the pressure plate assembly or
Clutch start jittering
separation end is uneven reassemble the release bearing
The release bearing is not fully assembled in place or

The clutch cannot be Reassemble the release bearing or replace the
the release bearing falls off due to damage of the
released release tab assembly
release tab
The clutch pedal is heavy
The clutch master cylinder seal ring comes into Replace the clutch master cylinder and change
and fails to return
expansion the brake fluid
properly
369
ZF transmission
ZF transmission
Oil product model and oil change cycle
Please see Schedule 1.
Note
○
i - Only use the oil products approved by SINOTRUK or
ZF-Ecofluid M transmission fluid specified in the latest lubricant
list TE-ML 02.
- ZF lubricant list can be obtained from any after-sales service
center or downloaded from ZF official website WWW.ZF.COM.
Amount of oil filling
The oil filling amount has been indicated on the transmission nameplate or
technical data sheet, and the provisions of oil filling amount should be followed
strictly so as to ensure the accurate amount.
WARNING
The oil change cycle should be implemented strictly, otherwise it
will affect the performance and reliability of the transmission.
370
ZF transmission
Schedule 1
Transmission oil and oil change intervals
Quality grade
Oil product Oil product and oil
Assembly and viscosity Mileage or time for first change Change interval mileage or time Remarks
name amount1）
grade
①Long-haul transport vehicles: ①Long-haul transport vehicles:
16S2230 15.5L 80,000 km or 12 months, whichever 160,000 km or 12 months,
comes first. whichever comes first.
Heavy-duty MTF
②Municipal vehicles, urban ②Municipal vehicles, urban
vehicle 85W-90
MTF Q/ZZ 21045 construction vehicles, transport construction vehicles, transport
16S2530 15.5L dump trucks and mixer trucks: dump trucks and mixer trucks:
manual or MTF
transmission 80W-90 80,000 km or 12 months, whichever 160,000 km or 12 months,
oil Q/ZZ 21045 comes first. whichever comes first.
③Mine site trucks, in-situ operating ③Mine site trucks, in-situ operating
16S2222 15L
vehicles and special vehicles: vehicles and special vehicles:
mainframe working for 1,000 h. mainframe working for 1,000 h.
①Long-haul transport vehicles:
ZF ①Long-haul transport vehicles: The oil
transmission 300,000 km or 24 months（more originally
300,000 km or 24 months（more
ramp or overload conditions: filled in the
16S2231 ramp or overload conditions:
ZF special oil 240,000 km or 24 months ）, transmission
25.5L（at 240,000 km or 24 months ） ,
Ecofluid M whichever comes first. model is
initial fill）/ whichever comes first.
or 02E grade
18.5L（at oil ②Municipal vehicles, urban provided by
List of
oil specified ②Municipal vehicles, urban ZF company,
lubricants change） construction vehicles, transport
in ZF construction vehicles, transport and the
TE-ML 02 （with dump trucks and mixer trucks:
lubricant dump trucks and mixer trucks: after-sales oil
power 240,000 km or 24 months,
table 240,000 km or 24 months, is CASTROL
TE-ML02 take-off）2） whichever comes first. SYNTRANS
16S2531 ③Mine site trucks, in-situ
③Mine site trucks, in-situ operating Z LONG
operating vehicles and special LIFE75W-80
vehicles and special vehicles:
vehicles: mainframe working for gear oil
mainframe working for 5,000 h.
5,000 h.
Note:1）The oil products and amount in the list is only for reference, and the actual amount shall prevail;
2）When ZF transmission is equipped with a NH1 PTO, the oil filling amount will remain unchanged; when equipped with a NH4 PTO, the oil filling amount is increased by 0.5L.
371
ZF transmission
Change the oil

Drain the oil
Note
○
i - Lubricants and cleaning fluids are strictly prohibited from
entering the soil, groundwater or drainage systems.
Lubricants should be collected in a suitable container and
disposed of according to the relevant requirements of the
environmental protection authority.
1 - Generally, drain the oil after the vehicle has run for a period
of time when the transmission oil features high temperature
and low viscosity.
CAUTION
Touching the hot transmission and lubricant may cause burns,
please take protective measures.
- Unscrew the transmission oil drain plug ① and collect the drained oil in a
suitable container.
- Clean the drain plug with a magnetic plug ①, install a new gasket and
tighten at the specified torque.
372
ZF transmission
Fill the oil

Fill the oil from the fillers ① and ②.
Fill the oil up to the lower edge of the fillers ① and ② or until oil spills
from the filler.
Check the oil level
WARNING
Lack of oil in the transmission can cause damage to the
transmission and the risk of accident!
1
Check the transmission oil level regularly:（weekly）
- When checking the oil level, the vehicle should be parked on a flat surface.
- Do not check the oil level immediately after the driving（the measurement
result will not be accurate）.
- The oil level check should be done after oil cooling（<40℃）.
- Unscrew the oil filling screws ① and ② and check the oil level.
- If the oil level is below the lower edge of the filler, fill the oil until it spills
from the filler.
Note
○
i Check whether the transmission has oil leakage when
checking the oil level. 2
373
ZF transmission
Oil filling and oil level check of the transmission with a Note
clutch-controlled PTO ○
i Maintenance work must be performed according
The clutch-controlled PTO will not affect the oil filling and oil to the standard structure of the transmission.
level check of the transmission. The method is same with that Drain the oil:
described above. However, depending on the PTO model, the Loosen the drain plug on the heat exchanger （ when the
oil filling amount will increase by about 0.5L. condition is satisfied）.
Fill the oil:
- Fill the oil until it spills from the filler, and tighten the filling
Maintenance of the transmission with a heat exchanger
screw at the torque of 60 Nm
- Set the transmission in neutral
- Run the engine at about 1200 rpm for 2-3 min to ensure that
the heat exchanger and the coupling pipe are filled with oil
- Stop the engine
- Fill the transmission oil again until it spills from the filler
Check the oil level:
- The engine runs at the idle speed for about 3 min
- Set the transmission in neutral
- Stop the engine
- Check the oil level according to the method for the above
ordinary transmission
374
ZF transmission
Clutch inspection
To ensure the service life and normal work of the synchronizer, ensure that
the clutch can be completely separated,
It also applies to the operation of the clutch PTO.
Steps to check whether the clutch is completely separated:
When the engine is at a normal operating temperature and at the idle speed,
depress the clutch pedal completely.
Wait for about 20 s（depending on flywheel mass and temperature）, and

engage the reverse gear slowly.
If the gear click is heard during the operation, it indicates that the clutch
should be adjusted or checked.
375
ZF transmission
Adjustment of the release valve at the clutch pedal

The clutch should be completely disengaged before the release
valve ⑤ gets control of the splitter shifting.
1 5 WARNING
If the release valve is not adjusted properly, the
splitter shifting will cause damage to the
4
synchronizer.
2 3
Check
The clutch must be adjusted according to its operation
instructions.
a "Clutch fully engaged" position
b "Clutch complete separation" position Adjust the adjusting screw on the clutch pedal so that the
c Clutch limit position
d Clutch pedal final limit release valve ⑤ can function only in the clutch limit position
① Master braking cylinder of the hydraulic clutch operating system
（c）.
② To the clutch slave cylinder
When the clutch pedal is in the position（b）, the clutch will be
③ To the splitter block relay valve
completely disengaged. In the pedal position, there should be at
④ From compressed air reservoir
⑤ Splitter block release valve least 1 mm clearance between the release valve ⑤ and the
pedal stop bolt.
376
ZF transmission
Air bleeding for transmission

During the vehicle running, the transmission oil temperature rises may result
1
in the pressure increase in the transmission. The transmission vent plug can
ensure the transmission pressure balance inside and outside.
Note
○
i Check the vent plug when checking the vehicle.
Vent plug
Always ensure that the vent plug or vent hose functions normally. The vent
plug ① must be clean, non-covered. It is forbidden to flushing the vent
plug with high-pressure water（water entry in the transmission will produce

rust）.
Vent hose
2
The vehicle to be cleaned regularly, such as milk vehicle, concrete mixer,
etc., should be equipped with a vent hose ②. The vent hose ② must be
arranged without any twisting or winding, and the hose end must be placed
in a dry area（such as the engine space or vehicle overhead space）.
377
ZF transmission
Maintenance of the compressed air system
To prevent condensate, rust or other impurities in the compressed air

reservoir from entering the control valve or shift cylinder, the compressed air
system should be serviced regularly. The compressed air reservoir must be
emptied weekly（daily in winter）.
Note
○
i The air filter and oil-water separator must also be emptied
when emptying the air reservoir.
Transmission nameplate
The transmission nameplate is mounted on the left of the transmission
（viewed from the driving direction of the vehicle）and includes the
2 following transmission information:
① Transmission assembly number
1 3
② Transmission model
③ Transmission manufacture serial number
378
SmartShift® AMT
vehicle stops, and check the oil level only when the oil level is
SmartShift® AMT
stable and the oil temperature cools down.
Operation requirements
Proper and reasonable operation of the transmission and regular
Fill the lubricant
maintenance is very important for the safe and reliable driving
To prevent the chemical reaction between different types of
of the vehicle and the service life of the transmission, please
lubricants, the lubricant to be filled should be the same with the
observe the following requirements:
original lubricant model.
Lubricant grade
Oil change cycle
The transmission must be filled with 85W/90GL-5 vehicle gear
When changing the lubricant, the original lubricant in the
oil.
transmission must be cleaned and then the filter assembly
Correct oil level
should be cleaned.
Make sure that the oil level is flush with the lower edge of the
See Schedule 2 for specific oil amount and oil change cycle
oil level sight hole. Check the oil level from the sight hole on
WARNING
the side of the housing and fill the oil until it spills from the
The transmission can be only filled with special
hole.
transmission gear oil of SINOTRUK, otherwise
Check the oil level
the transmission may be damaged. CNHIC only
Oil level should be checked regularly, and the vehicle should be
provides the paid services!
parked on a flat surface when checking the oil level. Due to the
volume expansion of hot oil, in order to prevent inaccurate
measurements, do not check the oil level immediately after the
379
SmartShift® AMT
Schedule 2
Quality Change
Oil Oil product
grade and Mileage or time for first interval
Assembly product and oil Remarks Assembly
viscosity ） change mileage or
name amount1
grade time
① Long-haul vehicles:
100,000 km or 12 months in the
1. The after-sales
With a filter 13L/13.5L high-speed condition, 80,000 km
special gear oil
Mobil or 12 months in the urban
HW25712XA/ （with designated by
Delvac condition, and 40,000 km or 6
HW25712XCA PTO））
SINOTRUK must
Synthetic months in the harsh condition2 . be used, otherwise
Gear Oil Whichever comes first the transmission
GL-5 ② Municipal vehicles, urban may be damaged.
HW 85W-90 Castrol
Gear Oil 2000-5000km construction vehicles, transport-type CNHIC only
Transmission Q/ZZ Syntrax dump trucks and mixer trucks: provides the paid
21040 Universal
80,000 km or 10 months（40,000 services.
Plus
With a filter 14L/14.5L km or 6 months in the harsh 2.Special
HW20716ACL/ （with condition）. Whichever comes first transmission oil of
Spirax S6
HW20716AL PTO） ③ Mine site trucks: different viscosity
AXME
20,000 km or 4 months （ or levels may not be
mixed.
mainframe working for 500 h）,
Note:
1）The oil products and oil amount in the list is only for reference, and the actual amount shall prevail;
2）Harsh condition means that the vehicle is seriously overloaded, and the road condition is poor with high dust;
380
Retarder
 Check the transmission oil level regularly（weekly）.

Retarder
 When checking the oil level, check whether the following
Check the oil level
parts are involved with oil leakage:
WARNING
- Transmission
The lack of oil in the transmission can cause the
- Retarder
retarder failure, the braking torque weakening or
failure. - Oil-water heat exchanger
Please enable other auxiliary brakes and contact - Related cooling pipes
a SINOTRUK service station for processing. Check the oil level:
 When checking the oil level, the retarder must be disabled  Park the vehicle on a flat surface, apply the parking brake,
before stopping the vehicle so as to ensure the correct oil and be careful not to enable the retarder.
amount in the transmission.  Loosen the overflow port plug（refer to the drain plug, filler
 Before checking the oil level in the transmission with a plug and spill plug）.
retarder, proceed as follows:
 If the oil level is below the overflow port, and continue to
-Park the vehicle on a flat surface. replenish the oil until it overflows.
- Stop the engine  Replace the gasket with a new one and tighten the overflow
- Reduce the transmission oil temperature below 40°C. port plug at the specified torque.
381
Retarder
Nameplate
 Retarder nameplate
The nameplate contains the important information on the retarder. The
1
nameplate is mounted on the side of the retarder housing. The nameplate
2 3 includes the following information:

① Retarder model ② Parts list number
4 ③ Retarder serial number ④ Ratio
 Electronic control unit EST54nameplate
EST54 important information:
⑤ Bar code, including ZF part number and serial number
⑥ EST54 ⑦ EST54 serial number
6
5 ⑧ EST54 program number ⑨ Retarder serial number
⑩ Certificate number ⑪QR code
7
8 11 The retarder serial number on the retarder nameplate and EST54 nameplate
must be identical
9
10
382
Retarder
oil temperature is still high, and the oil viscosity is low at that
Drain the oil
time.
WARNING
Drain the oil
Contact with the hot transmission or the
-Park the vehicle on a flat surface and stop the engine.
transmission oil may cause burns, please take
protective measures. -When draining the oil, loosen the transmission drain plug and
the retarder drain plug.
Note
○
i When checking the oil level, the retarder must be
-After draining the oil, clean the drain plug（with magnetism）
and replace the gasket with a new one.
disabled before stopping the vehicle so as to
ensure the correct oil amount in the transmission. -Install a new filter element.
Precautions before oil filling: -Tighten the drain plug finally.
-Prepare a suitable lubricant collection container（drain the Note:

lubricant according to the environmental requirements）.
Tighten the drain plug at the torque specified in the data sheet,
-Please change the oil after a long driving distance because the otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
383
Retarder
Oil drain plug, filler plug and spill plug

4
① Transmission drain plug
② Retarder drain plug
1 ③ Oil suction filter element

3
2 ④ Install the filter element bolt
5
⑤ Oil overflow port and oil changing/filling port
⑥ Oil filler after repair
384
Retarder
Replacement of the filter element

First drain the oil and then replace the filter element.
Install a new filter element after oil change. 3
CAUTION
Contact with the hot transmission or the transmission oil may
cause burns, please take protective measures. 4
Ecosplit transmission
- Release the oil suction filter element ③ and fix the bolt ④.
Note
There will be some residual oil in the retarder!
3
- Remove the oil suction filter element ③.
- Lubricate the new O-ring（3.1）on the new filter element ③.

3.
- Insert the new filter element into the retarder housing. 1
- Fix the filter element ③ and tighten the bolt ④（tightening torque 23±2
Nm）.
385
Retarder
Fill the oil
Fill the oil after a regular oil change
- Fill the oil and check the oil level after the vehicle is parked on a flat surface
and the engine is stopped.
- For the vehicle with a transverse transmission, fill the oil after the transmission
is placed horizontally, otherwise the oil filling amount will not be accurate.
- Use a new filter element after oil change.
- See the table below for oil product grade and oil change cycle.
- The specified filling amount is for reference only and the actual filling amount
may vary depending on the type of transmission and the mounting angle.
- Please see the table below for the filling amount and the tightening torque.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, the filling amount should take into
account the PTO.
- If the heat exchanger and retarder are installed separately, please take into
account the oil amount in the connecting pipe.
386
Retarder
-Loosen the spill plug ⑤.
- Fill the oil from spill plug ⑤ until it overflows.

- Install the gasket and tighten the spill plug.
- Test run the vehicle（at a speed of at least 10 km/h for at least 1 minute）.
When starting the vehicle, run the retarder for a short time（top gear）and
then cancel it（return to "0" position）.
- Stop the engine
- Loosen the spill plug ⑤.
- Check the oil level and fill when necessary until it overflows.
a Please check the oil level below 40℃.
b The correct oil level should be at the bottom of the spill, where the oil just
spills out.
5
- After replacing the gasket with a new one, tighten the spill plug.
Note:
○
i Check the oil level after test running, so as to ensure an
accurate filling amount; if the vehicle is equipped with a split
heat exchanger, test run the vehicle for 5 min before checking
the oil level so as to prevent the heat exchanger from idling.
387
Retarder
Fill the oil after maintenance

- The transmission oil filling and oil level check should be done after the
vehicle is parked on a flat surface and the engine is stopped.
- For the vehicle with a transverse transmission, the transmission must be
placed in a horizontal position before oil filling.
- Oil product grade and oil change cycle are the same with the conventional
oil filling and oil change mentioned above.
- The specified filling amount is for reference only and the actual filling
amount may differ depending on the type of transmission and the mounting
6 angle.
- The filling amount and the tightening torque are the same with the
conventional oil filling and oil change mentioned above.
- In addition, if the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, the filling amount
should take into account the PTO.
- If the heat exchanger and retarder are installed separately, please take into
account the oil amount in the connecting pipe.
- Loosen the spill plug ⑥.
- Fill oil from the spill plug ⑥ until it overflows.
- Install the gasket and tighten the spill plug ⑥.
- Test run the vehicle（at a speed of at least 10 km/h for at least 1 minute）.
- When starting the vehicle, run the retarder for a short time（top gear）.
- Cancel the retarder function（return to "0" position）.
- Stop the engine
388
Retarder
WARNING
The lack of oil in the transmission can cause damage to the
transmission and the risk of accidents.
The lack of oil in the transmission can cause the retarder
failure, the braking torque weakening or failure. Please
enable other auxiliary braking devices and request help from
SINOTRUK service station.
- Loosen the spill plug ⑤.
- Check the oil level and fill when necessary until it overflows.
- Please check the oil level below 40℃.
- The correct oil level should be at the bottom of the spill, where the oil just
spills out.
- After replacing the gasket with a new one, tighten the spill plug.
ATTENTION! 5
Check the oil level after vehicle driving, so as to ensure an accurate
filling amount; if the vehicle is equipped with a split heat exchanger, test
run the vehicle for 5 min before checking the oil level so as to prevent
the heat exchanger from idling.
389
Retarder
Engine coolant
Fill the engine coolant as specified in the instructions of the engine,
otherwise the oil-water heat exchanger may be damaged
Low or zero pressure in the cooling system can cause the cavitation of the
heat exchanger（resulting in internal leakage）
Regularly check the engine coolant, and change the coolant immediately
according to the instructions of the engine
2 Drain the residual coolant
CAUTION
1 Touching a hot transmission or engine coolant may cause
burns, please take protective measures.
The residual coolant should be drained only when removing the temperature
sensor
- Loosen the bolt ①
- Remove the temperature sensor ②
- After draining the coolant, replace the O-ring with a new one and refit the
temperature sensor and tighten the bolts with tightening torque of 9.5±1Nm
Retarder vent
The inside and outside pressure difference in the operating process of the
retarder can be balanced via the transmission vent plug.
The positions of the vent plugs may vary from the different transmissions,
please refer to the transmission manual.
390
Retarder
SmartShift○ AMT optional hydraulic retarder

R
Voith retarder oil

 Voith hydraulic retarder adopts "VR Fluid S 10W-40 gasoline engine oil"
as lubricating oil; Filling amount is 6.8L;
 The aftermarket special oil is "the Great Wall brand jinjixing /SL 5w-40
gasoline engine oil of sinopec". The initial filling amount is 6.8L; The filling
amount when changing oil for maintenance is 6.4L.
Oil change interval
 The recommended oil replacement cycle of Voith hydraulic retarder for
initial assembly and aftersale service is the same.
 Recommended oil replacement cycle for tractor and cargo truck is
Note
65000km or 24 months, whichever comes first.
Maintenance operations during the period of replacing oil each time
○
i -When changing the oil, the vehicle
should be parked in a horizontal
position and the parking brake
 Check visually whether retarder leaks oil before replacing oil.
should be implemented.
 Fasten plugs and heat exchanger of retarder basic parts as per specified -The oil temperature is required to
torque. reach the operating temperature
（greater than 60℃）.
Draining oil
-Turn off the retarder and turn off
 Put a container under the retarder. the key switch.
391
Retarder
CAUTION
2 1 Make sure the retarder and key switch are off.
The oil and screw plugs are hot! May cause burns. Please be
cautious and wear protective gear such as gloves if necessary.
 Unscrew the screw plug ① together with the gasket ②.
 Unscrew the screw plug ③, the sealing ring 4 and the O-ring ⑤.
 Drain the oil into the container and analyze the oil.
If the oil contains water, check the heat exchanger. If there are particles
（debris）in the oil, please contact Voith.
4
5
3
392
Retarder
 Apply the silicone-free and non-corrosive grease to a new O-ring ⑤ and
install it on the plug ③.
 Apply the silicone-free and non-corrosive grease to a new gasket ④.
 Screw in the oil drain plug ③ together with the gasket ④ and tighten
（tightening torque 30 Nm）.

4
5
3
Filling oil
 Slowly fill 4L oil through the oil filler plug hole（more than 2 minutes）,
2 1
and ensure that the retarder can be exhausted through the oil hole.
 Apply the silicone-free and non-corrosive grease to a new gasket ②.
 Screw in the oil filler plug ① together with the gasket ② and tighten
（tightening torque 130 Nm）.
393
Retarder
The arrow in the figure shows the fuel filler.
WARNING
Only use oil, lubricants and accessories approved by

SINOTRUK to ensure the safety of the vehicle and the
function of the retarder.
SINOTRUK only provides paid services due to changing the

retarder or changing the oil and lubricant used, and the
damage caused by parts, accessories, attachments and special
equipment not approved by SINOTRUK.
394
Front axle
Front axle
Structure overview
HF7/9, H153 drum-type front axle is provided with the forged I-Beam,
integral steering knuckle, drum brake, diaphragm brake chamber, optional
adjusting arm and.
Brake clearance（manual adjusting arm）: 0.4mm~0.7mm.
HR7/9, VPD085QB disc-type front axle is provided with the forged I-beam,
integral steering knuckle, disc brake, diaphragm brake chamber and front
axle assembly with optional ABS.
395
Front axle
Grease amount  The brake clearance adjusting arm should be filled with
 The hub bearing grease should be Great Wall HP-R extreme grease.
pressure lithium complex grease, and universal 2# lithium VPD085QB front axle
grease for the rest. The grease should be filled at an appropriate  The amount of grease for each kingpin: about 0.05kg of
amount, and the spilled grease will damage the corresponding grease should be filled into the upper and lower nipples.
parts（brake pad, brake disc surface, rubber parts, etc.）. grease Operation and maintenance
should be applied onto the lever ball before installing the brake  Before the operation of a new vehicle, fill each nipple with an
chamber. appropriate amount of 2# universal lithium grease.
HF7/9 front axle  After 1500 km running-in of the new vehicle, readjust the
 The amount of grease for each hub: a total of about 0.62kg at axle brake clearance, and check the fasteners（except adhesive
the wheel hub cavity and two bearings. bolt）before the vehicle is put into operation.
 The amount of grease for each brake camshaft and kingpin:  Fill each nipple with 2# universal lithium grease every
about 0.38kg. 2,000km.
 The brake clearance adjusting arm should be filled with  Wheel nuts and tie rod ball tightening nuts should be checked
grease. before a trip.
HR7/9 front axle  Every 8000～10,000 km, check the brake plate fastening
 The amount of grease for each hub: a total of about 0.62kg at condition; check the hub bearing loose condition; check the
the wheel hub cavity and two bearings. brake friction plate wear, and if the wear exceeds the limit,
 The amount of grease for each kingpin: about 0.06kg. replace the friction plate immediately.
H153 front axle
 The amount of grease for each brake camshaft and kingpin:
about 0.38kg.
396
Front axle
Drum brakes: - When repairing and replacing, the left and right self-adjusting
 Vehicle equipped with automatic slack adjusters: arms of each axle should be from the same manufacturer. If
- For road vehicles, every 30,000 kilometers or 6 months only one side of the automatic slack adjuster fails and there is
（whichever comes first）, 2# lithium grease should be added to no replacement of the automatic slack adjuster of the same
the automatic slack adjusters. manufacturer, the two left and right automatic slack adjusters of
- When it is felt that the brake is weak, it is recommended to the whole axle should be replaced at the same time.
detect the counterclockwise torque of the hex head of the  Vehicle without automatic slack adjusters: Check and adjust
automatic slack adjuster. Rotating a circle, if the measured the brake clearance every 5,000 km, which should be
minimum torque is less than 18Nm, it indicates that the 0.4mm-0.7mm.
self-adjusting arm is damaged, and the self-adjusting arm Disc brakes:
assembly should be replaced in time. Check the wear of the  For every 2,000 km of travel, visually observe the wear of the
connecting sleeve fixing hole on the control arm of the brake shoes and brake discs without disassembling the tires. If
automatic slack adjuster. If the fixing pin and the connecting the wear is severe, remove the tire to measure the thickness of
sleeve are loosely matched due to the excessive wear, the the brake shoe and brake disc. When the thickness of the brake
connecting sleeve needs to be replaced. shoe is worn to ≤12mm, the brake shoe should be replaced
- Check the tightening of the brake base plate every 8,000 to immediately. When the thickness of the brake disc is worn to
10,000 kilometers, and check whether the hub bearing is loose. ≤37mm, the brake disc should be replaced immediately.
Check the wear of the friction lining. If the friction lining wears  If the brake wear alarm is installed in the vehicle, when the
beyond the limit dent, replace the friction lining. brake wear alarm indicator on the driver's display is lit, the
- The adjustment range of the brake gap for assembling the brake shoe and electronic wear alarm device should be replaced
automatic slack adjuster is 0.6-0.95mm, and the difference in time.
between the left and right sides of one axle should not exceed  Avoid braking or long-term mopping before the vehicle
0.2mm. reaches 50 km after assembling the new brake shoes.
397
Front axle
The recommended driven axle grease and grease change cycle

Quality
Oil
grade and ） Mileage or time for first Change interval mileage
Assembly product Grease amount1 Remarks
viscosity change or time
name
grade
One-sided ① Long-haul vehicles: ① Long-haul vehicles:

H153,
minimum 100,000 km or 12 100,000 km or 12
6.5t
filling months in the months in the 1. The special
intermediate
amount high-speed condition; high-speed condition; after-sales grease
support shaft
555g 80,000 km or 12 months 80,000 km or 12 months designated by
in the urban condition in the urban condition SINOTRUK must
（ 40,000 km or 6 （ 40,000 km or 6 be used, otherwise
HP-R months in the harsh months in the harsh the hub bearings of
extreme ））
condition2 ）; condition2 ）; the driven axle may
Driven axle Vehicle pressure
Whichever comes first Whichever comes first be damaged.
Hub bearing grease lithium HF7
complex HF9
One-sided ②Municipal vehicles, ②Municipal vehicles, SINOTRUK only
minimum provides the paid
grease HR7 urban construction urban construction
filling services.
HR9 vehicles, transport dump vehicles, transport dump
amount 2. The special
8t rear support trucks, mixer trucks: trucks, mixer trucks:
625g grease cannot be
axle 80,000 km or 10 months 80,000 km or 10 months
mixed with other
（ 40,000 km or 6 （ 40,000 km or 6
greases.
months in the harsh months in the harsh
））
condition2 ）, whichever condition2 ）, whichever
comes first. comes first.
Note:
1）The amount of grease in the table is for reference only, and the actual amount shall prevail;
2）Harsh condition means that the vehicle is seriously overloaded and the road condition is poor with high dust;
398
Front axle
Rear steering lift shaft

Structure overview
The support shaft of rear steering lift shaft is provided with cast steel I-beam,
integral steering knuckle, drum brake, diaphragm spring brake chamber,
adjusting arm and optional ABS and have the rated load of 8t.
Grease amount
 The amount of grease for each hub: a total of about 0.62kg at the wheel
hub cavity and two bearings.
 The amount of grease for each brake camshaft and kingpin: about 0.38kg.
 The brake clearance adjusting arm should be filled with grease.
Operation and maintenance of rear steering lift shaft
 Before the operation of a new vehicle, fill each nipple with an appropriate
amount of 2# lithium grease.
 For a new vehicle, depress the brake pedal for 20-30 times to adjust the
brake clearance to the normal clearance. Before 50 km, try to avoid depress
the brake pedal suddenly or depress it for a long time.
 After 1500 km running-in of the new vehicle, readjust the axle brake
clearance, and check the fasteners（except adhesive bolt）before the vehicle is
put into operation.
 Wheel nuts and tie rod ball tightening nuts should be checked before a trip.
399
Front axle
 Every 30,000 km（5,000 km for off-road vehicles and cement mixers）, fill
the adjusting arm with 2# lithium grease. It is recommended to detect the
anticlockwise torque of the adjusting arm hexagon head when the braking
force is weak. Rotate the adjusting arm for one circle, and if the measured
minimum torque is less than 18Nm, it indicates that the adjusting arm has
been damaged, and the adjusting arm assembly should be replaced in time.
Check the wear of the connecting sleeve fixing hole on the control arm of
the adjusting arm, and the excessive wear will cause the loose fitting
between the fixing pin and the connecting sleeve. In this case, the
connecting sleeve should be replaced.
 Check the tightening of the brake base plate every 8,000 to 10,000
kilometers, and check whether the hub bearing is loose. Check the wear of
the friction lining. If the friction lining wears beyond the limit dent, replace
the friction lining.
 The adjustment range of the brake gap for assembling the automatic slack
adjuster is 0.6-0.95mm, and the difference between the left and right sides of
one axle should not exceed 0.2mm.
 If only one side of the automatic slack adjuster fails and there is no
replacement of the automatic slack adjuster of the same manufacturer, the
two left and right automatic slack adjusters of the whole axle should be
replaced at the same time.
400
Rear lift axle
Rear lift axle

Structure overview
Rear lift axle assembly is designed with the overall shaft tubes and is
provided with QP22 disc brake. The wheel bearing features the
maintenance-free unit structure and high reliability and good stability and
has the rated load of 10t.
Operation and maintenance of rear lift shaft
 For a new vehicle, depress the brake pedal for 20-30 times to adjust the
brake clearance to the normal clearance.
 After 1500 km running-in of the new vehicle, check the fasteners（except
adhesive bolt）before the vehicle is put into operation.
 Check the wheel nuts before a trip.
 Check the brake regularly, and the brake pad assembly should be replaced
when it is worn to the limit. The brake pad assemblies on left and right sides
of the axle should be replaced simultaneously. Adjust to the initial brake
clearance 1.5~2.0mm after replacement, then depress the brake pedal for
20-30 times and adjust to the normal clearance.
 If the brake wear alarm is installed in the vehicle, when the brake wear
alarm indicator on the driver's display is lit, the brake shoe and electronic
wear alarm device should be replaced in time.
 Avoid braking or long-term mopping before the vehicle reaches 50 km
after assembling the new brake shoes.
401
Drive axle
Drive axle
STR drive axle
Structure overview
STR rear drive axle is the two-stage drive axle with the central primary
reducer and wheel planetary reducer. It can be divided into the tandem drive
axle and single rear drive axle according to the different drive modes. It
features the steel plate stamping or casting axle housing and is provided with
intershaft/inter-axle differential and differential lock. The rated load can be
divided into 13T and 16T according to the different axle housings.
Axle maintenance
Refer to the table below for the gear oil change cycle under the different
conditions:
Oil Quality level Recommended First change

Change interval mileage
Assembly product and suppliers and product Oil product volume mileage Remarks
or time
Name viscosity level specifications or time
Mobilube HD 21L Long-haul transport The special
80W-90 （Intermediate vehicles: 100,000 km or after-sales
GL-5 ST13
Castrol Syntrax axle） 10 months, whichever gear oil
80W-90 18.5L（rear axle） comes first. designated by
Universal 80W-90
Spirax S2 A 80W-90 Municipal vehicles, urban SINOTRUK
construction must be used,
Gear 2000-5000k
STR Axle vehicles,transport dump otherwise the
Oil 23L m
ST16 trucks and mixer trucks: drive axle may
Mobilube HD-A （Intermediate 80,000 km or 10 months, be damaged.
GL-5 /
85W-90 axle）
85W-90 HC16 whichever comes first. SINOTRUK
Castrol/Shell 20.5L（rear axle） Mine site trucks: 25,000 only provides
km or 5 months, the paid
whichever comes first. services.
Note: 1）The oil in the table is for reference only. Please refer to the actual usage.
402
Drive axle
direction. Open the filler plug and drain the excessive oil until
Maintain an appropriate amount of lubricant, and often check
the level retains at the filling lug, and finally refit the filler
the oil amount of the wheel reducer and final drive.
plug.
Lack of oil can cause early wear of moving parts, and even
There are two plugs on the rear axle housing: There is a drain
cause severe burn-out. However, more lubricant does not mean
plug at the bottom of the axle housing and there is a filler plug
better effect, because excessive lubricant will cause high
on the central half of the axle housing. The normal level should
temperature and even oil leakage.
always be at the height of the filler plug.
When a new vehicle comes with the initial maintenance to
change the lubricant of the wheel reducer, the wheel should be
rotated to the bottom of the drain plug when filling new oil, Brake clearance adjustment
while the filler plug will be opened on the top. Open the drain
plug to drain the old oil, then install the drain plug and open the Item Parameter
filler plug, fill the oil to the high level, and then screw in the Clearance between brake shoe and brake
0.4-0.7
drum（mm）
filler plug. Rotate the wheel for several circles and then rotate
the wheel until the oil level of the filler plug is in the horizontal
403
Drive axle
MCY11/MCY13/MCY13Q drive axle

Structure overview
MCY series drive axle structure features the central single-stage final drive,
stamping welded axle housing and precision forged differential gear, and is
provided with oil filter, adjustment-free hub bearing unit, drum or disc brake,
double diaphragm brake chamber and optional ABS.
404
Drive axle
Axle maintenance
Refer to the table below for the gear oil change cycle under the different conditions:
Quality Recommended
Oil
level and suppliers and First change mileage Change interval mileage or
Assembly product Oil product volume Remarks
viscosity product or time time
Name
level specifications
① Long-haul vehicles: ① Long-haul vehicles:

Mobilube HD 17.5L 1. The special
In the high-speed condition,
100,000 km or 12 months in the
80W-90 （Intermedia after-sales gear
100,000 km or 12 months;
high-speed condition; 80,000
Castrol MCY11 te axle） oil designated
In the urban condition,
km or 12 months in the urban
GL-5 Syntrax by
12 80,000 km or 12 months
condition （ 40,000 km or 6
80W-90 Universal SINOTRUK
（Rear axle）（40,000 km or 6 months in
months in the harsh condition）,
80W-90 must be used,
Spirax S2 A whichever comes first. the harsh condition ） ,
otherwise the
80W-90 ②Municipal vehicles, urban whichever comes first. drive axle may
MCY
series
Gear construction vehicles, ② Municipal vehicles, be damaged.
Oil transport-type dump trucks urban construction vehicles, SINOTRUK
drive axle
18L and mixer trucks: transport-type dump trucks only provides
（Intermedia 80,000 km or 10 months and mixer trucks: the paid
MCY13/ services.
Mobilube te axle）（40,000 km or 6 months in 80,000 km or 10 months
GL-5 MCY13Q 2. Special gear
HD-A 85W-90 14.5L the harsh condition ） , （40,000 km or 6 months in
85W-90 oil of different
Castrol/Shell （Rear axle） whichever comes first. the harsh condition ） ,
viscosity levels
③ Mine site trucks: whichever comes first.
may not be
20,000 km or 4 months, ③ Mine site trucks: mixed.
whichever comes first. 20,000 km or 4 months,
Note: 1）The amount of grease in the table is for reference only, and the actual amount shall prevail;
405
Drive axle
being loosened to cause the rupture of half-shaft bolts.

•When a new axle is put into operation, the vehicle must
undergo 1,500 km running-in and the fasteners（except adhesive •Check and clean the vent plug regularly.
bolt）must be checked again before the vehicle is put into Drum brake:
operation.
•For manual clearance adjusting arm, check the brake clearance
•Check the oil level every 5,000 km or on a monthly basis. （ 0.4mm~0.7mm ） every 5000km; for automatic clearance
•Change the lubricant of the adjusting arm and camshaftevery adjusting arm, fill the adjusting arm with 2# lithium grease
80,000 km or on a yearly basis. Fill the adjusting arm with 2# every 30,000km（5,000km for off-road vehicles and cement
lithium grease every 20,000 km（5,000 km for off-road vehicles mixers）. It is recommended to detect the anticlockwise torque
and cement mixers） of the adjusting arm hexagon head when the braking force is
weak. Rotate the adjusting arm for one circle, and if the
•Often check and remove the dirt or dust on the vent plug of
measured minimum torque is less than 18Nm, it indicates that
rear axle housing, check the filler plug and drain plug, and in
the adjusting arm has been damaged, and the adjusting arm
the event of oil seepage or leakage, tighten or replace the plug
assembly should be replaced in time. Check the wear of the
immediately.
connecting sleeve fixing hole on the control arm of the
•Since the half-shaft flange is involved with high transmission adjusting arm, and the excessive wear will cause the loose
torque and impact load, the fastening of the half shaft bolts fitting between the fixing pin and the connecting sleeve. In this
should be checked frequently so as to prevent the bolts from case, the connecting sleeve should be replaced.
406
Drive axle
•Every 8000~10000 km, check the fastening of the brake plate, remove the tire to measure the thickness of the brake pad and
and check the hub bearing for looseness; check the friction brake disc. When the brake pad wear thickness ≤ 12mm, the
plate for wear, and the friction plate should be replaced brake pad should be replaced immediately; when the brake disc
immediately if its wear exceeds the limit. wear thickness≤ 37mm, the brake disc should be replaced
immediately.
The adjustment range of the brake gap for assembling the
automatic slack adjuster is 0.6-0.95mm, and the difference •If the brake wear alarm is installed in the vehicle, when the
between the left and right sides of one axle should not exceed brake wear alarm indicator on the driver's display is lit, the
0.2mm. If only one side of the automatic slack adjuster fails brake shoe and electronic wear alarm device should be replaced
and in time.
Drive axle •Avoid sudden braking or long-time wear before the new brake
pad undergoes the mileage of 50 km.
there is no replacement of the automatic slack adjuster of the
same manufacturer, the two left and right automatic slack WARNING
adjusters of the whole axle should be replaced at the same time.
The special drive axle gear oil designated by
Disc brake: SINOTRUK must be used, otherwise the drive
axle may be damaged. SINOTRUK only provides
•Visually check the brake pad and brake disc for wear every
the paid services!
2000 km without removing the tires. In the event of high wear,
407
Drive axle
Inspection and maintenance

Inspection and maintenance cycle
（Mileage and time, whichever comes first）
Inspection and maintenance items
Regular inspection and
First inspection
maintenance
Every 15,000 Every 60,000
After 1500 km Every 120,000
km km
Regular inspection items After the first km
Every three Every six
month Every year
months months
Inspection of the wear, sealing and damage of moving parts,
inspection of wear of the brake lining, inspection of
● ● ● ●
camshaft return state, functional inspection of the adjusting
arm, functional and sealing inspection of the brake chamber
Safety inspection（daily）
Proper adjustment and inspection of the brake ● ● ● ●
Inspection of the brake operation ● ● ● ●
● ●
Tighten the bolts again at the specified torque
●
Clean the brake
●
Apply anti-seize agent onto the brake shoe pin and roller
Check the hub bearing rotation state, and adjust or replace ●
●
the hub bearing when necessary
 When the vehicle runs in the harsh conditions, the maintenance cycle can be shortened accordingly.
 After the vehicle that is installed with new wheels or is involved with wheel rotation runs for 50 km, the wheel nuts should be tightened
at the specified torque; after 150 km, the wheel nuts should be tightened again at the specified torque until the nut is fastened.
408
Drive axle
MCP16 drive axle

Structure overview
MCP16 drive axle is the two-stage drive axle with the central primary
reducer and wheel planetary reducer. It can be divided into the tandem drive
axle and single rear drive axle according to the different drive modes. It
features the casting axle housing and is provided with intershaft/inter-axle
differential and differential lock, drum brake, double diaphragm brake
chamber, addition filter and optional ABS.
Axle maintenance
Refer to the table below for the gear oil change cycle under the different
conditions:
Oil Quality level Recommended First change

Oil product
Assembly product and viscosity suppliers and product mileage or Change interval mileage or time Remarks
volume
Name level specifications time
① Long-haul vehicles:
1. The special after-sales
In the high-speed condition, 100,000 km or
gear oil designated by
Drive 12 months;
SINOTRUK must be
axle 20.4L In the urban condition, 80,000 km or 12
Mobil Delvac used, otherwise the drive
gear oil （Intermed months（40,000 km or 6 months in the harsh
MCP16 Synthetic Gear Oil axle may be damaged.
of GL-5 MC iate axle） condition）, whichever comes first.
series Castrol Syntrax 2000-5000km SINOTRUK only
heavy-d 85W-90 P16 18.4L ②Municipal vehicles, urban construction
drive axle Universal Plus provides the paid
uty （Rear vehicles, transport-type dump trucks and mixer
Spirax S6 AXME services.
vehicles axle） trucks:
2. Special gear oil of
GL-5 80,000 km or 10 months（40,000 km or 6
different viscosity levels
months in the harsh condition）, whichever
may not be mixed.
comes first.
Note: 1）The amount of grease in the table is for reference only, and the actual amount shall prevail;
409
Drive axle
•After the new axle is put into operation, the vehicle must runs for 5km, stop the vehicle and check oil level gain. If the
undergo 1,500 km running-in and the fasteners（including but oil level is low, fill the oil again until the oil level reaches the
not limited to the connecting bolts between drive shaft and limit on the axle housing（see the figure below）and oil begins
flange, wheel bolts, joint bolts between final drive and axle to drip.
housing, U-bolts, etc., except adhesive bolts）must be checked •Fill 2# lithium grease into the nipples of the adjusting arm,
again before the vehicle is put into operation. camshaft bracket and brake lining every 80,000 km or on a
•During the operation of the vehicle, the drive axle and wheel yearly basis（20000 km or 4 months in the harsh condition）.
reducer temperature（no more than the ambient temperature of Fill the adjusting arm with 2# lithium grease every 20000 km.
70℃ ） and the connection between various components •Regularly check the filler/drain plugs on the wheel reducer,
（connecting bolts between drive shaft and flange, wheel bolts, final drive and axle housing, and re-tighten them when
necessary. Tighten the filler/drain plug at the torque of
joint bolts between final drive and axle housing）should be
100±10Nm, and tighten the remaining plugs at the torque of
checked regularly, and also should be checked every 2000km
35±10Nm.
and should be tightened again when necessary.
•Do not assemble and disassemble repeatedly so as to prevent
•Check the oil level every 5,000 km or on a monthly basis.
any damage to the plug thread, and the damaged plug should be
•Drain the gear oil left in the intermediate and rear axles before
replaced immediately.
filling the new oil. Make sure to fill an appropriate amount of
•The vent plug should be checked and cleaned regularly to
oil. First of all, fill 2.8L gear oil into two wheel reducers
ensure good ventilation.
respectively, and then fill the gear oil into the middle of the
•Regularly check the differential lock condition, and if not in a
axle housing. After the vehicle that is filled with new gear oil
good condition, find out the cause and get it repaired in time.
410
Drive axle
 Check the anticlockwise torque of the arm screw hexagon head when the
braking force is weak. Rotate the adjusting arm for one circle, and if the
measured minimum torque is less than 18Nm, it indicates that the adjusting
arm has been damaged, and the adjusting arm assembly should be replaced
in time. Check the wear of the connecting sleeve fixing hole on the control
arm of the adjusting arm, and the excessive wear will cause the loose fitting
between the fixing pin and the connecting sleeve. In this case, the
connecting sleeve should be replaced.
 When install a new adjusting arm, first connect the push rod between the
adjusting arm and brake chamber with a wrench（Note: Do not use an

electric wrench or pneumatic drill!）Rotate the adjusting arm screw
hexagon head clockwise until the friction plate comes into contact with the
brake drum, and then rotate the adjusting arm screw hexagon head
anticlockwise for 3/4 circle. And then apply the brake for several times, and
the brake clearance will be adjusted automatically to the normal range. The
adjustment function can be observed when the screw hexagon head rotates
automatically in the clockwise direction at the end of braking.
411
Drive axle
 During the normal driving, there should have a certain clearance
（0.5~1.0mm）between the brake pad and brake drum, and the difference in
the clearance between the shoe and brake drum on the left and right sides
should be no more than 0.3mm. A wide clearance will affect the braking
effect, and a narrow clearance will produce overheat. The adjusting arm
must be used properly.
 Every 8000~10000 km, check the fastening of the brake lining, check the
hub bearing for looseness; check the friction plate for wear. If the friction
plate wear exceeds the limit as shown in the figure, the friction plate should
be replaced immediately. The brakes on left and right sides should be
replaced with the friction plates of the same batch.
WARNING
The special drive axle gear oil designated by SINOTRUK must be

used, otherwise the drive axle may be damaged. SINOTRUK only
provides the paid services!
412
Drive axle
Inspection and maintenance
Inspection and maintenance cycle

（Mileage and time, whichever comes first）
Inspection and maintenance items
Regular inspection and
First inspection
maintenance
Every 15,000 Every 60,000
After 1500 km Every 120,000
km km
Regular inspection items After the first km
Every three Every six
month Every year
months months
Inspection of the wear, sealing and damage of moving parts,
inspection of wear of the brake lining, inspection of
● ● ● ●
camshaft return state, functional inspection of the adjusting
arm, functional and sealing inspection of the brake chamber
Safety inspection（daily）
Proper adjustment and inspection of the brake ● ● ● ●
Inspection of the brake operation ● ● ● ●
Tighten the bolts again at the specified torque ● ●
Clean the brake drum ●
Apply anti-seize agent onto the brake shoe pin and roller ●
Check the hub bearing rotation state, and adjust or replace
● ●
the hub bearing when necessary
 When the vehicle runs in the harsh conditions, the maintenance cycle can be shortened accordingly.
 After the vehicle that is installed with new wheels or is involved with wheel rotation runs for 50 km, the wheel nuts should be
tightened at the specified torque; after 150 km, the wheel nuts should be tightened again at the specified torque until the nut is
fastened.
 When installing or replacing the wheels, make sure to prevent the brake drum from falling off.
413
Drive axle
AC16 drive axle

Refer to the table below for the gear oil change cycle under the different conditions:
Quality
Oil First change
level and Recommended suppliers and Oil product Change interval mileage
Assembly product mileage Remarks
viscosity product specifications volume or time
Name or time
level
Long-haul transport
Mobilube HD 80W-90 vehicles: 100,000 km or
1. The special after-sales
GL-5 Castrol Syntrax Universal 10 months, whichever
gear oil designated by
80W-90 80W-90 comes first.
21L SINOTRUK must be
Shell Spirax S2 A 80W-90 Municipal vehicles, urban
（Intermediate used, otherwise the drive
construction vehicles,
AC16 axle may be damaged.
Gear Oil axle） 2000-5000km transport dump trucks and
axle SINOTRUK only
17.5.5L mixer trucks: 80,000 km
provides the paid services.
（Rear axle） or 10 months, whichever
2. Special gear oil of
GL-5 Mobilube HD-A 85W-90 comes first.
85W-90 Castrol/Shell different viscosity levels
Mine site trucks: 25,000
may not be mixed.
km or 5 months,
Brake clearance adjustment
Item Parameter
Clearance between brake shoe and brake drum（mm） 0.4-0.7
Lubricant（grease）and filling amount
Lubricating parts Lubricant（grease） Consumption

Brake clearance adjusting arm and camshaft Universal lithium grease for 1# vehicle Fill the oil until it spills
414
Drive axle
reducer temperature（no more than the ambient temperature of

 Regularly check the oil level of the final drive and the wheel
reducer, and fill when necessary. Gear oil should be changed 70 ℃ ） and the connection between various components
during the first compulsory maintenance after 2000-4000km, （connecting bolts between drive shaft and flange, wheel bolts,
and then gear oil should be changed every 10,000km. joint bolts between final drive and axle housing）should be
 Regularly check the differential lock condition, and if not in a checked regularly, and also should be checked every 2000km
good condition, find out the cause and get it repaired in time. and should be tightened again when necessary.
 Operate the inter-axle and inter-wheel differentials properly.  Regularly clean the vents to ensure good ventilation.
Regularly check the filler/drain plugs on the wheel reducer,
 For oil change, the intermediate and rear axles should be
final drive and axle housing, and tighten them when necessary.
filled with an appropriate amount, and then the oil level should
Be careful not to assemble and disassemble the plugs
be checked again after the vehicle runs 5km（especially the oil
repeatedly so as to prevent any damage to the thread.
level of the intermediate axle box and the inter-axle
differential）. Fill the oil when the oil level is low.  Fill lubricant into the clearance adjusting arm every 2000km.
 During the operation of the vehicle, the drive axle and wheel
415
Suspension
Suspension first-level maintenance with the interval mileage of 1500～

Air suspension 2000 km, or at the specified vehicle safety inspection time.
Operation requirements •During the inspection, the vehicle should be parked on a clean
Vehicles may not be overloaded. and flat surface, and it is preferred to park the vehicle on the
No lubricant or grease can be used on any part of air maintenance trench. Pull up the parking brake and fix the
suspension system. And in particular, it is forbidden to use vehicle （ the requirements here should also apply to the
lubricant or grease on the rubber parts. inspection and maintenance described below）.
Routine inspection and maintenance •Safety inspection items:
•Routine inspection should be done before a trip every day: - All fasteners are not loosened, the tightening torque meets the
- Visually check whether the airbag inflation is adequate and specified requirements, and there is dirt, rust or metal abrasion
balanced. around bolt head and nut due to loosening.
- Check whether the suspension height is normal and whether - At the supply pressure of more than 6.0 bar, the airbag can be
the system leaks. inflated normally and the airbags on both sides of the same axle
•Easy inspection method: When picking up the vehicle from have the same degree of firmness. Check that the airbag is free
OEM, park the vehicle on a flat surface, measure the distance of wear, damage or improper swelling. There is a clearance of
from the center of the wheel to the fixing point on the vehicle 25 mm or more around the airbag.
body and record the data. For the subsequent inspection, park - The shock absorber is free from oil leakage or damage and
the vehicle on a flat surface and test the data. If the data shows works properly（it works normally if the shock absorber heats
no substantial change, it indicates that the suspension height is up after a trip. Note: The shock absorber may be hot）.
normal and the system does not leak. Otherwise the cause - All parts and welds are free from cracking.
should be found and eliminated.
•See "Vehicle maintenance" for other maintenance content.
Regular safety inspection
•Regular safety inspection can be carried out at the time of
416
Suspension
Air suspension with single swing arm

 Vehicles may not be overloaded!
 Maximum allowable load of single axle is 13T, and the vehicle should run
on the expressway and class-1 highway and other good roads.
 No lubricant or grease can be used on any part of air suspension system.
And in particular, it is forbidden to use lubricant or grease on the rubber
parts.
 It is required to maintain the normal air supply pressure, and air
suspension system supply pressure should be maintained at about 8.5bar.
 For air suspension vehicles with the lifting function, lifting should be done
when the vehicle maintains its normal height.
 Routine inspection and maintenance includes: Visually check whether the
airbag inflation is adequate and balanced, whether the suspension height is
normal, whether the system leaks, whether the shock absorber is involved
with oil leakage and whether the shock absorber works normally.
417
Suspension
Rubber suspension
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle when there is cracking, breaking or
serious corrosion on the frame lug. Otherwise the component
separation may occur, causing the vehicle out of control and
personal injury or property loss!
 Check the edge of the rubber spring for signs of rupture or tear（at least
once a year）.
 Do not remove any attached fasteners and rubber components.
 No lubricant or grease can be used on any part of rubber suspension. And
in particular, it is forbidden to use lubricant or grease on the rubber parts.
 SINOTRUK recommends the use of Class 10.9 bolts, hardened washers,
and Class 10 locknuts. Hardened washers are not necessary when flange
head fasteners are used.
Note: Do not tighten the nut to install the cotter pin, otherwise the
tightening torque will be reduced below the specified value.
WARNING
Lack of the tightening torque can cause early wear or damage
of the axle brackets, holes, and/or connecting parts on the
balance beam.
418
Drive shaft
Drive shaft
Drive shaft assembly is located at the bottom of the vehicle chassis and have
the function of transmitting power. Since the drive shaft assembly is
equipped with the universal joint bearing, intermediate hanger bearing and
spline expansion joint, in order to ensure the normal operation of the drive
shaft assembly, the drive shaft assembly should be maintained regularly, and
the maintenance and removal/refitting requirements are as follows:
Universal joint bearing
Ordinary bearing
The bearing should be regularly filled with grease. It is recommended to fill
grease for the road vehicles every 30,000km, and to fill grease for dump
trucks and cement mixers every 5000km（or regular maintenance according

to the vehicle warranty policy）.
Grease grade is Derunbao WGC-2 special grease for universal joint. And
also universal lithium grease for 2#d vehicle and multi-functional lithium
complex grease can be used. The grease resistance to high and low
temperature is -30℃~120°C.
Grease filling method: Fill the grease from the nipple ① until fresh grease
overflows from one of the universal joint shaft bowls. For mine site vehicles 1
and engineering vehicles in poor road conditions, the time or mileage to fill
the grease should be shortened.
419
Drive shaft
Maintenance-free bearing
The universal joint used in the maintenance-free drive shaft is a maintenance-free structure. Regular inspection of the universal joint
is necessary to reduce and avoid any form of failure.
1）Inspection cycle
According to the mileage of the whole vehicle, there are differences in the requirements of the universal joint inspection cycle. The
inspection cycle reference table is as follows:（the mileage and time are subject to the first-come）
vehicle model Mileage Inspection cycle（10,000 km/month）
Within 150,000 km 5/6

Road vehicles
Over 150,000 km 2/3
2）Inspection items:
① Grease leakage ② Overheating ③ Abnormal sound ④ Gap ⑤ Water
3）Inspection method and judgment
① Grease leakage
A little grease exudes out near the universal joint oil seal, and the exudation part is covered with dust, no dripping or smashing
phenomenon, which is a normal oil spill phenomenon, and there is no need to replace the drive shaft.
A large piece of grease appears near the universal joint oil seal, the universal joint fork or the flange fork, indicating that there is a
large amount of grease leakage in the universal joint, and the drive shaft needs to be replaced.
420
Drive shaft
② Overheating
Check the exposed part of the cross shaft and the shaft bowl. If the high temperature discoloration occurs, it indicates that the
universal joint cross shaft or the bearing roller needle may be damaged, and the drive shaft needs to be replaced. If there is a
significant gap, it indicates that there is wear on the cross shaft. It is recommended to replace the drive shaft.
③ Abnormal sound
When rotating the transmission shaft, the universal joint bearing has an abnormal sound, irregular bearing rolling sound, which
indicates that the cross shaft may be irregularly worn, or the bearing roller needle may be damaged. It is suggested to replace the
drive shaft.
④ Gap
When shaking the universal joints at both ends of the drive shaft from left to right or up and down, check whether there is obvious
movement in the axial direction of the cross shaft. If the movement is greater than 1 mm, the axial clearance is too large. It is
recommended to replace the drive shaft.
⑤ Water
When rotating the drive shaft, if there is a transparent or turbid liquid dripping near the joint seal, or there is a lot of rust, it indicates
that the the universal joint may enter the water and the drive shaft needs to be replaced.
421
Drive shaft
Hanger bearing with the intermediate drive shaft

 For the drive shaft that is connected at end face gear, the hanger should
use the maintenance-free bearing without oil filling.
 For the drive shaft that is connected on plane, the hanger bearing should be
filled with grease regularly. Generally, the grease is filled every 30,000km
filling a grease（or regular maintenance according to the vehicle warranty
policy）.
Grease grade is the universal lithium grease for 2# vehicle.
Grease filling method: Fill the grease from the spline connection pad nipple
1 ①until lubricant overflows from the hanger port.
Drive shaft with the spline telescopic joint
Fill the spline with grease regularly. Generally, fill the grease for road
vehicles every 30,000km, and fill the grease for dump trucks and cement
mixers every 5,000km（or regular maintenance according to the vehicle
warranty policy）.
Grease grade is the universal lithium grease for 2# vehicle.
Grease filling method: Fill the grease from the spline shaft sleeve pipe
nipple ② until lubricant overflows from the sleeve pipe oil seal.
For mine site vehicles and engineering vehicles in poor road conditions, the
time or mileage to fill the grease should be shortened.
For the drive shafts that are used in the harsh conditions such as mud,
2 dust, ozone, high/low temperature, the maintenance cycle should be
shortened.
422
Drive shaft
The drive shaft assembly should, if disassembled for inspection and

maintenance, be assembled according to the following steps: 1
1. When reassembling the intermediate drive shaft assembly, for the drive
shaft connected at end face gear, ensure that the four holes of the spline
connecting plate corresponds with the four holes on the plate; for the drive
shaft connected on plane, ensure that the nipple on the spline connecting
plate corresponds with the oil groove on the spline joint; remove the
adhesive powder and oil stain on the thread surface of the connecting bolts,
nuts and intermediate spline joints; after applying LT271 thread locking glue
2 3
on the thread ① , screwon the connectors and tighten at the torque of

650Nm, and put them aside for 24 h before operation. When installing the
intermediate shaft and the frame beam hanging plate, ensure that the
intermediate shaft hanger ② is perpendicular to the drive shaft axis③, and
2 2
when necessary, adjust the angle of the hanging plate.
2. When disassembling the drive shaft assembly with a tele scopic spline,
ensure that the painted mark arrow ②（or steel word arrow）on the drive
shaft spline joint corresponds with the painted mark arrow ②（or steel word
arrow）on the spline hub, and ensure that the cross shaft ① axes of the
universal joints of the connecting plates on both sides are located in the 1 1
same plane.
423
Drive shaft
3. When the drive shaft assembly is assembled on the vehicle, the superimposed vibration frequency, it will produce vehicle
ensure that the cross shaft axis of the universal joint of the vibration, which is called "resonance." Depending on the
connecting plate of the intermediate drive shaft is located in the superimposed vibration frequency, it is reflected at different
same plane as the telescopic joint drive shaft.4. When driving speeds. When the "resonance" speed coincides with the
disassembling the middle support hanger, ensure that the rubber driver's daily driving speed, the problem will be highlighted,
buffer plate is located at the center of U-hanger and ensure that but for maintenance and other considerations, some personnel
the rubber buffer plate is locked vertically to the assembly axis. mistakenly believe that it is caused by the shaft vibration.
5. When disassembling the universal joint bearing, make sure Recommendation: Do not replace the drive shaft assembly.
to move the universal joint bearing by hand, and there should Solution: Remove the bolt on one end of the drive shaft, and
be no seizure or appreciable axial clearance. When installing rotate the connected flange by 180 degrees, and refit and fasten
the drive shaft that uses the bearing elastic ring, ensure that the
it. If still unsolved, replace the transmission（axle）output
ring will not fall into the ring groove.
（input）flange attached to the drive shaft.
6. When the drive shaft assembly is assembled on the vehicle,
2. The drive shaft universal joint is involved with repeated
replace the lock bolts and nuts with new ones, and use a torque
burn-out.
wrench to calibrate the tightening torque. （ Recommended
Cause analysis:
tightening torque: M12×1.25 at the torque of 120Nm; M14×1.5
（ 1 ） The drive shaft mounting swing angle （ vertical,
at the torque of 185Nm; M16×1.5 at the torque of 280Nm）
horizontal）is wide（such as AC16 axle）
Typical fault analysis
1. Drive shaft vibration: （2）Poor road conditions（mine-made section）
When the powertrain and transmission system is involved with （3）Oil lack of universal joint（not oil filled as required）
424
Vehicle maintenance
Vehicle maintenance
First maintenance means that the user receives the vehicle maintenance at the authorized service station according to SINOTRUK
maintenance requirements for the first time（hereinafter referred to as the "First maintenance"）Regular maintenance means that the
user receives the vehicle maintenance at the authorized service station according to SINOTRUK maintenance requirements on a
regular basis（hereinafter referred to as the "Regular maintenance"）
Road vehicles refer to the tractors, flatbed trucks, stake trucks, tankers and other vehicles which are often used on the classified
highways. Off-road vehicles refer to the construction site trucks, mine trucks, dump trucks, side dumpers and other vehicles which
are often used on the roads other than the classified highways. When the assembly maintenance（engine, axle, etc.）is involved in the
table, the listed items and maintenance requirements are for reference only, and the specific provisions of the assembly maintenance
shall prevail.
First maintenance Regular maintenance
Assembly Maintenance items Regular maintenance mileage
First maintenance
mileage（km） Off-road vehicles,
Road vehicles
cement mixers
1. Check whether the engine wiring harness plug is involved with loose,
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
interference or wear
2. Check whether the pipe is involved with loose, interference or wear 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
3. Check whether there is leakage of oil 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Engine 4. Check the fuel coarse filter oil level scale（if possible） 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
5. Check and clean the oil tank float filter 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
6. Check whether the oil and coolant level fall within the normal scale 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
7. Change the engine oil See "Engine maintenance"
425
Vehicle maintenance

First maintenance
Road vehicles
cement mixers
Replace the oil filter element while replacing the engine oil, and
8. Change the oil filter element
for the first replacement, use the vehicle-attached oil filter element.
9. Check and clean the air filter element, and check whether the air filter alarm
See "Air filter maintenance"
sensor works normally
10. Change the coolant See "Engine maintenance"
11. Check the fan connecting bolts; check whether the fan interferes with the fan
2000~5000km Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
cowl or there is the possibility of interference
Engine
12. Check the tensioner to ensure the belt tension 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
13. Check the engine idle speed 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
14. Check for abnormal noise 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
15. Check whether the engine suspension connection bolts are loose 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
16. Check whether the engine support rubber pad is damaged 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
17. Check whether the engine oil pressure and water temperature are normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
18. Read the engine fault code and check whether there is a fault 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
19. Read the SCR fault code, and check whether there is a fault 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
20. Select the type of common rail system on EOL, and check that the
accelerator pedal position can change from full close to full open normally（only 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
for DENSO）
EOL tool
inspection 21. Check whether K value is correct 2000～5000
22. Check whether the fuel moisture alarm sensor is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
23. Check whether the common rail pressure is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
24. Check whether the intake manifold pressure is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
25. Read the ABS fault code and check whether there is a fault 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
426
Vehicle maintenance

First maintenance
Road vehicles
cement mixers
EOL tool
26. Other parameter values 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
inspection
27.Check whether the clutch is disengaged completely, and whether the
engagement is stable without slip 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
28. Check the clutch hydraulic fluid level 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
29. Check whether the clutch booster exhaust port is blocked 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Clutch 30. Lubricate the clutch pedal shaft 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
31. Check the clutch booster stroke 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
32. Lubricate the release bearing sleeve 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
33. Change the clutch oil See "Clutch maintenance"
34. Check the transmission lubrication level. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
35. Replace the transmission lubricant（replace the retarder oil and filter element
See “Transmission” in Chapter V
at the same time）.
36. Lubricate the clutch fork shaft and clutch fork shaft support position. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
37. Lubricate the transmission shifting mechanism and check the transmission
Transmission connecting bolts. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
38. Check the transmission（retarder）vent plug. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
39. Check if the transmission control mechanism is working properly. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
40. Check if the power take-off is working properly. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
41. Check for oil leaks and air leaks. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
42. Change the drive axle lubricant See the “Drive axle” in Chapter V
MC drive
43. Lubricate the brake clearance adjusting arm See the “Drive axle” in Chapter V
axle
44. Check whether the brake return is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
427
Vehicle maintenance

First maintenance
Road vehicles
cement mixers
45. Check whether the differential lock works normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
MC drive 46. Check the vent 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
axle 47. Check the clearance between the brake shoe and brake drum / disc brake pad
See the “Drive axle” in Chapter V
wear amount
40. Replace the drive axle final drive gear oil See the “Drive axle” in Chapter V
41. Lubricate the brake clearance adjusting arm 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
42. Check whether the brake return is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Other drive
axles 43. Check whether the differential lock works normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
44. Check the vent 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
45. Check the clearance between the brake shoe and brake drum / disc brake pad
See the “Drive axle” in Chapter V
wear amount
46. Lubricate front steering kingpin 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
47. Lubricate the brake adjusting arm 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
48. According to the tire condition, check and adjust the front wheel toe-in and
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
wheel tightness when necessary
49. Check whether the steering tie rod clamp bolt and ball is loose 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Front
steering axle 50. Check whether the steering drag link clamp bolt and ball is loose 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
and steering 51. Check whether the pendulum of the steering gear is loose 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
gear
53. Check whether the steering rod has abnormal wear 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
54. Check whether the steering gear oil level is normal, and clean the filter
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
element when necessary
55. Check whether the steering power pipe is involved with aging or oil leakage 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
56. Check whether the oil and gas pipes are involved with interference or wear 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
428
Vehicle maintenance

First maintenance
Road vehicles
cement mixers
Front 57. Check the clearance between the brake shoe and brake drum / disc brake pad
See “Front axle” in Chapter V
steering axle wear amount
and steering 58. Check whether the brake return is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
gear 59. Change the steering gear oil See “Steering system” in Chapter V
60. Lubricate the drive shaft telescopic sleeve and drive shaft universal joint
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
bearing
Drive shaft 61. Check the drive shaft hanger bolt 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
62. Check the drive shaft coupling bolt 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
63. Lubricate the vehicle leaf spring and bushing 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
64. Fasten the front and rear U-bolts 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
65. Check the leaf spring bracket lug connecting bolt 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
66. Check the function of leaf spring stop 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
67. Check the frame tube cross beam mounting bolt 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
68. Check the V-type thrust rod and the lower thrust rod bolt 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
69. Check the clearance between the balance suspension leaf spring and the
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Chassis sliding plate, and lubricate the sliding plate
70. Check whether the balance shaft is involved with oil leakage 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
71. Fill the balance shaft gear oil Each side 1L GL-5 85W/90 gear oil, oil change is unnecessary
72. Check the balance shaft bolts connected with the frame 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
73. Check the wheel nuts 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
74. Check the various parts for oil, gas or water leakage 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
75. Check for pipe wear and possible wear state 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
76. Check water pipe for interference and possible damage 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
429
Vehicle maintenance

First maintenance
Road vehicles
cement mixers
77. Check the service brake and parking brake air tightness 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
78. Check whether the vehicle brake pressure reaches the specified value 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Braking 79. Drain the water in the air reservoir 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
system 80. Check whether the brake is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
81. Check the brake pipe for wear and possible damage 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
82. Check whether the system leaks 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
83. Check whether the lights and instruments work normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
84. Check whether the charging state of the generator is normal 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
85. Check the fastening situation of the battery power cord and ground wire; 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
86. Check the wire harness for interference and keep the harness away from heat
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Electrical or sharp objects.
system 87. Check the connection between the wiring harness and electric connectors 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
88. Check whether the wiper system works normally and whether it is necessary
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
to fill the detergent
89. Check the fuse and specifications 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
90. Check whether MP5, Telematics works normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
91. Check the fastening tilt mechanism bolts 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
92. Check whether the door operating mechanism works normally 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Cab
93. Check whether the locking mechanism is reliable and is well lubricated 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
94. Check whether the seat adjuster works properly, and fill the lithium lubricant
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
in the seat adjusting mechanism groove
430
Vehicle maintenance

First maintenance
Road vehicles
cement mixers
95. Check whether the steering wheel and steering gear work properly 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
96. Check whether the body suspension airbag, height adjuster and shock
2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
absorber work properly
Cab 97. Check whether the seat belt works properly Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
2000～5000
98. Check the lift pump hydraulic oil amount 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
99. Fill the lift pump hydraulic oil See “Cab Tilting Mechanism”
107. Check the tightening torque of the air suspension and its mounting 2000～5000 Every 30,000km
fasteners, if necessary, replace the failed self-locking nuts or lock washers.
Air
suspension 108. Check the air springs. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km
system 109. Check the shock absorbers. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km
110. Check and maintain the height control valve. 2000～5000 Every 30,000km
105. Clean the urea vent pipe 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
SCR system 106. Replace the urea pump filter（80,000km or 4 years） 2000～5000 Every 30,000km Every 5,000km
Need to go to the designated service station for replacement
107. Check the filter assembly of the urea supply unit
after every 3 years or 80,000 km.
431
Chapter 6 Safety and Environmental Protection
432
Safety notes
Recommendations for towing

Safety notes
See "Towing and towing start"
General safety precautions
Prevent any damage to the electrical system
Plastic hose, rubber hose and wire harness
See "Electrical system"
Accessories and parts

WARNING
For your own benefit, you are recommended to use the
Do not weld or drill near plastic hoses, rubber "original" parts of SINOTRUK only. The reliability, safety and
hoses or wire harnesses. suitability of these accessories and parts have been approved.
Although we keep eyes on the market all the time, we still fail
to judge the performance of other products on the market. We
Re-tightening the wheel nuts
will not be responsible for their quality even if they are
For a new vehicle or a vehicle that has just been replaced with approved by an official body.
wheels, retighten the wheel nuts after 50 km, see "Replace the
Safety devices and vehicle tools
wheels".
Check whether the following devices are complete:
●Jack, jack rocker, vehicle tools
433
Safety notes
Modified parts and attachments Safe handling of batteries
Install according to SINOTRUK related model modification Note
manual. ○
i Avoid using the vehicle's electrical appliances for a
The user must obtain a written approval from the bodywork long time when the engine is not working, such as:
manufacturer. interior lights, radios, etc., to prevent the battery

from being deeply discharged, unable to start the
Any modification inconsistent with the structure of
vehicle and shorten the battery life.
SINOTRUK vehicle shall be approved in writing by the
designated department of SINOTRUK. The unauthorized The natural leakage generated by the vehicle load is
modification of the vehicle by the user is prohibited. not evaded. Therefore, if the vehicle is parked for
more than 10 days, the negative connection of the
The above requirements also apply to the vehicle attachments,
battery should be removed to avoid leakage of the
such as air conditioning system, rear baffle, retarder and so on.
load and prevent deep discharge of the battery.
Overload protection for the braking system/energy storage
When the battery has been used for more than 2
chamber
years, it is recommended to replace the battery,
When the parking brake is enabled, the service brake（foot whether or not it fails, so as to avoid the vehicle
brake）cannot be enabled. Otherwise the superposition of the failing to start due to natural failure of the battery.
braking forces of the parking brake and service brake may
occur, which may damage the brakes.
434
Safety notes
 Some batteries are equipped with an acid level indicator. Highly explosive gas builds up during charging, handling or
According to the label ① on the battery, observe the color on vibration and exhausts from the vent hole. When the
the indicator ② to determine if the battery needs to be concentration of hydrogen in the environment exceeds 4%, an
recharged or replaced. explosion will occur in the event of naked flames. Ensure
adequate ventilation in the room. Keep away sources of fire,
sparks and naked flames. Do not smoke! When the battery is
2 charging, it is strictly forbidden to move the battery without
disconnecting the power supply; The battery should be left
standing for 10 minutes after it has been charged. It is
1
forbidden to have an open flame nearby. It is forbidden to hit
and drop the battery. Keep away from naked flames and
prohibit hitting and dropping batteries.
The liquid in the battery is dilute sulfuric acid, which must be
handled carefully and placed vertically to prevent sulfuric acid
from overflowing. If you get battery acid on any areas of your
skin, immediately remove contaminated clothing and rinse with
Safe handling of batteries plenty of water; If you get battery acid in your eyes, rinse
Wear protective glasses when handling and installing the immediately with clean water for at least 2 minutes and seek
battery. medical assistance; If you swallow battery acid, immediately
Avoid metal tools or wires touching the positive and negative drink plenty of water and milk, rinse out your mouth with water
poles at the same time to prevent short circuits. and seek medical assistance.
435
Safety notes
Battery transportation positive lead.

Avoid excessive bumps and avoid impact during transportation. Remove the battery.
Avoid high environment temperatures（not exceeding 45℃）. Confirm that the performance of the new battery and the old
battery are consistent. Use a multimeter to verify that the
Do not invert or tilt batteries.
polarity of the battery is correct, and the battery is charged
The battery should be prevented from tilting more than 40°
（voltage greater than 12.5V）.
during handling to prevent acid from flowing out of the vent
Clean the battery terminals and the end of the vehicle cable.
hole.
Install and secure the new battery.
Battery storage
Connect the battery terminals and the end of the vehicle cable
Prevent battery failure due to long storage time and
（First the positive lead, then the negative lead.）.
unnecessary loss.
Check the batteries regularly. If the voltage is less than 12.3V, it WARNING
should be charged. During the installation of the battery, the
The battery should be stored in a cool, ventilated place. accidental short circuit between the positive and
negative electrodes should be prevented;
Battery replacement process
It is forbidden to reverse the connection of
Turn off the engine and all electrical appliances on vehicle, turn
positive and negative poles, otherwise it will
off the battery mater switch.
damage the vehicle's electrical appliances!
Disconnect the negative lead of the battery first, then the
436
Safety notes
Battery charging When charging is finished, turn off the charger power switch,
then disconnect the battery charging cable.（Do not remove the
Select the appropriate charging device, read the device manual
carefully before operation, and operate as required. charging cable without disconnecting the power during
charging.）
Connect the terminals of the battery with the charging device
turned off.
Connect the positive pole（usually red）of the charger output to Note
the positive terminal of the battery and connect the negative ○

i Do not charge batteries that have cracked the
terminal（blue or black wire）to the negative terminal of the casing, that have solidified electrolyte, or that
battery and confirm that the connection is secure. need to be replaced.
Turn on the charging switch of the charger, and slowly adjust Charging the battery should be done in a
the charging voltage or current from small to large through the well-ventilated environment.
charger regulator until the required setting range is reached.
During the charging process, if the battery
When charging starts for 2 to 3 hours, pay attention to observe temperature exceeds 45 °C, the charging voltage
and adjust the charging current in time to prevent accidents. should be appropriately reduced, or the charging
should be stopped; If the battery vent has acid
The charging duration and completion conditions are judged
overflow, stop charging immediately.
according to the type of the charger.
437
Safety notes
Compressed air reservoir - Wear gloves and goggles! In the event of accidental splashing
 The air reservoir is specially used for the braking systems of of the refrigerant into the skin or eyes, seek medical attention
the vehicle and its trailer as well as the auxiliary equipment. immediately.
 The air reservoir is marked with product model and supplier - Do not drain the gaseous refrigerant in a enclosed room.
ID. There is the risk of suffocation!
 When installing the fastening tape, be careful not to contact - Pump out the refrigerant with a special treatment system.
with the welding spot on the air reservoir, so as to prevent any - Do not perform welding operations on or near the
safety damage to the reservoir due to the tension yield. refrigeration system components. Such operation is not allowed
 Clean the air reservoir only with non-alkaline cleaning agent. even when the refrigerant has been drained. Danger of
 To prevent water accumulation in the reservoir, it should be explosion and poisoning!
drained thoroughly. The drain valve is located at the bottom of - Do not clean the refrigeration system components with steam.
the reservoir. - Inspect and repair the refrigeration system at SINOTRUK
 The air reservoir（housing, base, thread and accessories） service station.
should be protected from any handling which may cause any - Air-conditioning system is filled with fluorine-free R134a
safety damage, such as welding, heat treating, or other refrigerant. It is forbidden to use or mix with other types of
processes. refrigerants.
WARNING
Air conditioning systems and refrigeration elements Refrigerants and volatile vapors are harmful to
- Avoid contact with refrigerant and its volatiles. human health!
438
Safety notes
 Keep them out of the reach of children.

Wasted oil
 Keep them away from the fire. No smoking.
When dealing with the wasted oil, pay attention to the
followings:  Immediately remove the contaminated clothing or clothing
immersed with these chemicals.
 Long-time or frequent contact with the oil will remove the
grease on the skin, causing dry skin, irritability or redness.  Do not drain these chemicals into the sewers.
 Experiments on animal skin have shown that waste oil  Clean the skin exposed to the oil:
contains carcinogens. The waste oil will not be a dangerous
- Clean the skin thoroughly with soap and water
product if the basic safety and hygienic procedures are
followed when dealing with the waste oil. - Improve the cleaning effect with a small brush
Health protection warning - It is recommended to use special cleaning agent
 Prevent long-time, excessive or frequent contact with the - Do not clean the skin with petrol, diesel, kerosene, thinner or
waste oil. solvent
 Protect your skin with suitable protective agent or protective  Apply some skin care oil after cleaning.
gloves.  Remove the clothes and shoes contaminated with oil.
When handling the cleaning agent, coolant, engine oil, fuel,  Do not put oil rags in your pocket.
etc., pay attention to your safety:
439
Safety notes
Truck side guards

Truck side guard ①: To prevent personnel from being involved.
Rear guard ②: To prevent the truck from accidents of drilling rear-end
crash.
2
1
Triangle warning board

Triangle warning board ③: It should be placed according to the traffic rules
and can be seen easily by the driver of the vehicle behind when a vehicle
malfunctions or a traffic accident occurs during driving.
440
Safety notes
Basic requirements for side guards

 Side rail is composed of the vertical support and crossbar. The vertical
support is bent or welded from steel pipe or angle steel and is bolted onto
the side of the subframe.
 The crossbar is made of M-steel or C-steel and is welded onto the vertical
support.
441
Safety notes
Cross-sectional dimensions and materials of transverse bar

 Section size: 120×25×3（mm）or 120×25×3（mm）
 Material: Q235A
Rear guard structure

The rear guard usually adopts a fixed structure, and the fixed rear guard is
composed of a guard bracket, a diagonal bracing and a crossbar. The guard
bracket is made of bent channel steel or angle steel and is strengthened by
the diagonal bracing made of channel steel and angle steel inside the bracket.
The crossbar is welded to the guard bracket, and the guard bracket is
connected to the tail of the frame.
Section size: Rectangular steel pipe of 100×50×4（mm）or 120×60×4（mm）
Material: Q235A
442
Environmental protection
Environmental protection
Used waste oil（engine oil, transmission gear oil, etc.）
Note
- Dispose of used waste oil properly.
- Waste oil will pollute the soil and underground water.
 Do not pour waste oil on the floor, in water or in sewers and drain pipes, otherwise you may be accused.
 Carefully collect and dispose of the used waste oil, and the provisions of the relevant local authorities must be followed.
Cartridges, elements, filters and drying cans
 Waste filter elements, cartridges and filters（oil/fuel filters, drying cans of air dryers）are classified as Class I hazardous products
and should be disposed of properly.
 The provisions of the relevant local authorities must be followed.
Coolant
 The undiluted coolant is a dangerous product.
 For the handling of the used coolant, the provisions of the relevant local authorities must be followed.
443
Chapter 7 Technical parameters
444
Technical parameters
Diesel engine parameters table
Model MC11.43-30 MC11.39-30 MC11.35-30 MC11.31-30 MC13.48-30 MC13.54-30
Emission standard Euro Ⅲ Euro Ⅲ
Number of cylinders 6 6
Number of valves/cylinder 4 4
Bore（mm） 120 126
Travel（mm） 155 166
Displacement（L） 10.518 12.419
Compression ratio 19:1 19:1
Rated power（kW/Ps） 316/430 287/390 257/350 228/310 353/480 397/540
Rated speed（rpm） 1900 1900
Maximum torque（Nm） 2100 1900 1750 1550 2300 2500
Maximum torque speed（rpm） 1000～1400 1050～1400 1050～1350
Minimum fuel consumption（g/kWh） ≤186 ≤186
Idle speed（rpm） 550±50 600±50
Ignition sequence 1－5－3－6－2－4 1－5－3－6－2－4
Oil pan capacity（L） 40 40
Clockwise（viewed from the
Crankshaft rotation direction Clockwise（viewed from the free end）
free end）
445
Diesel engine parameters table

MC11.32-40 MC11.36-40 MC11.40-40 MC11.44-40 MC13.48-40 MC13.54-40
Model
MC11.32-50 MC11.36-50 MC11.40-50 MC11.44-50 MC13.48-50 MC13.54-50
Emission standard Euro Ⅳ, Euro Ⅴ（SCR）
Number of cylinders 6
Number of valves/cylinder 4
Bore（mm） 120 126
Travel（mm） 155 166
Displacement（L） 10.518 12.419
Compression ratio 19:1
Rated power（kW/Ps） 235/320 265/360 294/400 324/440 353/480 397/540
Maximum net power speed（rpm） 1900
Rated speed（rpm） 1900
Maximum torque（Nm） 1600 1800 1900 2100 2300 2500
Maximum torque speed（rpm） 1000～1400 1050～1400 1050～1350
Minimum fuel consumption
≤185 ≤185
（g/kWh）
Idle speed（rpm） 550±50 600±50
Ignition sequence 1－5－3－6－2－4
446
NG engine parameters table

Model MT13.36-50 MT13.40-50 MT13.43-50
Emission standard Euro Ⅴ
Number of cylinders 6
Number of valves/cylinder 4
Bore（mm） 126
Travel（mm） 166
Displacement（L） 12.419
Compression ratio 11.5:1
Maximum net power（kW/PS） 262/356 291/396 313/425
Maximum net power speed（rpm） 1900
Rated power（kW/Ps） 265/360 294/400 316/430
Rated speed（rpm） 1900
Maximum torque（Nm） 1800 1900 1900
Maximum torque speed（rpm） 1100～1400
Minimum specific gas consumption（g/kWh） ≤185
Idle speed（rpm） 550±50
Ignition sequence 1－5－3－6－2－4
447
ZF Transmission parameters table

Model 16S2222TO 16S1930TD 16S2230TD 16S2230TO 16S2530TO 16S2231TO 16S2531TO
Input torque（Nm） 2200 1900 2200 2200 2500 2200 2500
Gear 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
1 13.8 16.41 16.41 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8
2 11.54 13.8 13.8 11.54 11.54 11.54 11.54
3 9.49 11.28 11.28 9.49 9.49 9.49 9.49
4 7.93 9.49 9.49 7.93 7.93 7.93 7.93
5 6.35 7.76 7.76 6.53 6.53 6.53 6.53
6 5.46 6.53 6.53 5.46 5.46 5.46 5.46
7 4.57 5.43 5.43 4.57 4.57 4.57 4.57
8 3.82 4.57 4.57 3.82 3.82 3.82 3.82
Each 9 3.02 3.59 3.59 3.02 3.02 3.02 3.02
gear
ratio 10 2.53 3.02 3.02 2.53 2.53 2.53 2.53
11 2.08 2.47 2.47 2.08 2.08 2.08 2.08
12 1.74 2.08 2.08 1.74 1.74 1.74 1.74
13 1.43 1.7 1.7 1.43 1.43 1.43 1.43
14 1.2 1.43 1.43 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
15 1 1.19 1.19 1 1 1 1
16 0.84 1 1 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
R1 12.92 15.36 15.36 12.92 12.92 12.92 12.92
R2 10.8 12.92 12.92 10.8 10.8 10.8 10.8
Weight（kg） 403 314 314 314 314 379 379
448
SmartShift® AMT parameters table

Model HW20716AL HW20716ACL HW25712XA HW25712XAC
Input torque
2000 2200 2500 2500
（Nm）
Gear 16 16 12 12
1 15.586 13.125 15.012 11.795
2 13.125 11.053 11.667 9.167
3 10.885 9.167 9.030 7.095
4 9.167 7.719 7.146 5.615
5 7.481 6.300 5.568 4.375
6 6.300 5.305 4.375 3.438
7 5.195 4.375 3.431 2.696
8 4.375 3.684 2.667 2.095
9 3.563 3.000 2.064 1.622
Each
10 3.000 2.526 1.633 1.283
gear
11 2.488 2.095 1.273 1.000
ratio
12 2.095 1.764 1.000 0.786
13 1.710 1.440
14 1.440 1.213
–
15 1.188 1.000
16 1.000 0.842
R1 14.287 12.031 13.811 10.852
R2 12.031 10.132 3.157 2.480
R3 3.266 2.750
–
R4 2.750 2.316
Weight（kg） 300 300 395 395
449
ZF-Intard Parameters table

Amount of oil
Tightening torque（Nm）
filling Filter
Matching Lubricant
Retarder element
transmission When Retarder Refueling Install the level/oil change
After Transmission filter Transmission part
model changing drain port plug after temperature cycle
repair drain plug element spill plug number
oil plug maintenance sensor bolt
bolt
16 S See
0501
2231TD/TO 18.5L 25.5L 60±6 60±6 23±2 60±6 60±6 9.5±1 "Transmission
215 163
16 S2531TO maintenance"
Front axle parameter table
Model HF7/9 HR7/9 VPD085QB H153

Inner wheel maximum angle（°） 43 43 43 42
Outer wheel maximum angle（°） 33 32 30 32
Road vehicle 3°
Kingpin caster angle（°） 0 ° 0 ° 0 °
Off-road vehicle 2°
Kingpin inclination angle（°） 3 6 7.5 7
Wheel camber（°） 1 1 0.5 1
Radial tire 0′±4′ 0′±4′ 0′±4′
Toe-in 6′±2′
Bias tire 12′±4′ 12′±4′ 4′±4′
Drum Disc（P20WA or Disc（QP222400AJ04）
Brake type 鼓式（Φ400×150）
（Φ420×160） P22AJ）（QP222400AJ04）
Applicable minimum rim（inch） 20 20 or 22 22.5 20
450
Balance shaft maintenance

Oil product Quality grade and
Assembly Quantity Maintenance mileage and maintenance items
name viscosity grade
GL-5 85W-90
Balance shaft Gear Oil One side 1L No change
Q/ZZ21040
Leaf spring parameters
Front suspension
Less-leaf spring Multi-leaf spring
Leaf spring Leaf spring Leaf spring
Drive type Front axle model
specifications specifications specifications
Tractor 4×2 HR7 disc 3×25
Tractor HR7 disc 3×25
Truck 6×4 HR7 disc, HR9 disc 4×22 9×16
Dump truck HR7 disc, HR9 disc 10×16 10×17
Truck 8×4 HR7 disc, HR9 disc 4×22 11×15
6×2
Tractor HR7 disc 3×25
（9-airbag）
451
Rear suspension
Less-leaf spring Multi-leaf spring
Leaf spring
Drive type Rear axle model Leaf spring specifications
specifications
Tractor 4×2 MCY13 5×27
Tractor MCY13Q、MCY11 5×34
Truck 6×4 MCY13Q、AC16、MCP16 5×37 12×25
Dump truck HC16、AC16、MCP16 12×25
Truck 8×4 MCY13Q、AC16、MCP16 5×37 12×25
Wheel parameters table
Model 8.00V-20 8.5-20 22.5×8.25 22.5×9.00 22.5×11.75
Rim type Two-piece Two-piece One-piece One-piece One-piece
12R22.5
315/80R22.5
Tire specifications 11.00R20 12.00R20 275/70R22.5 295/80R22.5 385/65R22.5
315/70R22.5
452
Tire pressure parameter table Wheel balancing requirements

Model Single tire（kPa） Double tire（kPa） Wheel specifications Wheel assembly unbalance（g.cm）
11.00R20（18PR） 930 8.00V-20 2000
12.00R20（18PR） 830 8.5-20 2000
12R22.5（18PR） 930 22.5×8.25 1500
275/70R22.5
830 22.5×9.00 1500
（16PR）
315/70R22.5
760 22.5×11.75 1500
（16PR）
315/70R22.5
830
（18PR）
295/80R22.5
900
（18PR）
315/80R22.5
830
（18PR）
385/65R22.5
900
（20PR）
s
453
Bulb parameter table

Number per vehicle
Light name Bulb model Bulb power（W）
（piece）
Position light PHILPS 5 2
High beam PHILPS 70 2
Auxiliary high beam PHILPS 70 2
Low beam PHILPS 75 2
Fog light PHILPS 70 2
Turn signal light PHILPS 21 2
Turn signal light PHILPS 21 2
Reversing light PHILPS 21 2
T/with side Brake light PHILPS 21 2
marker light,
Rear fog light PHILPS 21 2
7-function Outline marker light PHILPS LED 2
combination rear Side marker light PHILPS LED 2
light Rear position light PHILPS LED 2
License plate light PHILPS 5 1
Height light PHILPS 5 2
Front marker light PHILPS 5 2
After marker light PHILPS 5 2
Rear marker light PHILPS 5 2
Rear marker light PHILPS LED 2
Turn marker light PHILPS 21 2
Interior light PHILPS LED 2
Reading light PHILPS LED 2
Sleeper light PHILPS LED 1
Door light PHILPS 5 2
454

C7H 18 12 11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C7H 18 12 11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Driver's Manual of SITRAK-C7H Series Vehicles

Please carefully check whether VIN is consistent with the certificate.

MC11/13 and MT13 engine nameplate ① is installed on the cylinder, and

1 The engine nameplate information includes: engine model, rated

Door operation/central door lock

1 Door operation/central door lock（outside）

Lock the door

Door operation/central door lock（inside）

Open the door 1

Open the window partially or fully

 Open the ignition switch and set it at ON.

 Press "C" at the end of the rocker switch ①（driver‟s side）or ②

end of the rocker switch ① or ② again will stop the window.

Close the window partially or fully

-Be careful of the risk of injury. 2

-To prevent over-heating of door window and door lock

Rearview mirror adjustment

 Clean the mirror when necessary.

Functions of the mirror adjusting switch

 The mirror will stop in case of any of the following conditions:

The ignition switch is not in ON position.

Rearview mirror adjustment（manual）

 Confirm that the doors are locked before adjustment.

Heating of front windshield

The position of an opened storage box is shown in the figure.

Close the toolbox cover

Central and co-driver‟s side: items storage area.

-When adjusting the roof shroud, be sure to stand on a

-The height of the roof shroud after adjustment must not

-For low-floor flatbed or rail vehicle, the height of the roof

-When operating on international routes, laws and regulations

-Make sure the deflector height is the same on both sides.

 Loosen the star-shaped handle ⑥ on any adjustment bracket until the

 The position after front sunshade is pulled down.

 The position after side sunshade is folded.

 The position after side sunshade is unfolded.

 The driver can push the sunshade ② upward as needed.

 The figure shows a folded curtain.

 After folded, the curtain is bundled and fixed on both sides.

 Unfold the curtain slowly along the rail.

 The figure shows the unfolded surrounding curtain.

 Maximum opening angle of the sunroof ①.

 The sunroof can be opened at three positions.

• Opening at maximum angle position（fully open position）:

-It is unsuitable to fix the child seat on the driver’s and

③ Seat height adjustment

④ Seatback angle adjustment

⑤ Armrest angle adjustment（optional）

Seat angle adjustment

Driver’s seat and co-driver’s seat（double lock/luxury）

-It is unsuitable to fix the child seat on the driver’s and

-Fasten the seat belt before driving, see "Seat belt".

① Seat angle adjustment ② Seat fore/aft adjustment

Seat angle adjustment

 Release the handle.

 Pull up the handle ②and slide the seat forward/backward.

2 3 4 5 the seat is raised to the driving position.

Shock absorber damping adjustment

Seat height adjustment

 Pull up the handle ⑤: The seat is raised.

 Push down the handle ⑤: The seat is lowered.

Seatback angle adjustment

 Release the handle to unlock the seatback.